iMaster NetEco

V600R021C10

Device Installation and

Commissioning Guide (Data
Center)
Issue 02
Date 2021-05-12

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2021. All rights reserved.
No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior
written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks and Permissions

and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective
holders.

Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and
the customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be
within the purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements,
information, and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees
or representations of any kind, either express or implied.

The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Address: Huawei Industrial Base
Bantian, Longgang
Shenzhen 518129
People's Republic of China

Website: https://e.huawei.com

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. i

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) About This Document

About This Document

Purpose
This document describes the iMaster NetEco hardware in terms of installation,
cable connection, commissioning, and maintenance in the data center scenario.

NOTE

● This document does not describe the installation of the uninterruptible power system
(UPS), smart cooling product, and power distribution unit (PDU). By default, the UPS,
smart cooling product, and PDU have been installed and commissioned.
● Figures in this document are for reference only. The actual products may vary.
● For details about iMaster NetEco software commissioning, see iMaster NetEco Product
Documentation (DC) (V600R021C10_xx).

Intended Audience
This document is intended for:

● Hardware installation engineers

● Commissioning engineers
● Maintenance engineers
● Technical support engineers

Symbol Conventions
The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Symbol Description

Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk which, if not

avoided, will result in death or serious injury.

Indicates a hazard with a medium level of risk which, if not

avoided, could result in death or serious injury.

Indicates a hazard with a low level of risk which, if not

avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. ii

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) About This Document

Symbol Description

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not

avoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss,
performance deterioration, or unanticipated results.
NOTICE is used to address practices not related to personal
injury.

Supplements the important information in the main text.

NOTE is used to address information not related to personal
injury, equipment damage, and environment deterioration.

Change History
Issue Release Date Description

02 2021-05-12 This issue is the second official release.

● Optimized the description of setting
iBOX parameters on the iBOX WebUI.
● Optimized and added the content
related to the UPS.
● Optimized and added the content
related to the chiller station.

01 2021-04-15 This issue is the first official release.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. iii

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) Contents

Contents

About This Document................................................................................................................ ii

1 Safety Information.................................................................................................................. 1
1.1 General Safety.......................................................................................................................................................................... 1
1.2 Personnel Requirements....................................................................................................................................................... 4
1.3 Electrical Safety........................................................................................................................................................................ 4
1.4 Installation Environment Requirements.......................................................................................................................... 6
1.5 Mechanical Safety................................................................................................................................................................... 8
1.6 Others....................................................................................................................................................................................... 10

2 Installation Preparations..................................................................................................... 11
2.1 Unpacking and Acceptance............................................................................................................................................... 11
2.2 Tools and Instruments......................................................................................................................................................... 11
2.3 Personnel Requirements..................................................................................................................................................... 14
2.4 Device Networking Solution Overview..........................................................................................................................15
2.5 Installation Process............................................................................................................................................................... 15

3 Installing Devices.................................................................................................................. 17
3.1 Layout in the Network Cabinet........................................................................................................................................17
3.2 Installing a Server................................................................................................................................................................. 18
3.2.1 Installing a TaiShan 200 Server.................................................................................................................................... 18
3.2.2 Installing a 2288X V5 Server..........................................................................................................................................20
3.3 Installing a LAN Switch....................................................................................................................................................... 22
3.4 Installing an ECC800-Pro Collector................................................................................................................................. 23
3.5 Installing a Smart U Space Manager............................................................................................................................. 24
3.6 Installing a UIM20A Expansion Module........................................................................................................................26
3.7 Installing Sensors.................................................................................................................................................................. 28
3.7.1 Installing Cabinet Temperature Sensors.................................................................................................................... 28
3.7.2 Installing a Hydrogen Sensor........................................................................................................................................ 29
3.7.3 Installing the Hydrogen Detection System............................................................................................................... 30
3.7.4 Installing a Smoke Detector.......................................................................................................................................... 33
3.7.5 Installing a Temperature and Humidity Sensor (BOM Number: 33010346)................................................ 34
3.7.6 Installing a Temperature and Humidity Sensor (BOM Number: 02312PBL)................................................ 35
3.7.7 Installing a Region-type Water Sensor...................................................................................................................... 37
3.7.8 Installing a Location-type Water Sensor................................................................................................................... 39

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. iv

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) Contents

3.8 Installing the Video Management System................................................................................................................... 42

3.8.1 Installing an IVS1800....................................................................................................................................................... 42
3.8.2 Installing a C3220 Camera............................................................................................................................................. 48
3.8.3 Installing the M2121 Camera........................................................................................................................................ 50
3.9 Installing the Access Management System................................................................................................................. 53
3.9.1 Installing an A8802RS Access Controller................................................................................................................... 53
3.9.2 Installing an In-Room Double-Door Magnetic Lock............................................................................................. 55
3.9.3 Installing an In-Room Single-Door Magnetic Lock............................................................................................... 57
3.9.4 Installing a Fingerprint and Card Reader with a Keypad.................................................................................... 61
3.9.5 Installing a Fingerprint and Card Reader.................................................................................................................. 62
3.9.6 Installing a Card Reader with a Keypad.................................................................................................................... 63
3.9.7 Installing an Exit Button..................................................................................................................................................65
3.9.8 Installing an In-room Emergency Door Release Button...................................................................................... 65

4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices...................................................................... 67

4.1 Scenarios for Connecting a Server.................................................................................................................................. 67
4.1.1 Server Ports......................................................................................................................................................................... 67
4.1.1.1 Server Ports (TaiShan 200 Server)........................................................................................................................... 67
4.1.1.2 Server Ports (2288X V5 Server)................................................................................................................................. 68
4.1.2 Installing the SMS Modem............................................................................................................................................. 70
4.1.3 Connecting Cables to the 4G SMS Modem.............................................................................................................. 71
4.2 Scenarios for Connecting a LAN Switch........................................................................................................................ 73
4.2.1 Switches................................................................................................................................................................................ 73
4.2.1.1 Introduction to Switches (S5335-S24P4X)............................................................................................................ 73
4.2.1.2 Introduction to Switches (S5735-S24P4X)............................................................................................................ 77
4.2.2 Connecting a Monitoring Cable to the NetEco....................................................................................................... 80
4.2.3 Connecting the Video Management System Cable............................................................................................... 81
4.2.3.1 Connecting a Monitoring Cable to a Camera...................................................................................................... 81
4.2.3.2 Connecting a Monitoring Cable to the IVS1800................................................................................................. 81
4.2.4 Connecting the Smart Cooling Product Monitoring Cable................................................................................. 81
4.2.5 Connecting the UPS Monitoring Cable...................................................................................................................... 84
4.2.5.1 Connecting the UPS2000-G/UPS2000-H Monitoring Cable (SNMP)...........................................................84
4.2.5.2 Connecting the UPS5000-A Monitoring Cable.................................................................................................... 85
4.2.5.3 Connecting a Monitoring Cable to the UPS5000-E/UPS5000-H/UPS5000-S............................................ 86
4.2.6 Connecting the SmartLi Monitoring Cable............................................................................................................... 86
4.2.7 Connecting the PDU8000 Monitoring Cable............................................................................................................87
4.2.8 Connecting a Monitoring Cable to the MTS9604B-N20B1/MTS9606B-N20C2........................................... 87
4.2.9 Connecting a Monitoring Cable to TP483000D/TP482000B.............................................................................. 88
4.2.10 Connecting a Monitoring Cable to an iBOX.......................................................................................................... 88
4.3 Scenarios for Connecting the ECC800-Pro Outside the Smart Module............................................................. 89
4.3.1 Preparing a Monitoring Cable....................................................................................................................................... 89
4.3.2 ECC800-Pro.......................................................................................................................................................................... 90
4.3.2.1 Product Configuration.................................................................................................................................................. 90

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. v

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) Contents

4.3.2.2 Main Control Module................................................................................................................................................... 93

4.3.2.3 Power Module............................................................................................................................................................... 101
4.3.3 UIM20A Expansion Module......................................................................................................................................... 103
4.3.4 Connecting a Monitoring Cable to the UIM20A Expansion Module.............................................................106
4.3.5 Connecting the Access Management System Cable........................................................................................... 106
4.3.5.1 Connecting a Monitoring Cable to the A8802RS Access Controller.......................................................... 106
4.3.5.2 Connecting a Monitoring Cable to the Door Status Sensor......................................................................... 114
4.3.6 Connecting Cables to Sensors.....................................................................................................................................115
4.3.6.1 Connecting Cables to Sensors................................................................................................................................. 115
4.3.6.2 Connecting the Temperature Sensor Monitoring Cable................................................................................. 116
4.3.6.3 Connecting a Monitoring Cable to the Hydrogen Detection System........................................................ 117
4.3.6.4 Connecting a Monitoring Cable to the Smoke Sensor................................................................................... 117
4.3.6.5 Connecting a Monitoring Cable to a Temperature and Humidity Sensor............................................... 118
4.3.6.6 Connecting a Monitoring Cable to the Region-type Water Sensor........................................................... 119
4.3.6.7 Connecting a Monitoring Cable to the Location-type Water Sensor........................................................ 119
4.3.7 Connecting the Smart Cooling Product Monitoring Cable............................................................................... 119
4.3.7.1 Connecting the NetCol5000 Monitoring Cable................................................................................................. 119
4.3.7.2 Connecting the NetCol8000 Monitoring Cable................................................................................................. 124
4.3.8 Connecting a Monitoring Cable to a Chiller.......................................................................................................... 127
4.3.9 Connecting the UPS Monitoring Cable....................................................................................................................127
4.3.9.1 Connecting a Monitoring Cable to the UPS2000-G (Modbus)....................................................................128
4.3.9.2 Connecting a Monitoring Cable to the UPS5000-A......................................................................................... 128
4.3.9.3 Connecting a Monitoring Cable to the UPS5000-E/UPS5000-S.................................................................. 129
4.3.10 Connecting the PDC Monitoring Cable................................................................................................................. 130
4.3.10.1 Connecting the PDU8000 Monitoring Cable................................................................................................... 130
4.3.10.2 Connecting a Monitoring Cable to the Monitoring Type-PDU2000-32-1PH-20/4-M1.....................130
4.3.10.3 Connecting a Monitoring Cable to an HPXPDU2000-16-3PH-24-6-M1................................................ 131
4.3.11 Connecting the Fresh Air Unit Monitoring Cable.............................................................................................. 132
4.3.11.1 Connecting a Monitoring Cable to the Fresh Air Unit................................................................................. 132
4.4 Scenarios for Connecting the ECC800-Pro in the Smart Module.......................................................................133
4.4.1 Connecting a Monitoring Cable to the ECC800-Pro Collector.........................................................................133

5 Checking the Installation.................................................................................................. 134

5.1 Checking the Installation of the Cabinet................................................................................................................... 134
5.2 Checking the Installation of Components in the Cabinet.................................................................................... 135
5.3 Checking the Installation of Power Cables and Ground Cables.........................................................................135
5.4 Checking the Connection of Signal Cables................................................................................................................ 136

6 Adding Devices.................................................................................................................... 138

6.1 Performing Basic Operations Before Adding Devices............................................................................................ 138
6.1.1 IP Address Preinstallation Planning.......................................................................................................................... 138
6.1.2 Obtaining the NetEco Software License................................................................................................................. 138
6.1.3 Obtaining the Adapter Software Installation Packages.................................................................................... 139
6.1.4 Powering On a Server....................................................................................................................................................140

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. vi

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) Contents

6.1.5 Logging In to the NetEco Client................................................................................................................................ 141

6.1.6 Loading the NetEco Software License..................................................................................................................... 142
6.1.7 Installing NE Adapters................................................................................................................................................... 142
6.1.8 Adding a Management Domain................................................................................................................................ 142
6.1.8.1 General Operation: Adding a Management Domain...................................................................................... 142
6.1.8.2 Example: Adding a Smart Module......................................................................................................................... 143
6.1.8.3 Example: Adding a Container.................................................................................................................................. 146
6.1.9 Adding Devices.................................................................................................................................................................147
6.2 Scenarios for Connecting the ECC800-Pro in the Smart Module.......................................................................148
6.2.1 Commissioning Southbound Devices of the ECC800-Pro..................................................................................148
6.2.2 Adding a Smart U Space Manager........................................................................................................................... 148
6.2.2.1 Commissioning the Smart U Space Manager on the ECC800-Pro WebUI...............................................148
6.2.2.2 Adding Asset Information on the NetEco........................................................................................................... 149
6.2.3 iCooling Energy Management.................................................................................................................................... 151
6.2.3.1 Setting Cooling Management Parameters on the ECC800-Pro WebUI.................................................... 151
6.2.3.2 Setting iCooling Parameters on the NetEco....................................................................................................... 152
6.2.3.3 Viewing iCooling Energy Efficiency on the NetEco.......................................................................................... 154
6.2.4 (Optional) Viewing a Temperature Map on the NetEco................................................................................... 155
6.3 Scenarios for Connecting the Server............................................................................................................................155
6.3.1 Setting SMS Modem Parameters on the NetEco................................................................................................. 155
6.4 Scenarios for Connecting the LAN Switch................................................................................................................. 158
6.4.1 Adding an iBOX Collector.............................................................................................................................................158
6.4.1.1 Setting Parameters on the iBOX WebUI.............................................................................................................. 158
6.4.1.2 Creating an iBOX Collector on the NetEco......................................................................................................... 163
6.4.1.3 iBOX and iBAT Networking...................................................................................................................................... 166
6.4.2 Adding a Video Management System..................................................................................................................... 167
6.4.2.1 Obtaining Video Management System Documents........................................................................................ 168
6.4.2.2 Commissioning a C3220/M2121 Camera............................................................................................................ 168
6.4.2.3 Commissioning the IVS1800.................................................................................................................................... 174
6.4.2.3.1 Setting Parameters on the IVS1800 WebUI.................................................................................................... 174
6.4.2.3.2 Setting Parameters on the iClient...................................................................................................................... 179
6.4.2.4 Configuring Camera Parameters on the NetEco.............................................................................................. 184
6.4.2.5 Adding Cameras by Automatic Discovery on the NetEco............................................................................. 186
6.4.2.6 Setting Video Playback on the NetEco.................................................................................................................187
6.4.3 Adding a Smart Cooling Product............................................................................................................................... 188
6.4.3.1 Setting Monitoring Parameters for the Smart Cooling Product (over Modbus-TCP).......................... 188
6.4.3.2 Creating a Smart Cooling Product on the NetEco........................................................................................... 191
6.4.4 Adding a Refrigeration Station...................................................................................................................................193
6.4.4.1 Creating a Chiller Subsystem on the NetEco (Modbus-TCP Protocol)...................................................... 193
6.4.4.2 Creating Refrigeration Station Devices on the NetEco...................................................................................194
6.4.5 Adding a UPS.................................................................................................................................................................... 195
6.4.5.1 Setting Monitoring Parameters for a UPS2000-G (over SNMP)................................................................. 195

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. vii

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) Contents

6.4.5.2 Setting Monitoring Parameters for a UPS2000-H (over SNMP)................................................................. 200

6.4.5.3 Setting UPS5000 Monitoring Parameters (over SNMP)................................................................................ 204
6.4.5.4 Setting UPS5000 Monitoring Parameters (Modbus TCP).............................................................................. 208
6.4.5.5 Creating a UPS on the NetEco................................................................................................................................ 210
6.4.6 Adding a PDU................................................................................................................................................................... 213
6.4.6.1 Setting PDU8000 Monitoring Parameters (SNMP)..........................................................................................213
6.4.6.2 Setting PDU8000 Monitoring Parameters (Modbus TCP)............................................................................. 214
6.4.6.3 Creating a PDU on the NetEco............................................................................................................................... 215
6.4.7 Adding an MTS9604B-N20B1/MTS9606B-N20C2 Power Supply................................................................... 217
6.4.7.1 Creating a MTS9604B-N20B1/MTS9606B-N20C2 Power Supply on the NetEco.................................. 217
6.4.8 Adding a SmartLi............................................................................................................................................................ 219
6.4.8.1 Setting SmartLi Monitoring Parameters (Modbus TCP)................................................................................ 219
6.4.8.2 Creating a SmartLi on the NetEco......................................................................................................................... 219
6.4.9 Adding a CO Power Module........................................................................................................................................221
6.4.9.1 Setting Monitoring Parameters for the TP483000D and TP482000B........................................................221
6.4.9.2 Creating a Power Module on the NetEco........................................................................................................... 221
6.4.10 Adding an rPDU............................................................................................................................................................ 223
6.4.10.1 Setting RPDU_HUAWEI_PDU2000-32-1PH-20-4-M2 Monitoring Parameters.................................... 223
6.4.10.2 Creating an rPDU on the NetEco.........................................................................................................................224
6.5 Scenarios for Connecting the ECC800-Pro Outside the Smart Module........................................................... 226
6.5.1 Setting and Adding the ECC800-Pro Collector......................................................................................................226
6.5.1.1 Preparations and Login..............................................................................................................................................226
6.5.1.2 Setting the ECC800-Pro IP Address....................................................................................................................... 229
6.5.1.3 Setting the ECC800-Pro System Type................................................................................................................... 230
6.5.1.4 Setting RS485 Parameters for the ECC800-Pro Collector.............................................................................. 231
6.5.1.5 Setting NetEco Parameters...................................................................................................................................... 233
6.5.1.6 Creating an ECC800-Pro Collector on the NetEco............................................................................................234
6.5.1.7 Setting the Transparent Transmission Function for the ECC800-Pro Collector...................................... 237
6.5.1.8 Setting Transparent Transmission for the UIM20A Expansion Module on the ECC800-Pro WebUI
......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 239
6.5.2 Adding Sensors................................................................................................................................................................ 241
6.5.2.1 Adding Dry Contact Interface Devices..................................................................................................................241
6.5.2.1.1 Setting Door Status Sensor Monitoring Parameters on the ECC800-Pro Web................................... 241
6.5.2.1.2 Setting Smoke Sensor and Water Leakage Sensor Parameters on the ECC800-Pro Web.............. 242
6.5.2.1.3 Setting Device Monitoring Parameters of an NO/NC Dry Contact on the ECC800-Pro Web........243
6.5.2.1.4 Creating an Icon for a Door Status Sensor on the NetEco........................................................................ 244
6.5.2.1.5 Creating the Water Sensor on the NetEco...................................................................................................... 248
6.5.2.1.6 Modifying Alarm Names for Devices on the NetEco................................................................................... 251
6.5.2.1.7 Modifying Performance Counter Names for Devices on the NetEco.....................................................252
6.5.2.2 Adding a Temperature and Humidity Sensor.................................................................................................... 252
6.5.2.2.1 Setting Monitoring Parameters for a T/H Sensor (BOM Number: 33010346)...................................253
6.5.2.2.2 Creating a Temperature and Humidity Sensor on the NetEco................................................................. 253
6.5.2.3 Adding a Water Leakage Sensor............................................................................................................................ 254

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. viii

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) Contents

6.5.2.3.1 Creating a Water Leakage Sensor on the NetEco........................................................................................ 255

6.5.2.4 Adding a Hydrogen Sensor...................................................................................................................................... 256
6.5.2.4.1 Setting Monitoring Parameters for a Hydrogen Sensor............................................................................. 256
6.5.2.4.2 Creating a Hydrogen Sensor on the NetEco................................................................................................... 257
6.5.3 Adding the Access Management System................................................................................................................258
6.5.3.1 Setting Monitoring Parameters for the A8802RS Access Controller.......................................................... 258
6.5.3.2 Creating an Access Controller on the NetEco.................................................................................................... 258
6.5.3.3 Formatting an Access Controller on the NetEco.............................................................................................. 261
6.5.3.4 Setting Monitoring Parameters for the NEWABEL CHD200G Fingerprint Controller..........................261
6.5.3.5 Creating a NEWABEL CHD200G Fingerprint Controller on the NetEco................................................... 262
6.5.4 Adding a Smart Cooling Product............................................................................................................................... 263
6.5.4.1 Setting Monitoring Parameters for Smart Cooling Products (over Modbus-RTU)............................... 263
6.5.4.2 Creating a Smart Cooling Product on the NetEco........................................................................................... 264
6.5.5 Adding a Chiller............................................................................................................................................................... 265
6.5.5.1 Creating a Chiller on the NetEco........................................................................................................................... 265
6.5.6 Adding a UPS.................................................................................................................................................................... 267
6.5.6.1 Setting Monitoring Parameters for a UPS2000.................................................................................................267
6.5.6.2 Creating a UPS on the NetEco................................................................................................................................ 268
6.5.7 Adding a PDU................................................................................................................................................................... 269
6.5.7.1 Setting Monitoring Parameters for a PDU8000................................................................................................ 269
6.5.7.2 Creating a PDU on the NetEco............................................................................................................................... 270
6.5.8 Adding a Fresh Air Unit................................................................................................................................................ 271
6.5.8.1 Creating a Fresh Air Unit on the NetEco............................................................................................................. 271
6.5.9 Adding an rPDU............................................................................................................................................................... 272
6.5.9.1 Setting Monitoring Parameters for HPXPDU2000-16-3PH-24-6-M1........................................................ 272
6.5.9.2 Creating an rPDU on the NetEco........................................................................................................................... 273

7 Device Maintenance........................................................................................................... 275

7.1 Routine Maintenance........................................................................................................................................................ 275
7.1.1 Monthly maintenance................................................................................................................................................... 275
7.1.1.1 Routine Maintenance for the Collector................................................................................................................275
7.1.1.2 Routine Maintenance for the UIM20A Expansion Module........................................................................... 276
7.1.1.3 Routine Maintenance for VCN................................................................................................................................ 276
7.1.1.4 Routine Maintenance for the Smoke Detector................................................................................................. 277
7.1.1.5 Routine Maintenance for the Hydrogen Detection System.......................................................................... 278
7.1.1.6 Routine maintenance for the region-type water sensor and water detection cable........................... 279
7.1.1.7 Routine maintenance for the location-type water sensor and water detection cable........................279
7.1.2 Semi-Annual Maintenance.......................................................................................................................................... 280
7.1.2.1 Routine maintenance for the switch.....................................................................................................................281
7.1.2.2 Routine Maintenance for the Smart U space manager................................................................................. 282
7.1.2.3 Routine Maintenance for Temperature Sensors................................................................................................282
7.1.2.4 Routine maintenance for the temperature and humidity sensor............................................................... 282
7.1.2.5 Routine maintenance for the camera...................................................................................................................283

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. ix

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) Contents

7.1.2.6 Routine maintenance for the access control system.......................................................................................284

7.1.2.7 Routine Maintenance for the Access Controller............................................................................................... 284
7.1.2.8 Routine maintenance for the single-door/double-door magnetic lock....................................................285
7.1.2.9 Routine maintenance for the emergency door release button................................................................... 285
7.2 Parts Replacement............................................................................................................................................................. 285
7.2.1 Parts Replacement for the ECC800-Pro................................................................................................................... 285
7.2.1.1 Replacing an ECC800-Pro Main Control Module.............................................................................................. 285
7.2.1.2 Replacing an ECC800-Pro PSU................................................................................................................................ 287
7.2.1.3 Replacing ECC800-Pro Antennas............................................................................................................................ 288
7.2.1.4 Replacing a SIM Card and Micro SD Card.......................................................................................................... 288
7.2.2 Replacing a UIM20A expansion module................................................................................................................. 290
7.2.3 Replacing a Smart U Space Manager...................................................................................................................... 291
7.2.4 Replacing Sensors........................................................................................................................................................... 293
7.2.4.1 Replacing a Temperature Sensor............................................................................................................................293
7.2.4.2 Replacing the Hydrogen Detection System........................................................................................................ 293
7.2.4.3 Replacing a Smoke Detector................................................................................................................................... 296
7.2.4.4 Replacing a T/H Sensor............................................................................................................................................. 297
7.2.4.5 Replacing a Region-type Water Sensor and Water Detection Cable........................................................ 297
7.2.4.6 Replacing a Location-type Water Sensor and Water Detection Cable..................................................... 299
7.2.5 Replacing the Management System.........................................................................................................................300
7.2.5.1 Replacing an M2121 Camera.................................................................................................................................. 300
7.2.5.2 Replacing an IVS1800................................................................................................................................................ 301
7.2.5.3 Replacing a Hard Disk for the IVS1800............................................................................................................... 302
7.2.6 Replacing the Access Management System.......................................................................................................... 305
7.2.6.1 Replacing an Access Controller............................................................................................................................... 305
7.2.6.2 Replacing a Double-Door Magnetic Lock........................................................................................................... 307
7.2.6.3 Replacing a Single-Door Magnetic Lock............................................................................................................. 311
7.2.6.4 Replacing a Card Reader........................................................................................................................................... 311
7.2.6.5 Replacing a Fingerprint and Card Reader........................................................................................................... 314
7.2.6.6 Replacing a Card Reader with a Keypad............................................................................................................. 316
7.2.6.7 Replacing a Fingerprint and Card Reader with a Keypad............................................................................. 317
7.2.6.8 Replacing an Emergency Door Release Button................................................................................................. 318

8 FAQ......................................................................................................................................... 321
8.1 How Do I Handle Abnormal Door Control Status?................................................................................................ 321
8.2 How Do I Change the NetEco IP Address?................................................................................................................ 321
8.3 Logging In to the NetEco App....................................................................................................................................... 323

9 Acronyms and Abbreviations............................................................................................327

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. x

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 1 Safety Information

1 Safety Information

1.1 General Safety

Statement
Before installing, operating, and maintaining the equipment, read this document
and observe all the safety instructions on the equipment and in this document.
The "NOTICE", "CAUTION", "WARNING", and "DANGER" statements in this
document do not cover all the safety instructions. They are only supplements to
the safety instructions. Huawei will not be liable for any consequence caused by
the violation of general safety requirements or design, production, and usage
safety standards.
Ensure that the equipment is used in environments that meet its design
specifications. Otherwise, the equipment may become faulty, and the resulting
equipment malfunction, component damage, personal injuries, or property
damage are not covered under the warranty.
Follow local laws and regulations when installing, operating, or maintaining the
equipment. The safety instructions in this document are only supplements to local
laws and regulations.
Huawei will not be liable for any consequences of the following circumstances:
● Operation beyond the conditions specified in this document
● Installation or use in environments which are not specified in relevant
international or national standards
● Unauthorized modifications to the product or software code or removal of the
product
● Failure to follow the operation instructions and safety precautions on the
product and in this document
● Equipment damage due to force majeure, such as earthquakes, fire, and
storms
● Damage caused during transportation by the customer
● Storage conditions that do not meet the requirements specified in this
document

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 1 Safety Information

General Requirements
● Do not install, use, or operate outdoor equipment and cables (including but
not limited to moving equipment, operating equipment and cables, inserting
connectors to or removing connectors from signal ports connected to outdoor
facilities, working at heights, and performing outdoor installation) in harsh
weather conditions such as lightning, rain, snow, and level 6 or stronger wind.
● Before installing, operating, or maintaining the equipment, remove any
conductive objects such as watches or metal jewelry like bracelets, bangles,
and rings to avoid electric shock.
● When installing, operating, or maintaining the equipment, wear personal
protective equipment such as insulation gloves, goggles, and safety clothing,
helmet, and shoes, as shown in the following figure.

● Follow the specified procedures for installation, operation, and maintenance.

● Before handling a conductor surface or terminal, measure the contact point
voltage and ensure that there is no risk of electric shock.
● After installing the equipment, remove idle packing materials such as cartons,
foam, plastics, and cable ties from the equipment area.
● In the case of a fire, immediately leave the building or the equipment area,
and turn on the fire alarm bell or make an emergency call. Do not enter the
building on fire in any case.
● Do not stop using protective devices. Pay attention to the warnings, cautions,
and related precautionary measures in this document and on the equipment.
Promptly replace warning labels that have worn out.
● Keep irrelevant people away from the equipment. Only operators are allowed
to access the equipment.
● Use insulated tools or tools with insulated handles, as shown in the following
figure.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 1 Safety Information

● All cable holes should be sealed. Seal the used cable holes with firestop putty.
Seal the unused cable holes with the caps delivered with the cabinet. The
following figure shows the criteria for correct sealing with firestop putty.

● Do not scrawl, damage, or block any warning label on the equipment.

● When installing devices, use a torque wrench with a proper measurement
range to tighten bolts. Ensure that the wrench is not skewed and the torque
error does not exceed 10%.
● Do not work with power on during installation.
● Repaint any paint scratches caused during equipment transportation or
installation in a timely manner. Equipment with scratches cannot be exposed
to an outdoor environment for a long period of time.
● Before operations, ensure that the equipment is firmly secured to the floor or
other solid objects, such as a wall or an installation rack.
● Do not use water to clean electrical components inside or outside of a
cabinet.
● Do not change the structure or installation sequence of equipment without
permission.
● Do not touch a running fan with your fingers, components, screws, tools, or
boards before the fan is powered off or stops running.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 3

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 1 Safety Information

Personal Safety
● If there is a probability of personal injury or equipment damage during
operations on the equipment, immediately stop the operations, report the
case to the supervisor, and take feasible protective measures.
● To avoid electric shock, do not connect safety extra-low voltage (SELV) circuits
to telecommunication network voltage (TNV) circuits.
● Do not power on the equipment before it is installed or confirmed by
professionals.

1.2 Personnel Requirements

● Personnel who plan to install or maintain Huawei equipment must receive
thorough training, understand all necessary safety precautions, and be able to
correctly perform all operations.
● Only qualified professionals or trained personnel are allowed to install,
operate, and maintain the equipment.
● Only qualified professionals are allowed to remove safety facilities and inspect
the equipment.
● Personnel who will operate the equipment, including operators, trained
personnel, and professionals, should possess the local national required
qualifications in special operations such as high-voltage operations, working
at heights, and operations of special equipment.
● Professionals: personnel who are trained or experienced in equipment
operations and are clear of the sources and degree of various potential
hazards in equipment installation, operation, maintenance
● Trained personnel: personnel who are technically trained, have required
experience, are aware of possible hazards on themselves in certain operations,
and are able to take protective measures to minimize the hazards on
themselves and other people
● Operators: operation personnel who may come in contact with the
equipment, except trained personnel and professionals
● Only professionals or authorized personnel are allowed to replace the
equipment or components (including software).

1.3 Electrical Safety

Grounding
● For the equipment that needs to be grounded, install the ground cable first
when installing the equipment and remove the ground cable last when
removing the equipment.
● Do not damage the ground conductor.
● Do not operate the equipment in the absence of a properly installed ground
conductor.
● Ensure that the equipment is connected permanently to the protective
ground. Before operating the equipment, check its electrical connection to
ensure that it is securely grounded.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 4

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 1 Safety Information

General Requirements
Use dedicated insulated tools when performing high-voltage operations.

AC and DC Power

DANGER

Do not connect or disconnect power cables with power on. Transient contact
between the core of the power cable and the conductor will generate electric arcs
or sparks, which may cause fire or personal injury.

● If a "high electricity leakage" tag is attached on the equipment, ground the

protective ground terminal on the equipment enclosure before connecting the
AC power supply; otherwise, electric shock as a result of electricity leakage
may occur.
● Before installing or removing a power cable, turn off the power switch.
● Before connecting a power cable, check that the label on the power cable is
correct.
● If the equipment has multiple inputs, disconnect all the inputs before
operating the equipment.
● A circuit breaker equipped with a residual current device (RCD) is not
recommended.
● A damaged power cable must be replaced by the manufacturer, service agent,
or professionals to avoid risks.
● High voltage operations and installation of AC-powered facilities must be
performed by qualified personnel.

Cabling
● When routing cables, ensure that a distance of at least 30 mm exists between
the cables and heat-generating components or areas. This prevents damage
to the insulation layer of the cables.
● Do not route cables behind the air intake and exhaust vents of the
equipment.
● Ensure that cables meet the VW-1 or ZB flame spread rating requirements or
higher.
● Bind cables of the same type together. When routing cables of different types,
ensure that they are at least 30 mm away from each other.
● If an AC input power cable is connected to the cabinet from the top, bend the
cable in a U shape outside the cabinet and then route it into the cabinet.
● When the temperature is low, violent impact or vibration may damage the
plastic cable sheathing. To ensure safety, comply with the following
requirements:
– Cables can be laid or installed only when the temperature is higher than
0°C. Handle cables with caution, especially at a low temperature.
– Cables stored at subzero temperatures must be stored at room
temperature for at least 24 hours before they are laid out.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 5

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 1 Safety Information

● Do not perform any improper operations, for example, dropping cables

directly from a vehicle.
● When selecting, connecting, and routing cables, follow local safety regulations
and rules.

ESD

NOTICE

The static electricity generated by human bodies may damage the electrostatic-
sensitive components on boards, for example, the large-scale integrated (LSI)
circuits.

● Wear ESD gloves or a well-grounded ESD wrist strap when touching the
device or handling boards or application-specific integrated circuits (ASICs).
● When holding a board, hold its edge without touching any components. Do
not touch the components with your bare hands.
● Package boards with ESD packaging materials before storing or transporting
them.

Figure 1-1 Wearing an ESD wrist strap

Neutral-Ground Voltage
It is recommended that the three-phase loads be equalized and the neutral-
ground voltage be kept at less than 2 V to meet power distribution requirements.

1.4 Installation Environment Requirements

● To prevent fire due to high temperature, ensure that the ventilation vents or
heat dissipation system are not blocked when the equipment is running.
● Install the equipment in an area far away from liquids. Do not install it under
areas prone to condensation, such as under water pipes and air exhaust vents,
or areas prone to water leakage, such as air conditioner vents, ventilation

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 6

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 1 Safety Information

vents, or feeder windows of the equipment room. Ensure that no liquid enters
the equipment to prevent faults or short circuits.
● If any liquid is detected inside the equipment, immediately disconnect the
power supply and contact the administrator.
● Do not expose the equipment to flammable or explosive gas or smoke. Do
not perform any operation on the equipment in such environments.
● Ensure that the equipment room provides good heat insulation, and the walls
and floor are dampproof.
● Install a rat guard at the door of the equipment room.

Installation at Heights
● Working at heights refers to operations that are performed at least 2 meters
above the ground.
● Do not work at heights if the steel pipes are wet or other potential danger
exists. After the preceding conditions no longer exist, the safety director and
relevant technical personnel need to check the involved equipment. Operators
can begin working only after obtaining consent.
● When working at heights, comply with local relevant laws and regulations.
● Only trained and qualified personnel are allowed to work at heights.
● Before working at heights, check the climbing tools and safety gears such as
safety helmets, safety belts, ladders, springboards, scaffolding, and lifting
equipment. If they do not meet the requirements, take corrective measures or
disallow working at heights.
● Wear personal protective equipment such as the safety helmet and safety belt
or waist rope and fasten it to a solid structure. Do not mount it on an
insecure moveable object or metal object with sharp edges. Make sure that
the hooks will not slide off.
● Set a restricted area and eye-catching signs for working at heights to warn
away irrelevant personnel.
● Carry the operation machinery and tools properly to prevent them from
falling off and causing injuries.
● Personnel involving working at heights are not allowed to throw objects from
the height to the ground, or vice versa. Objects should be transported by
tough slings, hanging baskets, highline trolleys, or cranes.
● Ensure that guard rails and warning signs are set at the edges and openings
of the area involving working at heights to prevent falls.
● Do not pile up scaffolding, springboards, or other sundries on the ground
under the area involving working at heights. Do not allow people to stay or
pass under the area involving working at heights.
● Inspect the scaffolding, springboards, and workbenches used for working at
heights in advance to ensure that their structures are solid and not
overloaded.
● Any violations must be promptly pointed out by the site manager or safety
supervisor and the involved personnel should be prompted for correction.
Personnel who fail to stop violations will be forbidden from working.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 1 Safety Information

1.5 Mechanical Safety

Hoisting Devices
● Do not walk under hoisted objects.
● Only trained and qualified personnel should perform hoisting operations.
● Check that hoisting tools are available and in good condition.
● Before hoisting objects, ensure that hoisting tools are firmly secured onto a
load-bearing object or wall.
● Ensure that the angle formed by two hoisting cables is no more than 90
degrees, as shown in the following figure.

● Do not drag steel ropes and hoisting tools or bump hoisted objects against
hard objects during hoisting.

Using Ladders
● Use wooden or fiberglass ladders when you need to perform live working at
heights.
● When a step ladder is used, ensure that the pull ropes are secured and the
ladder is held firm.
● Before using a ladder, check that it is intact and confirm its load bearing
capacity. Do not overload it.
● Ensure that the ladder is securely positioned. The recommended angle for a
ladder against the floor is 75 degrees, as shown in the following figure. An
angle rule can be used to measure the angle. Ensure that the wider end of the
ladder is at the bottom, or protective measures have been taken at the
bottom to prevent the ladder from sliding.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 8

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 1 Safety Information

● When climbing a ladder, take the following precautions to reduce risks and
ensure safety:
– Keep your body steady.
– Do not climb higher than the fourth rung of the ladder from the top.
– Ensure that your body's center of gravity does not shift outside the legs
of the ladder.

Drilling Holes
When drilling holes into a wall or floor, observe the following safety precautions:

NOTICE

Do not drill holes into the equipment. Doing so may affect the electromagnetic
shielding of the equipment and damage components or cables inside. Metal
shavings from drilling may short-circuit boards inside the equipment.

● Obtain the consent from the customer and subcontractor before drilling.
● Wear goggles and protective gloves when drilling holes.
● When drilling holes, protect the equipment from shavings. After drilling, clean
up any shavings that have accumulated inside or outside the equipment.

Moving Heavy Objects

DANGER

When removing a heavy or unstable component from a cabinet, be aware of

unstable or heavy objects on the cabinet.

● Be cautious to avoid injury when moving heavy objects.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 9

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 1 Safety Information

● When moving the equipment by hand, wear protective gloves to prevent

injuries.
● Move or lift the equipment by holding its handles or lower edges. Do not hold
the handles of modules (such as power supply units, fans, and boards) that
are installed in the equipment because they cannot support the weight of the
equipment.
● Avoid scratching the cabinet surface or damaging cabinet components and
cables during equipment transportation.
● When transporting the equipment using a forklift truck, ensure that the forks
are properly positioned to ensure that the equipment does not topple. Before
moving the equipment, secure it to the forklift truck using ropes. When
moving the equipment, assign dedicated personnel to take care of it.
● Choose railways, sea, or a road with good condition for transportation to
ensure equipment safety. Avoid tilt or jolt during transportation.
● Move a cabinet with caution. Any bumping or falling may damage the
equipment.

1.6 Others
● Exercise caution when shutting down the smart cooling product. Doing so
may cause equipment and room overheating, which will damage the
equipment.
● Exercise caution when powering off the rPDU or PDU2000. Doing so may
affect the power supply to equipment, which will interrupt services.
● Exercise caution when manually shutting down the UPS inverter for
transferring to bypass mode, or when adjusting the UPS output voltage level
or frequency. Doing so may affect the power supply to equipment.
● Exercise caution when setting battery parameters. Incorrect settings will affect
the power supply and battery lifespan.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 10

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 2 Installation Preparations

2 Installation Preparations

2.1 Unpacking and Acceptance

Unpack and inspect all cabinets, mechanical parts, and components. Check that all
the items are intact and comply with the packing list on the presence of both the
project supervisor and customer.

Procedure
Step 1 Unpack the carton labeled Contain Packing List and take out the Packing List.

Step 2 Check all items against the Packing List.

Step 3 If shortage or miscarriage occurs, fill in the Cargo Shortage and Miscarriage
Report.
Step 4 If cargo damage occurs, fill in the Cargo Replacement Application Form.

Step 5 Sign on the Packing List with the customer after verifying that all required items
are delivered.

Step 6 Store the items properly.

----End

Follow-up Procedure
Put the items to be installed immediately onto an ESD surface, such as a
polyethylene (PE) bag or an expandable polyethylene (EPE) foam. Pack the items
not to be installed immediately with their original packing materials. Put them in
a dry and cool environment without exposure to sunlight or electromagnetic
radiation.

2.2 Tools and Instruments

Before the installation, prepare the following common tools and transportation
tools. Tools required vary with the actual installation scenarios.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 11

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 2 Installation Preparations

Common Tools
Tools that are commonly used for onsite installation, such as tools for measuring
dimensions, preparing cables, and fastening

Table 2-1 Common tools

Protective gloves Marker Measuring tape (5 Level
m)

Step ladder (2 m) Phillips Phase sequence Flat-head

screwdriver meter screwdriver (2–5
mm)

Adjustable wrench Socket wrench Hex key Box-end wrench

(6″) M4/M6/M8/M12 M6/M8/M12

Torque wrench Solid wrench Cotton cloth Label

(28 mm) (12#/13#/18#)

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 12

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 2 Installation Preparations

Electric Hand drill (Φ3/ Hammer drill Heat gun

screwdriver Φ3.7/Φ4/ (Φ16 bit)
Φ4.5/Φ5/Φ6/Φ10
/Φ12 bit)

Laser locator Utility knife Electrician's knife Impact tool

Polyvinyl chloride Needle-nose Diagonal pliers RJ45 crimping

(PVC) insulation pliers tool
tape

Crimping tool Wire strippers Hydraulic pliers Wire clippers

Cable tie Multimeter Electroprobe Brush

Claw hammer Vacuum cleaner Hacksaw Handsaw

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 13

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 2 Installation Preparations

Right angle Heat-shrink Network cable Rubber mallet

tubing tester

Adjustable socket Flashlight Clamp meter -

screwdriver

NOTE
This table may not list some tools required at specific sites. Onsite installation personnel
and technical support personnel should prepare tools based on site requirements.

Transportation Tools
Auxiliary tools used for transporting equipment

Table 2-2 Transportation and unpacking tools

Manual pallet Diesel forklift Hoisting rope Lever (bearing
truck (bearing capacity capacity ≥ 400 kg)
≥ 400 kg)

2.3 Personnel Requirements

Only trained and qualified personnel who fully understand basic safety
precautions are allowed to install and operate a Smart Module.

CAUTION

Huawei will not be liable for any consequence caused by the violation of this
document.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 14

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 2 Installation Preparations

The requirements are as follows:

● Customers' installation personnel must be trained by Huawei and understand
how to install and operate a Smart Module.
● The number of installation personnel varies depending on the project progress
and the installation environment. Typically, three to five persons are required.

2.4 Device Networking Solution Overview

Figure 2-1 shows the iMaster NetEco device networking solution in the data
center scenario.

Figure 2-1 Device networking solution

NOTE

When the number of AI/DI ports on the ECC800-Pro collector is insufficient, collect the device to
the UIM20A expansion module.

2.5 Installation Process

Figure 2-2 shows the process for installing and commissioning the iMaster NetEco
devices.
Recommended installation sequence: devices inside the cabinet > devices
outside the cabinet > in-room devices. You can adjust the installation sequence
based on the site requirements.
NOTE

● The collector is ECC800-Pro.

● Ensure that the collector and the NetEco are installed in the same network segment.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 15

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 2 Installation Preparations

Figure 2-2 Flowchart for the installation and commissioning of NetEco devices

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 16

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 3 Installing Devices

3 Installing Devices

3.1 Layout in the Network Cabinet

There are multiple types of monitoring components. Make installation plans based
on the configurations. Figure 3-1 shows the installation positions for some
monitoring components for your reference.

Figure 3-1 Device layout in the network cabinet

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 17

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 3 Installing Devices

NOTE

● Relocate the cable manager in the rear door position as high as the device to be installed.
● Use a flat-head screwdriver to insert floating nuts into the device mounting holes in the rack
rails of the network cabinet. Ensure that the floating nuts on both sides are on the same
horizontal line.
● Before connecting power cables for the device, use the ground cable delivered with the
device to connect from the device ground point to the cabinet ground point close to the
device mounting holes, as shown in Figure 3-2. When there is a special grounding
requirement and a cabinet ground bar can be deployed, use the ground cable prepared by
the customer to connect from the device ground point to the cabinet ground bar.
● If no ground cable is delivered with the device, the customer needs to prepare the ground
cable.

Figure 3-2 Connecting a device ground cable

3.2 Installing a Server

3.2.1 Installing a TaiShan 200 Server

Context
Tools: Phillips screwdriver, ESD wrist strap

Materials: TaiShan 200 server, guide rail, rubber plug

Space required: 2 U

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 18

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 3 Installing Devices

Procedure
Step 1 Determine the installation position of the server and check whether floating nuts
are installed. If not, install floating nuts.

Figure 3-3 Installing floating nuts

Step 2 Install L-shaped guide rails.

1. Place a guide rail horizontally in the planned position, and keep the guide rail
in close contact with mounting bars.
2. Tighten the screws of the guide rail clockwise.

Figure 3-4 Installing a guide rail

Step 3 Install the server.

1. Lift the server. This task requires at least two people.
2. Place the server on the guide rails and slide it into the cabinet. See (1) in
Figure 3-5.
3. When the two mounting ears of the server come into contact with the
mounting bars on the cabinet, tighten their captive screws to secure the
server. See (2) in Figure 3-5.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 19

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 3 Installing Devices

Figure 3-5 Installing a server

Step 4 Connect the server power cables to the PDU.

WARNING

Wear an ESD wrist strap when connecting power cables.

NOTE

The server uses dual power supplies. Connect the two power cables to different PDUs.

----End

3.2.2 Installing a 2288X V5 Server

Context
Tool: Phillips screwdriver
Materials: 2288X V5 server, guide rail, rubber plug, screw

Procedure
Step 1 Install guide rails.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 20

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 3 Installing Devices

Figure 3-6 Installing a guide rail

1. Place a guide rail horizontally at the installation position in the cabinet.

2. Fix the guide rail using rubber plugs.
a. In front of the guide rails: If a server is installed using the upper
mounting holes, insert rubber plugs tightly into the holes at the middle. If
a server is installed using mounting holes at the middle, insert rubber
plugs tightly into the upper holes.
b. Behind the guide rails: Insert rubber plugs tightly into the upper
mounting holes.
3. (Optional) To enhance the rigidness and seismic-proof performance of a
server, you can install bolts at the rear of flexible guide rails.

Step 2 Place the server on the guide rails and slide it along the guide rails into the
cabinet.

Step 3 Align the two mounting ears of the server with the mounting bars of the cabinet
and tighten the screws on the mounting ears.

Figure 3-7 Installing a server

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 21

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 3 Installing Devices

Step 4 Connect the server power cables to the PDU2000.

NOTE

The server uses dual power supplies. Connect the two power cables to different PDU2000s.

Figure 3-8 Connecting server power cables

----End

3.3 Installing a LAN Switch

Procedure
Step 1 Determine the mounting holes for the LAN switch based on the network cabinet
device layout, adjust the guide rails or trays, and install floating nuts.
Step 2 Install the mounting ears delivered with the LAN switch and secure the LAN
switch to the mounting bars in the front of the cabinet.
NOTE

This section describes only the installation method. The actual product appearance prevails.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 22

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 3 Installing Devices

Figure 3-9 Installing a LAN switch

Step 3 Connect the LAN switch power cable to the PDU2000.

NOTE

The positions of power cable ports vary depending on the LAN switch models. Connect the
power cable based on the actual power port of the LAN switch.

----End

Follow-up Procedure
If a 24-port LAN switch is configured, one or two power modules need to be
installed for the LAN switch onsite. Insert the power module into the power slot of
the 24-port LAN switch and tighten the captive screws on the power module
panel.

Figure 3-10 Installing a power module for a 24-port LAN switch

3.4 Installing an ECC800-Pro Collector

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 23

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 3 Installing Devices

Procedure
Step 1 Determine the mounting holes for the ECC800-Pro collector in the network
cabinet based on the engineering layout diagram, adjust the guide rails or trays,
and install floating nuts.

Step 2 Gently put the ECC800-Pro collector into the network cabinet.

Step 3 Secure the ECC800-Pro collector in the network cabinet by clockwise tightening
the M6 screws on the left and right mounting ears.

Figure 3-11 Installing an ECC800-Pro collector

Step 4 Connect the ECC800-Pro collector power cable to the PDU2000.

----End

3.5 Installing a Smart U Space Manager

Context
The BOM number of the smart U space manager is 52273314. The BOM number
of the U Asset Label is 52273315.

The smart U space manager consists of the following components.

Figure 3-12 Smart U space manager appearance

(1) Asset detection strip (2) U Asset Label (3) Main control box

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 24

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 3 Installing Devices

Procedure
Step 1 Align the first detection point of the asset detection strip with the cabinet 42 U
position and attach it to the rack.

Step 2 Attach the main control box to the top of the cabinet front door interior (if there
is space at the top of the cabinet interior) or exterior (if there is no space at the
top of the cabinet interior).

Step 3 Connect cables between devices and secure the cables using fasteners.
NOTE

● The securing positions of fasteners are for reference only. The actual mounting holes on the
cabinets prevail.
● The cable between the main control box and the UIM20A expansion module unit is delivered
with the smart U space manager.
● Attach the U space asset label to the detection point on the asset detection strip, facilitating
asset management.
● In a standard scenario, connect a smart U space manager to the COM6/AIDI_6 port on the
UIM20A expansion module.
● In a scenario where one UIM20A expansion module maps to four cabinets, connect smart U
space managers to the COM1/AIDI_1, COM3/AIDI_3, COM5/AIDI_5, and COM7/AIDI_7 ports
on the UIM20A expansion module. If the number of IT cabinets is not an integer multiple of
4, according to the cable connection rules, redundant COM ports exist on the UIM20A
expansion module.

Figure 3-13 Installing a smart U space manager (main control box attached to the
top of the cabinet interior)

(1) Fastener (2) UIM20A Expansion Module (3) Main control box

(4) Asset detection strip (42 U

detection point)

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 25

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 3 Installing Devices

Figure 3-14 Installing a smart U space manager (main control box attached to the
top of the cabinet exterior)

(1) Fastener (2) UIM20A Expansion Module (3) Main control box

(4) Asset detection strip (42 U

detection point)

----End

3.6 Installing a UIM20A Expansion Module

Procedure
Step 1 Secure a mounting ear to each of the two sides of the UIM20A expansion module
using four M4 screws.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 26

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 3 Installing Devices

Figure 3-15 Installing mounting ears

Step 2 Determine the mounting holes for the UIM20A expansion module in a cabinet
based on the engineering layout diagram, and install floating nuts.
NOTE

Recommended installation position: The third U space from the top to the bottom at the
rear of the cabinet.

Figure 3-16 Installing floating nuts

Step 3 Secure the UIM20A expansion module to the cabinet by tightening the M6 screws
on the left and right mounting ears clockwise.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 27

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 3 Installing Devices

Figure 3-17 Installing a UIM20A expansion module

----End

3.7 Installing Sensors

3.7.1 Installing Cabinet Temperature Sensors

Context
● The BOM number of the temperature sensor is 33010557, including two
temperature sensor cables and one extension cable. Each temperature sensor
cable contains three NTCs.
● Install temperature sensors in the IT cabinet and network cabinet.

Procedure
Step 1 Secure temperature sensors to the corresponding cabinet.
Step 2 Route the extension cable through the sponge strips between the rack rail and
side panel, and secure the cable.
Step 3 Connect one end of the extension cable to the temperature sensor on the front
door.
Step 4 Connect the other end of the extension cable and the temperature sensor on the
rear door to the T/H sensor.
Step 5 Bind the cables with fasteners.
NOTE

● The securing positions of fasteners are for reference only. The actual mounting holes on the
cabinets prevail.
● The temperature sensor is installed in the middle of the cabinet door and is vertical from top
to bottom after installation.
● NTC1–NTC3 of the T/H sensor must be placed in the cold air area, and NTC4–NTC46 must
be placed in the hot air area.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 28

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 3 Installing Devices

Figure 3-18 Installing temperature sensors

(1) Fastener

----End

3.7.2 Installing a Hydrogen Sensor

Context
● A hydrogen sensor is used to detect the hydrogen density indoors. It works
with the hydrogen detection system.
● The hydrogen detection system is installed on the ceiling of the area to be
detected.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 29

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 3 Installing Devices

Procedure
Step 1 Install two expansion bolts (M6x60) at the specified positions, align the two
mounting ears of the hydrogen sensor with the expansion bolts, and tighten the
M6 nuts.

Figure 3-19 Installing a hydrogen sensor (unit: mm)

Step 2 Connect the power cable of the hydrogen sensor to + and - of the hydrogen
detection system, connect the signal cable to S, and connect the shell to the PE
cable.
NOTE

Pay attention to the negative and positive polarities of the power supply. If the polarities are
connected incorrectly, the device may be burned.

Figure 3-20 Connecting cables

----End

3.7.3 Installing the Hydrogen Detection System

Context
● The hydrogen detection system is used to detect the hydrogen density
indoors. When the hydrogen density exceeds the alarm threshold, the system
generates alarms.
● The hydrogen detection system is installed on the interior wall of the area to
be detected.

Procedure
Step 1 Install four expansion bolts (M6x60) to the specified positions, align the four
mounting ears of the hydrogen detection system with the expansion bolts, and
tighten the M6 nuts.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 30

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 3 Installing Devices

Figure 3-21 Installing a hydrogen detection system (unit: mm)

Step 2 According to the silk screen and Figure 3-22, connect the ground cable to (1),
input power cable to (2), fan cables to (3), and hydrogen sensor cables to (4).
Step 3 Prepare one end of a network cable according to Table 3-1, and connect the cable
to (7).

DANGER

Pay attention to the negative and positive polarities of the power supply. If the
polarities are connected incorrectly, the device may be burned.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 31

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 3 Installing Devices

Figure 3-22 Connecting cables

(1) PE (2) AC IN (3) Output ports for fan 1 to

fan 4

(4) Output ports for hydrogen (5) Hydrogen concentration (6) RS485+, RS485-, GND, and
sensor 1 to hydrogen sensor 4 alarm port, fan alarm port, and idle ports (reserved ports)
hardware fault port (reserved
ports)

(7) RS485 port

Table 3-1 Pin mapping for the RS485 port

Pin Signal Function

Pin 1 (orange-white) D+ RS485+

Pin 2 (orange) D- RS485-

Pin 3 (green-white) 12V+ 12+ input

Pin 4 (blue) NC -

Pin 5 (blue-white) NC -

Pin 6 (green) NC -

Pin 7 (brown-white) NC -

Pin 8 (brown) 12V- 12- input

----End

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 32

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 3 Installing Devices

3.7.4 Installing a Smoke Detector

Context
● The smoke detector is used to detect the smoke density indoors. When the
smoke density exceeds the alarm threshold, the detector generates alarms.
● The smoke detector is applicable to the space with an area less than 20
square meters and a height less than 6 m.
● The smoke detector is installed on the top of the room within the area to be
detected.
● Prior to installing the smoke detector, properly connect the detector cables to
avoid unnecessary rework.

Procedure
Step 1 Take out the smoke detector base and mark mounting holes for the base in the
appropriate position.

Figure 3-23 Mounting holes (unit: mm)

Step 2 Drill holes and install expansion tubes. Install the smoke detector base to the top
of the room.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 33

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 3 Installing Devices

Figure 3-24 Installing a smoke detector

Step 3 Align the mounting holes in the smoke detector with its base, and then rotate the
smoke detector until it is secured.

----End

3.7.5 Installing a Temperature and Humidity Sensor (BOM

Number: 33010346)

Prerequisites
A temperature and humidity sensor (BOM number: 33010346) and tools for
installing it have been prepared.

Context
● For details about how to install an ambient temperature and humidity sensor
and connect its cables, see shipped documents.
● Connect cables to an ambient temperature and humidity sensor before
installation.

Preparations
Tool: Phillips screwdriver

Materials: temperature and humidity sensor, temperature and humidity sensor

base

Document: temperature and humidity sensor installation position diagram

Procedure
Step 1 Remove the front cover from the temperature and humidity sensor.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 34

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 3 Installing Devices

Step 2 Install the ambient temperature and humidity sensor to the position specified on
the wall, and secure it using bolts.
Step 3 Reinstall the front cover for the temperature and humidity sensor.

Figure 3-25 Installing the temperature and humidity sensor

----End

3.7.6 Installing a Temperature and Humidity Sensor (BOM

Number: 02312PBL)
Prerequisites
A temperature and humidity sensor (BOM number: 02312PBL) and tools for
installing it have been prepared.

Context
● For details about how to install an ambient temperature and humidity sensor
and connect its cables, see shipped documents.
● Connect cables to an ambient temperature and humidity sensor before
installation.

Preparations
Tool: Phillips screwdriver
Materials: temperature and humidity sensor, temperature and humidity sensor
base
Document: temperature and humidity sensor installation position diagram

Procedure
Step 1 Install the T/H sensor base at the right column position of the IT cabinet about 1.6
m high above the floor in the aisle, and then clamp the T/H sensor onto the base.
Step 2 Set device addresses for the T/H sensors.
Set the device address for a T/H sensor by operating the DIP switch on the sensor.
Toggle switches 1–6 are used to set the device address, toggle switch 7 is reserved,
and toggle switch 8 is used to switch the temperature display mode. The device

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 35

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 3 Installing Devices

address is set in binary coding format in the range of 1–63. The first bit is the least
significant, and the sixth bit is the most significant. ON indicates 1 and OFF
indicates 0. The address range is 1–63.

NOTE

The numbers indicate the DIP switch settings of the T/H sensors.

Figure 3-26 DIP switch settings for T/H sensors

Step 3 Connect the communications cables to the T/H sensors.

Figure 3-27 Cable connections to T/H sensors

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 36

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 3 Installing Devices

(1) UIM20A expansion module (2) T/H sensor (3) NTC sensor

----End

3.7.7 Installing a Region-type Water Sensor

Context
A water sensor consists of a water detection cable, water detector, and conversion
cable. The water detection cable is laid out on the floor, connecting to the water
detector placed near the collector by the conversion cable.

Figure 3-28 Water sensor components

(1) Water detector (2) Conversion cable end A, (3) Conversion cable
connecting to the water
detector

(4) Conversion cable end B, (5) Water detection cable end (6) Water detection cable
connecting to the water A, connecting to the
detection cable conversion cable

Procedure
Step 1 Install the water detector near the collector and secure it using screws or other
methods.
Step 2 Connect the water detection cable to the conversion cable.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 37

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 3 Installing Devices

Figure 3-29 Connecting the water detection cable to the conversion cable

(1) Conversion cable end B, connecting to the (2) Water detection cable end A, connecting to
water detection cable the conversion cable

NOTE

The water detection cable and conversion cable are interconnected through the male and
female connectors.

Step 3 Connect the other end of the conversion cable to the water detector.

Figure 3-30 Connecting the water detector

Step 4 Plan the installation position for the fastener of the water detection cable. Ensure
that the water detection cable placed on the fastener is in good contact with the
floor.

NOTICE

Do not contact the water detection cable to metal, for this action will cause a
false alarm. Take protective measures when routing a water detection cable.

Step 5 Tear off the protection paper on the rear of the fastener, then securely attach the
fastener to the floor.

Figure 3-31 Installing a fastener

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 38

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 3 Installing Devices

NOTE

● One fastener is provided for a 1 m long water detection cable.

● When securing the water detection cable to the concrete floor, use the cable nail clips
delivered with the cable to secure the cable.

Figure 3-32 Installing a cable nail clip

NOTICE

● When laying out the water detection cable, ensure that the water detector is
close to the planned position for the network cabinet to facilitate further cable
connections.
● The water detection cable should not be laid out near air exhaust vents of
smart cooling products. If unavoidable, take measures to prevent condensation.

Step 6 Place the water detection cable onto the fastener, secure the fastener, and keep
the water detection cable in close contact with the floor.

Figure 3-33 Securing a water detection cable

NOTE

If multiple water detection cables need to be connected in series, connect the male connector of
one cable to the female connector of another cable.

----End

3.7.8 Installing a Location-type Water Sensor

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 39

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 3 Installing Devices

Context
● The location-type water sensor is installed on a 35 mm DIN guide rail and can
be installed on the wall around the detected area.
● Install water detection cables surrounding the water leakage area.
● To avoid damaging the water sensor, do not unpack it until right before
installation.

Procedure
Step 1 Fix a proper length of DIN guide rail to the wall around the detected area.
Step 2 Unpack the location-type water sensor, buckle the module to the DIN guide rail,
and ensure that the latch faces upwards during installation.
NOTE

● The water leakage locator should be installed within 1200 meters of the control host.
● The installation height must not exceed 1.5 m. Ensure that the water detection rope is
no higher than the ground.
● Hand-write the address in the address blank area.

Figure 3-34 Installation diagram

(1) Latch (2) DIN guide track

NOTE

● Touch grounded devices or pipes to eliminate ESD before taking the location-type water
sensor module.
● Place it gently. Protect it against mechanical impact and collision. Keep it dry.
● Prevent it against metal filings, grease, pipe paint, and other contaminants.

Step 3 The location-type water sensor consists of a water leakage locator, tieline, and
water leakage location cable, the connection diagram is as follows.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 40

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 3 Installing Devices

Figure 3-35 Connection diagram for location-type water sensor components

(1) Tie line (2) Water leakage location (3) Terminal

cable

(4) Extension line (5) Water leakage locator

NOTE

● Two types (A and B) of end caps are delivered in early stage. The site may support only
one type. In the later delivery, there is only one type supported, that is, type A and type
B are not distinguished any more.
● If there are two types (A and B) delivered with the product, select either of the types to
complete cable connection. After the cable is connected and the water leakage locator
is powered on and initialized, if the buzzer keeps buzzing and the alarm location is a
stable value that is greater than the total length of the water leakage location cable,
replace the end cap with the other end cap.

Table 3-2 RJ45 cable wire sequence of the Tie line

Pin Definition

Pin 1 (orange-and-white) RS485+

Pin 2 (orange) RS485-

Pin 3 (green-and-white) 12VDC

Pin 4 (blue) RS485+

Pin 5 (blue-and-white) RS485-

Pin 6 (green) -

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 41

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 3 Installing Devices

Pin Definition

Pin 7 (brown-and-white) -

Pin 8 (brown) GND

Step 4 Tear off the protection paper on the rear of the fastener, then securely attach the
fastener to the floor.

Figure 3-36 Installing a fastener

NOTE

15 fasteners are furnished with the device.

Step 5 Place the water detection cable onto the fastener, secure the fastener, and keep
the water detection cable in close contact with the floor.

Figure 3-37 Securing a water detection cable

----End

3.8 Installing the Video Management System

3.8.1 Installing an IVS1800

Context
By default, the IVS1800 is delivered without disks. After the IVS1800 is delivered to
the site, install hard disks as required and then install the IVS1800 in the cabinet.

Procedure
Step 1 Install hard disks.
1. Use a PH2 screwdriver to remove the two black screws on the rear of the
chassis cover, and take off the chassis cover.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 42

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 3 Installing Devices

Figure 3-38 Removing the chassis cover

2. Remove two black screws on each side of the chassis and the silvery white
one on top of the hard disk tray, raise the hard disk tray by 45 degrees, and
take out the upper and then lower layers of hard disk tray.

Figure 3-39 Removing the hard disk tray

3. Place the hard disks with ports facing upwards and align the screw holes on
the hard disk tray with the hard disks and fasten the screws. Before the
installation, ensure that the fastener of the hard disk tray is on a different
side from the hard disk port, as shown in the lower left figure.

Figure 3-40 Installing hard disks

4. Insert the hard disk tray back at 45 degrees with the opening of its locking
buckle facing downwards, hold the screw in the red-framed part to lower the
hard disk tray until it is level, and fasten the black screws on the left and right
sides and the white screw on the top.

Figure 3-41 Fastening the screw on the panel and the screws on the hard disk
tray

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 43

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 3 Installing Devices

5. Connect data and power cables to hard disks. Connect hard disk cable ports
P0–P3 to hard disks on the lower-layer hard disk tray and ports P4–P7 to hard
disks on the upper-layer, as shown in the lower left figure.

Figure 3-42 Connecting data and power cables to hard disks

6. Close the chassis cover, and use a PH2 screwdriver to fasten the rear screws.

Figure 3-43 Closing the chassis cover

Step 2 Install the device.

NOTE

● Before installing the IVS1800 in a cabinet, install guide rails to hold the device. If guide
rails have been installed in the cabinet, check whether they match the device and
whether they block the air intake or exhaust vents of the chassis as the fan is located on
the side. If the vents are blocked, change the guide rails.
● Huawei provides guide rails that can be adjusted from 500 mm to 800 mm for
additional purchase if required for IVS1800 installation.
● Do not attach rubber feet on the IVS1800 to save space during cabinet installation.
1. Confirm the installation location of guide rails in the cabinet. Install cage nuts
(two at the front and three at the back on each side) to secure the guide rails
at the proper position in the cabinet, as shown in the lower left figure. The
lower right figure shows how to install cage nuts.

1. Insert a cage nut into the square hole from the inside of the cabinet and
clamp it to the lower frame of the square hole.

2. Use a mounting bar to pull the cage nut until it clamps the upper frame of
the square hole.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 44

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 3 Installing Devices

Figure 3-44 Installing a cage nut

2. Install guide rails. Horizontally place a guide rail to the installation location
through the positioning block at the front of the guide rail and the
positioning hook at the rear of the guide rail. Fasten four M6 screws (two on
each side) to fix the front end and six M6 screws (three on each side) to fix
the rear end, as shown in the lower right figure.

CAUTION

Before installing a guide rail, check the (F/L, F/R) labels on the guide rail to
identify whether it is for the left or right and which part is the front or rear.
F/L indicates the front end of the left guide rail, and F/R indicates the front
end of the right guide rail.

Figure 3-45 Installing a guide rail

3. Install a filler panel for guide rails. Fasten the M6 screws to install the filler
panel for the guide rails.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 45

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 3 Installing Devices

Figure 3-46 Installing a filler panel for guide rails

4. Install the cage nuts that secure the IVS1800. The cage nut installation
locations are the first and sixth holes along the guide rails, as shown in the
following figure.

Figure 3-47 Installing cage nuts

5. Install mounting ears. Use a PH2 screwdriver to secure the mounting ears to
both sides of the front panel of the device with four screws on each side.
When the device is near the front door of the cabinet, fasten screws in hole
groups 1 and 2; when the device is near the rear door, fasten screws in hole
groups 2 and 3.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 46

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 3 Installing Devices

Figure 3-48 Installing mounting ears

6. Install the IVS1800 in the cabinet.

1. Lift the device from both sides and carefully position it at the front of the
cabinet.
2. Lift the device slightly above the guide rails, gently place it on the guide
rails, and then slide it into the cabinet until the mounting ears of the subrack
contact the mounting bars at the front of the cabinet.
7. Thread M6 screws (prepared by the customer) through two slotted holes on
each mounting ear. Fasten the M6 screws using a Phillips screwdriver to fix
the mounting ears on the front mounting bars of the cabinet, as shown in the
lower right figure.

Figure 3-49 Securing the device

Step 3 Power on the device.

1. Turn on the power switch.
2. Check the indicators on the front panel of the device for its running status.

----End

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 47

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 3 Installing Devices

3.8.2 Installing a C3220 Camera

Prerequisites
● Control skylights have been installed.
● A camera and tools for installing it have been prepared.
● A network cable for connecting the camera to the LAN switch has been
prepared.
● The LAN switch has been normally powered on.

Context
The camera needs to be installed on a control skylight.

Preparations
Tool: Phillips screwdriver
Materials: SD card, camera

Procedure
Step 1 Install an SD card.
1. Remove the transparent cover using a Phillips screwdriver.

Figure 3-50 Removing the transparent cover

2. Gently insert the SD card into the SD card slot.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 48

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 3 Installing Devices

Figure 3-51 Installing an SD card

Step 2 Route the camera cable through the control skylight.

Step 3 Align the holes in the camera base with the holes on the control skylight, and
secure the camera to the control skylight.

Figure 3-52 Installing a camera base

(1) Cable outlet

Step 4 Use a Phillips screwdriver to loosen the screws on both sides of the lens, adjust the
surveillance angle, and tighten the screws to 0.6 N·m.

NOTICE

● By default, the camera is horizontally installed, and the surveillance video is

displayed horizontally. During the installation, adjust the surveillance angle to
avoid video image rotation after the installation.
● When adjusting the surveillance angle, pay attention to the position of the
illuminator to prevent the illuminator from being blocked.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 49

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 3 Installing Devices

Figure 3-53 Adjusting the camera

NOTE

The camera features a three-axis design. The camera can be adjusted by –175° to +180°
horizontally, and the lens can rotate –175° to +180° and be adjusted by 0° to 65° vertically.

Step 5 Align the transparent cover with the screw holes on the base, close the
transparent cover, and use a Phillips screwdriver to tighten the screws to 0.8 N·m.

Figure 3-54 Installing the transparent cover

----End

3.8.3 Installing the M2121 Camera

Cameras can be installed on different objects based on scenarios. This section
describes how to install a M2121 camera on the wall.

Prerequisites
● A camera and tools for installing it have been prepared.
● A network cable for connecting the camera to the LAN switch has been
prepared.
● The LAN switch has been normally powered on.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 50

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 3 Installing Devices

Procedure
Step 1 Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the bottom cover of the camera and insert
the SD card. For details about the SD card insertion direction, see the marks on
the maintenance window. After the installation is complete, tighten the bottom
cover to a torque of 0.49 N·m.

Figure 3-55 Installing an SD card

(1) Reset button (2) SD card slot (3) System running status
indicator

CAUTION

● If the camera cannot connect to the platform for a long time or is not
connected to the platform, you are advised to disable the video buffering
function of the camera to increase the service life of the SD card.
● Do not remove the window protective film before the installation is complete.

Step 2 Check the diameter of the cable outlet on the wall to ensure that the tails can be
routed through the cable outlet. Paste the drilling sticker in the camera
installation position. Ensure that the center of the sticker overlaps the center of
the cable outlet on the wall.

Figure 3-56 Determining the camera installation position

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 51

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 3 Installing Devices

Step 3 Obtain a drill bit with a diameter of 8 mm and drill 55 mm holes in the specified
positions marked by the stickers. Use a claw hammer to install expansion bolts
into the holes.

Figure 3-57 Inserting the expansion tube

Step 4 Connect the cables to the tails of the camera, perform insulation operations on
the cables, and put the cables through the cable entry on the wall. Tighten the
tapping screws. Ensure that the cable outlet in the camera base points down, and
seal the outlet with waterproof sealant.

Figure 3-58 Installing the M2121 camera

NOTE

● The preceding installation method is to route the pigtail through the wall. If the pigtail
does not need to be routed through the wall, route the pigtail out of the cable outlet on
the base and cover it with a corrugated pipe.
● Face the cable outlet with BOTTOM on the camera base downwards to prevent water
from flowing into the camera and cause damage to the camera.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 52

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 3 Installing Devices

Step 5 Loosen the three hexagon socket head cap screws on the bracket, adjust the
camera angle, and tighten the screws.

Figure 3-59 Adjusting the M2121 camera

----End

3.9 Installing the Access Management System

3.9.1 Installing an A8802RS Access Controller

Context
● The access controller can be wall-mounted. You are advised to install it in a
weak-current well.
● If a twisted pair is connected between the access controller and the card
reader, it is recommended that the distance between them do not exceed 30
m.
● Install double-door and quadruple-door access controllers by referring to this
section.

Procedure
Step 1 Mark the mounting holes using the access controller and marker, and drill holes
using a hammer drill.
Step 2 Unlock the access controller with the delivered key.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 53

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 3 Installing Devices

Figure 3-60 Unlocking an access controller

Step 3 Use four screws to install the access controller on the wall.

Figure 3-61 Installing an access controller

----End

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 54

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 3 Installing Devices

3.9.2 Installing an In-Room Double-Door Magnetic Lock

Context
● The magnetic lock supports a double-door that can be rotated open
outwards. The door frame should be over 42 mm thick. A glass door is not
supported.
● The cable routes are planned.

Procedure
Step 1 Fold the delivered cutout template along the dotted line by 90 degrees, as shown
by (2) in Figure 3-62.
Step 2 Close the door, place the cutout template at the midline of the door frame in the
door opening direction, mark the mounting holes, and drill holes, as shown in
Figure 3-62.

Figure 3-62 Mark the installation position

(1) Door frame (2) Cutout template (3) Door panel

Step 3 Remove the hoisting strip using the delivered hex key.
NOTE

Four hex socket screws need to be removed in this step.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 55

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 3 Installing Devices

Figure 3-63 Removing a hoisting strip

Step 4 Secure the hosting strip using the delivered screws, as shown by (1) in Figure
3-64.

NOTICE

Pay attention to the direction of the hoisting strip, and ensure that the bulging
surface of the magnetic lock faces the magnet.

Figure 3-64 Installing a magnetic lock

Step 5 Route the electronic lock cable through the cable hole, and secure the electronic
lock using a hex key, as shown by (2) in Figure 3-64.

Step 6 Install the magnet.

1. Take out the magnet, and knock the positing pins of the magnet into the
magnet using a rubber mallet.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 56

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 3 Installing Devices

Figure 3-65 Installing positioning pins of a magnet

2. Insert the assembled magnet into the positioning holes in the door, and
secure the magnet to the door using the screws and rubber pad delivered
with the electronic lock, as shown in Figure 3-66.
NOTE

When securing the magnet to the door panel, do not over-tighten the screws so that the
rubber pad is elastic. The rubber pad will adjust the magnet to a correct position because of
its elasticity.

Figure 3-66 Installing a magnet

(1) Rubber pad

Step 7 (Optional) Adjust the magnet.

1. If the magnet cannot attract the door properly after power-on, place a
magnetized metal part near the magnet to check whether the magnet
provides a proper magnetic force.
2. If the magnetic lock and the magnet do not work properly, check and
troubleshoot the circuit.

----End

3.9.3 Installing an In-Room Single-Door Magnetic Lock

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 57

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 3 Installing Devices

Context
● Check that the room door is a single-door that can be rotated open outwards.
The door frame should be over 42 mm thick. A glass door is not supported.
● The cable routes are planned.

Procedure
Step 1 Fold the delivered cutout template along the dotted line by 90 degrees, as shown
by (2) in Figure 3-67.
Step 2 Close the door, place the cutout template near the top of the door frame in the
door opening direction, mark the mounting holes, and drill holes, as shown in
Figure 3-67.

Figure 3-67 Mark the installation position

(1) Door frame (2) Cutout template (3) Door panel

Step 3 Remove the hoisting strip using the delivered hex key.
NOTE

Two hex socket screws need to be removed in this step.

Figure 3-68 Removing a hoisting strip

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 58

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 3 Installing Devices

Step 4 Secure the hosting strip using the delivered screws, as shown by (1) in Figure
3-69.

NOTICE

Pay attention to the direction of the hoisting strip, and ensure that the bulging
surface of the magnetic lock faces the magnet.

Figure 3-69 Installing a magnetic lock

Step 5 Remove the small cover from the magnetic lock, and route the cable out of the
cable hole, as shown in Figure 3-70.

Figure 3-70 Connecting cables

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 59

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 3 Installing Devices

(1) Cable outlet

Step 6 Secure the magnetic lock, as shown by (2) in Figure 3-69.

Step 7 Install the magnet.
1. Take out the magnet, and knock the positing pins of the magnet into the
magnet using a rubber mallet.

Figure 3-71 Installing positioning pins of a magnet

2. Insert the assembled magnet into the positioning holes in the door, and
secure the magnet to the door using the screws and rubber pad delivered
with the electronic lock, as shown in Figure 3-72.
NOTE

When securing the magnet to the door panel, do not over-tighten the screws so that the
rubber pad is elastic. The rubber pad will adjust the magnet to a correct position because of
its elasticity.

Figure 3-72 Installing a magnet

(1) Rubber pad

Step 8 (Optional) Adjust the magnet.

1. If the magnet cannot attract the door properly after power-on, place a
magnetized metal part near the magnet to check whether the magnet
provides a proper magnetic force.
2. If the magnetic lock and the magnet do not work properly, check and
troubleshoot the circuit.
----End

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 60

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 3 Installing Devices

3.9.4 Installing a Fingerprint and Card Reader with a Keypad

Context
● It is recommended that the product be installed 30–300 mm close to the
equipment room door and 1.4–1.6 m above the floor.
● Do not install the product in a place with heavy dust or exposed to sunlight.

Procedure
Step 1 Remove the screws (set aside) from the fingerprint and card reader with a keypad
and remove the baseplate, as shown by (1) in Figure 3-74.

Step 2 Mark the mounting holes using a marker, and drill holes using a hammer drill.

Figure 3-73 Marking mounting holes (unit: mm)

Step 3 Install the baseplate, as shown by (3) in Figure 3-74.

Step 4 Route the cable of the fingerprint and card reader with a keypad through the
cable hole in the baseplate, as shown by (4) in Figure 3-74.
NOTE

The fingerprint and card reader with a key pad is connected to the access actuator by a
network cable.

Step 5 Check that cables are correctly connected.

Step 6 Secure the fingerprint and card reader with a keypad to the baseplate, as shown
by (5) and (6) in Figure 3-74.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 61

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 3 Installing Devices

Figure 3-74 Installing a fingerprint and card reader with a keypad

----End

3.9.5 Installing a Fingerprint and Card Reader

Context
● It is recommended that the product be installed 30–300 mm close to the
equipment room door and 1.4–1.6 m above the floor.
● Do not install the product in a place with heavy dust or exposed to sunlight.

Procedure
Step 1 Remove the screws (set aside) from the fingerprint and card reader and remove
the baseplate, as shown by (1) in Figure 3-76.
Step 2 Mark the mounting holes using a marker, and drill holes using a hammer drill.

Figure 3-75 Marking mounting holes (unit: mm)

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 62

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 3 Installing Devices

Step 3 Install the baseplate, as shown by (3) in Figure 3-76.

Step 4 Route the fingerprint and card reader cable through the cable hole in the
baseplate, as shown by (4) in Figure 3-76.
NOTE

The fingerprint and card reader is connected to the access actuator by a network cable.

Step 5 Check that cables are correctly connected.

Step 6 Secure the fingerprint and card reader to the baseplate, as shown by (5) and (6)
in Figure 3-76.

Figure 3-76 Installing a fingerprint and card reader

----End

3.9.6 Installing a Card Reader with a Keypad

Context
● It is recommended that the product be installed 30–300 mm close to the
equipment room door and 1.4–1.6 m above the floor.
● Do not install the product in a place with heavy dust or exposed to sunlight.

Procedure
Step 1 Remove the screws (set aside) from the card reader with a keypad and remove the
baseplate, as shown by (1) in Figure 3-78.
Step 2 Mark the mounting holes using a marker, and drill holes using a hammer drill.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 63

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 3 Installing Devices

Figure 3-77 Marking mounting holes (unit: mm)

Step 3 Install the baseplate, as shown by (3) in Figure 3-78.

Step 4 Route the cable of the card reader with a keypad through the cable hole in the
baseplate, as shown by (4) in Figure 3-78.
NOTE

The card reader with a keypad is connected to the access actuator by a network cable.

Step 5 Check that cables are correctly connected.

Step 6 Secure the card reader with a keypad to the baseplate, as shown by (5) and (6) in
Figure 3-78.

Figure 3-78 Installing a card reader with a keypad

----End

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 64

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 3 Installing Devices

3.9.7 Installing an Exit Button

Procedure
Step 1 Remove the exit button cover using a flat-head screwdriver.

Step 2 Remove screws from the exit button, remove the base, and mark mounting holes
using the base and a marker.

Step 3 Drill holes and install the exit button base.

Step 4 Take out any two of the four core wires and connect them to the NO and COM
ports on the exit button.

Step 5 Route the cable through the cable hole.

Step 6 Reinstall the exit button and the cover.

----End

3.9.8 Installing an In-room Emergency Door Release Button

Context
● It is recommended that the button be installed 1.4–1.6 m away from the inner
door of the protected area and 1.6 m above the floor.
● The appearance of the emergency door release button is for reference only.
The actual appearance may vary.

Procedure
Step 1 Remove the emergency door release button.

Figure 3-79 Removing an emergency door release button

1. Remove screws from the emergency door release button using a Phillips
screwdriver, as shown by (1) in Figure 3-79.
2. Remove the glass panel of the emergency door release button, as shown by
(2) and (3) in Figure 3-79.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 65

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 3 Installing Devices

3. Remove screws from the base, and remove the base, as shown by (4) in
Figure 3-79.
Step 2 Mark the mounting holes using a marker and the base.

Figure 3-80 Marking mounting holes (unit: mm)

Step 3 Drill holes using a hammer drill, and route cables out of the cable hole.
Step 4 Install the emergency door release button.

Figure 3-81 Installing an emergency door release button

1. Install the base of the emergency door release button, as shown by (1) in
Figure 3-81.
2. Install the glass panel of the emergency door release button, as shown by (2)
and (3) in Figure 3-81.
3. Tighten screws of the emergency door release button using a Phillips
screwdriver, as shown by (4) in Figure 3-81.

----End

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 66

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices

4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to

Devices

NOTICE

Cable connections specified in this document are based on the cable connection
sequences specified in Preparing a Monitoring Cable. Connect cables in required
sequences by referring to Preparing a Monitoring Cable to prevent device
connection failures.
Unless otherwise specified, all network cables in this document are crossover
cables.

4.1 Scenarios for Connecting a Server

4.1.1 Server Ports

4.1.1.1 Server Ports (TaiShan 200 Server)

The TaiShan 200 server (Model 2280) is a next-generation data center server
developed by Huawei. Based on Huawei Kunpeng processors, the server features
efficient computing, high security and reliability, and an open ecosystem. As the
monitoring host of the NetEco management system, the server processes and
analyzes data.

Figure 4-1 Ports on the TaiShan 200 server (Model 2280)

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 67

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices

Table 4-1 Description of ports on the TaiShan 200 server (Model 2280)
No. Port Type Description

1 eth0 GE port Used for connecting to the LAN switch.

● Scenario where the southbound and
2 eth1 GE port
northbound networks are not isolated:
3 eth2 GE port Connect eth0 and eth1, which are configured
as bond0 by default, to provide southbound
4 eth3 GE port and northbound services. Connect eth2 and
eth3, which are configured as bond1 by
5 eth4 GE port
default, to provide southbound 2 services.
6 eth5 GE port ● Scenario where the southbound and
northbound networks are isolated: Connect
eth0 and eth1, which are configured as
bond0 by default, to provide northbound
services. Connect eth2 and eth3, which are
configured as bond1 by default, to provide
southbound services. Connect eth4 and eth5,
which are configured as bond2 by default, to
provide southbound 2 services.

7 eth6 GE port Reserved.

8 eth7 GE port

9 iBMC remote Used for connecting to a PC to manage the

management TaiShan 200 server (Model 2280).
port

10 Server serial Used for connecting to an SMS modem or for

port commissioning.

11 VGA port Used for connecting to a monitor.

12 USB port Used for connecting to an external device.

4.1.1.2 Server Ports (2288X V5 Server)

The 2288X V5 server is a next-generation Huawei data center server that
integrates patented technologies such as Dynamic Energy Management
Technology (DEMT) and fault diagnosis & management (FDM). It features
efficient computing, high security and reliability, and an open ecosystem. Suitable
for efficient acceleration of applications such as big data, distributed storage,
native applications, high-performance computing, and databases, the server aims
to meet the requirements of diversified computing and green computing in data
centers.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 68

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices

Figure 4-2 Ports on the 2288X V5 server

Table 4-2 2288X V5 server port description

No. Port Type Description

1 eth0 GE port Used for connecting to the LAN switch.

● Scenario where the southbound and
2 eth1 GE port
northbound networks are not isolated:
3 eth2 GE port Connect eth0 and eth1, which are
configured as bond0 by default, to provide
4 eth3 GE port southbound and northbound services.
Connect eth2 and eth3, which are
5 eth4 GE port
configured as bond1 by default, to provide
6 eth5 GE port southbound 2 services.
● Scenario where the southbound and
northbound networks are isolated: Connect
eth0 and eth1, which are configured as
bond0 by default, to provide northbound
services. Connect eth2 and eth3, which are
configured as bond1 by default, to provide
southbound services. Connect eth4 and eth5,
which are configured as bond2 by default, to
provide southbound 2 services.

7 eth6 GE port Reserved.

8 eth7 GE port

9 VGA port Used for connecting to a monitor.

10 USB port Used for connecting to an external device.

11 iBMC remote Used for connecting to a PC to manage the

management 2288X V5 server.
port

12 Server serial Used for connecting to an SMS modem or for

port commissioning.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 69

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices

4.1.2 Installing the SMS Modem

Prerequisites
An idle serial port is available on the server.

Context
Figure 4-3 shows the ports on the SMS modem.

Figure 4-3 Ports on the SMS modem

(1) SIM card slot (2) Connecting to the antenna

(3) Connecting to the power cable (4) Serial port

Procedure
Step 1 Use cable ties to bind the GSM modem to the mounting bar near the server
installation position on the rear door of the network cabinet.
Step 2 Insert a SIM card into the SMS modem.
Use a tool such as the small screwdriver to press the yellow key. Put the SIM card
on the ejected tray, and insert the tray into the SMS modem.
Step 3 Connect the antenna to the antenna connector.
Step 4 Connect the serial cable.
Connect one end of the serial cable to the modem, and the other end to the
transfer cable. Connect the other end of the transfer cable to an idle serial port on
the server. For details about the serial ports on the server, see Server Ports.

NOTE

For details, see the user manual delivered with the SMS modem.
Use the connector convertor delivered with the SMS modem if the connector of the serial
cable does not match the serial port on the server.

Step 5 Connect the power cable.

1. Connect one end of the power adapter to the SMS modem. For details, see
the specifications delivered with the SMS modem.
2. Connect the other end of the power adapter to the universal conversion C1
socket.
3. Connect the other end of the universal conversion C1 socket to the rPDU
through a transfer cable (C13/C14 cable or China standard C13 cable).

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 70

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices

After the power cable is connected, switch on the power. Normally, the indicator
of the SMS modem blinks regularly. Table 4-3 describes the relationships between
the indicator status and the modem status.

Table 4-3 Relationships between the indicator status and the modem status

Indicator Status Modem Status

The SMS modem is activated and is not registered

On
with the network.

The SMS modem is connected to the network and

Blinks slowly
is in idle mode.

Blinks quickly The SMS modem is in transmission mode.

Off The SMS modem is deactivated.

Step 6 Install the SMS modem driver.

To install the SMS modem driver, see the specifications delivered with the SMS
modem.

NOTE

You need to install the driver only when the installation of the driver is required in the
specifications delivered with the SMS modem.

----End

4.1.3 Connecting Cables to the 4G SMS Modem

Prerequisites
An idle USB port is available on the server.

Context
The following figure shows the ports on the 4G SMS modem.

Figure 4-4 Ports on the 4G SMS modem

(1) SIM card slot (2) USB 2.0 port (3) External antenna port
(SMA port)

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 71

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices

(4) RJ11 analog audio port (5) RS232 standard serial port

Procedure
Step 1 Use cable ties to bind the GSM modem to the mounting bar near the server
installation position on the rear door of the network cabinet.

Step 2 Insert a SIM card into the 4G SMS modem.

Use a tool such as the small screwdriver to press the yellow key. Put the SIM card
on the ejected tray, and insert the tray into the SMS modem.

Step 3 Connect the antenna to the antenna connector.

Step 4 Connect the serial cable.

Connect one end of the serial cable to the modem, and the other end to the
transfer cable. Connect the other end of the transfer cable to an idle serial port on
the server. For details about the serial ports on the server, see Server Ports.

NOTE

Use the connector convertor delivered with the SMS modem if the connector of the serial
cable does not match the serial port on the server.

Step 5 Connect the power cable.

1. Connect one end of the USB cable to the USB 2.0 port on the modem.
2. Connect the other end of the power adapter to the universal conversion C1
socket.
3. Connect the other end of the universal conversion C1 socket to the rPDU
through a transfer cable (C13/C14 cable or China standard C13 cable).

After the power cable is connected, turn on the power supply. The modem
indicator should blink regularly. Table 4-4 describes the relationships between the
indicator status and the modem status.

Table 4-4 Relationships between the indicator status and the modem status

Indicator Status Modem Status

The modem is searching for a network or

On
a call is set up.

Blinks at intervals of 800 ms The modem is connected to the network.

Blinks at intervals of 200 ms The modem is transmitting data.

Off The modem is powered off.

NOTE

For details about how to connect the modem, see the product manual delivered with the
modem.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 72

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices

Step 6 Install the SMS modem driver.

To install the SMS modem driver, see the specifications delivered with the SMS
modem.

----End

4.2 Scenarios for Connecting a LAN Switch

4.2.1 Switches

4.2.1.1 Introduction to Switches (S5335-S24P4X)

Exterior and interior

Figure 4-5 Appearance of the S5335-S24P4X

Table 4-5 S5335-S24P4X description

No. Description

1 Twenty-four 10/100/1000 BASE-T Ethernet electrical ports

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 73

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices

No. Description

2 Four 10GE SFP+ Ethernet optical ports

Modules and cables supported:
● GE optical module
● GE-CWDM optical module
● GE-DWDM optical module
● GE optical/electrical module (supporting 100M/1000M auto-
negotiation)
● 10GE SFP+ optical module (OSXD22N00 not supported)
● 10GE-CWDM optical module
● 10GE-DWDM optical module
● 1 m and 3 m SFP+ high-speed cables
● 3 m and 10 m SFP+ AOC cables
● 0.5 m and 1.5 m SFP+ dedicated stack cables (used for zero-
configuration stacking)

3 One console port

4 One ETH management port

5 One USB port

6 One PNP button

NOTICE
● Holding down the button for more than 6s restores the factory settings and
resets the device.
● Pressing the button resets the device.
● Resetting the device will interrupt services. Exercise caution when using this
button.

7 Ground screw
NOTE
The screw needs to be used with a ground cable.

8 Power module slot 1

NOTE
Supported power module: 1000 W AC PoE power module (PAC1000S56-CB)

9 Power module slot 2

NOTE
Supported power module: 1000 W AC PoE power module (PAC1000S56-CB)

Item
lists technical specifications of the S5335-S24P4X.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 74

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices

Table 4-6 Technical specifications

Specifications Specifications

Memory (RAM) 1 GB

Flash Physical space: 512 MB. To view the actual available space,
run display version.

MTBF 59.88

MTTR 2

Availability > 0.99999

Service port Common mode: ±7 kV (The maximum voltage is ±10 kV,

surge protection and the device is not damaged.)

Power port surge Differential mode: ±6 kV; common mode: ±6 kV

protection

Dimensions (H x ● Basic dimensions (the depth excludes the protruding

W x D) parts of the front and rear panels): 43.6 mm x 442.0 mm
x 420.0 mm
● Maximum dimensions (the depth is the maximum
distance from the protruding port on the front panel to
the module handle on the rear panel): 43.6 mm x 442.0
mm x 444.2 mm

Weight 7.39 kg
(including
packing
materials)

Stack port Any 10/100/1000BASE-T Ethernet electrical port or 10GE SFP

+ Ethernet optical port

RTC Supported

RPS Not supported

PoE Supported

Rated voltage ● AC input: 100–240 V AC; 50/60 Hz

range ● High-voltage DC input: 240 V DC

Maximum ● AC input: 90–290 V AC; 45–65 Hz

voltage range ● High-voltage DC input: 190–290 V DC

Maximum power ● Without PoE: 65 W

consumption ● Full PoE load: 847 W (PoE: 720 W)
(100% traffic,
full fan speed)

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 75

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices

Specifications Specifications

Typical power 51 W
consumption
(30% traffic)
● Tested
according to
the ATIS
standard
● EEE function
enabled
● No PoE power
consumption

Operating –5°C to +50°C (altitude: 0–1800 m)

temperature NOTE
range When the altitude ranges from 1800 m to 5000 m, the highest
temperature decreases by 1°C for each additional 220 m.
The device cannot be started when the ambient temperature is
lower than 0°C.

Short-term –5°C to +55°C (altitude: 0–1800 m)

operating NOTE
temperature When the altitude ranges from 1800 m to 5000 m, the highest
range temperature decreases by 1°C for each additional 220 m.
The device can work for a short period of time when the operating
temperature is outside the normal range, but the following
conditions must be met:
● The consecutive hours during which the operating temperature
exceeds 45°C does not exceed 96 in a year.
● The total time when the operating temperature exceeds 45°C in
a year is less than or equal to 360 hours.
● The number of times that the operating temperature exceeds
45°C is less than or equal to 15 in a year.
If any of the preceding conditions is not met, the device may be
damaged or an unknown error may occur.
The device cannot be started when the ambient temperature is
lower than 0°C. During short-term operation, the maximum distance
of optical modules cannot exceed 10 km.

Storage –40°C to +70°C

temperature
range

Noise at room < 58.9 dB (A)

temperature
(27°C, sound
power)

Relative humidity 5%–95% RH (non-condensing)

Operating 0–5000 m
altitude

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 76

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices

Specifications Specifications

Product ● EMC certification

certification ● Safety certification
● Production certification

Item Code 98010910

4.2.1.2 Introduction to Switches (S5735-S24P4X)

Exterior and interior

Figure 4-6 Appearance of the S5735-S24P4X

Table 4-7 S5735-S24P4X description

No. Description

1 Twenty-four 10/100/1000 BASE-T Ethernet electrical ports

2 Four 10GE SFP+ Ethernet optical ports

Modules and cables supported:
● GE optical module
● GE-CWDM optical module
● GE-DWDM optical module
● GE optical/electrical module (supporting 100M/1000M auto-
negotiation)
● 10GE SFP+ optical module (OSXD22N00 not supported)
● 10GE-CWDM optical module
● 10GE-DWDM optical module
● 1 m and 3 m SFP+ high-speed cables
● 3 m and 10 m SFP+ AOC cables
● 0.5 m and 1.5 m SFP+ dedicated stack cables (used for zero-
configuration stacking)

3 One console port

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 77

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices

No. Description

4 One ETH management port

5 One USB port

6 One PNP button

NOTICE
● Holding down the button for more than 6s restores the factory settings and
resets the device.
● Pressing the button resets the device.
● Resetting the device will interrupt services. Exercise caution when using this
button.

7 Ground screw
NOTE
The screw needs to be used with a ground cable.

8 Power module slot 1

NOTE
Supported power module: 1000 W AC PoE power module (PAC1000S56-CB)

9 Power module slot 2

NOTE
Supported power module: 1000 W AC PoE power module (PAC1000S56-CB)

Item
lists technical specifications of the S5735-S24P4X.

Table 4-8 Technical specifications

Specifications Specifications

Memory (RAM) 1 GB

Flash Physical space: 512 MB. To view the actual available space,
run display version.

MTBF 59.88

MTTR 2

Availability > 0.99999

Service port Common mode: ±7 kV (The maximum voltage is ±10 kV,

surge protection and the device is not damaged.)

Power port surge ● Differential mode: ±6 kV; common mode: ±6 kV

protection

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 78

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices

Specifications Specifications

Dimensions (H x ● Basic dimensions (the depth excludes the protruding

W x D) parts of the front and rear panels): 43.6 mm x 442.0 mm
x 420.0 mm
● Maximum dimensions (the depth is the maximum
distance from the protruding port on the front panel to
the module handle on the rear panel): 43.6 mm x 442.0
mm x 444.2 mm

Weight 7.39 kg
(including
packing
materials)

Stack port Any 10/100/1000BASE-T Ethernet electrical port or 10GE SFP

+ Ethernet optical port

RTC Supported

RPS Not supported

PoE Supported

Rated voltage ● AC input: 100–240 V AC; 50/60 Hz

range ● High-voltage DC input: 240 V DC

Maximum ● AC input: 90–290 V AC; 45–65 Hz

voltage range ● High-voltage DC input: 190–290 V DC

Maximum power ● Without PoE: 65 W

consumption ● Full PoE load: 847 W (PoE: 720 W)
within the
maximum
voltage range
(100% traffic,
full speed of
fans)

Typical power 51 W
consumption
(30% traffic)
● Tested
according to
the ATIS
standard
● EEE function
enabled
● No PoE power
consumption

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 79

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices

Specifications Specifications

Operating –5°C to +50°C (altitude: 0–1800 m)

temperature NOTE
range When the altitude ranges from 1800 m to 5000 m, the highest
temperature decreases by 1°C for each additional 220 m.
The device cannot be started when the ambient temperature is
lower than 0°C.

Short-term –5°C to +55°C (altitude: 0–1800 m)

operating NOTE
temperature When the altitude ranges from 1800 m to 5000 m, the highest
range temperature decreases by 1°C for each additional 220 m.
The device can work for a short period of time when the operating
temperature is outside the normal range, but the following
conditions must be met:
● The consecutive hours during which the operating temperature
exceeds 45°C does not exceed 96 in a year.
● The total time when the operating temperature exceeds 45°C in
a year is less than or equal to 360 hours.
● The number of times that the operating temperature exceeds
45°C is less than or equal to 15 in a year.
If any of the preceding conditions is not met, the device may be
damaged or an unknown error may occur.
The device cannot be started when the ambient temperature is
lower than 0°C. During short-term operation, the maximum distance
of optical modules cannot exceed 10 km.

Storage –40°C to +70°C

temperature
range

Noise at room < 58.9 dB (A)

temperature
(27°C, sound
power)

Relative humidity 5%–95% RH (non-condensing)

Operating 0–5000 m
altitude

Product ● EMC certification

certification ● Safety certification
● Production certification

Item Code 98010940

4.2.2 Connecting a Monitoring Cable to the NetEco

For details, see iMaster NetEco V600R021C10 Management System Wiring
Diagram.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 80

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices

4.2.3 Connecting the Video Management System Cable

4.2.3.1 Connecting a Monitoring Cable to a Camera

Prerequisites
● A network cable used for monitoring is prepared.
● An idle network port supporting the PoE function is available on the LAN
switch.
● The camera has the PoE function.

Procedure
Step 1 Connect the monitoring port on the camera to any network port on the switch by
using the network cable. The switch is powered by using the power over Ethernet
(PoE) technology.

NOTICE

Device cables not mentioned in the document do not need to be connected onsite
and should be insulated only.

----End

4.2.3.2 Connecting a Monitoring Cable to the IVS1800

Prerequisites
A network cable used for monitoring is prepared.

Procedure
Step 1 Connect one end of the network cable to any GE network port on the IVS1800.
Step 2 Connect the other end of the network cable to the Ethernet port on the LAN
switch.

----End

4.2.4 Connecting the Smart Cooling Product Monitoring Cable

Prerequisites
A network cable used for monitoring is prepared.

Context
When NetCol5000-C(065, 080), NetCol5000-A050/A042/A035/A020/C030/C070/
C150, NetCol8000-A060/A120, or FusionCol8000-E220/E240/E400/C080/C210

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 81

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices

connects to the NetEco over Modbus TCP, connect cables by referring to this
section.

Procedure
Step 1 Connect one end of the network cable to the monitoring port on the smart
cooling product.
● For NetCol5000-C(065, 080), open the rear door, and connect one end of the
network cable to the FE port on the main control board of the smart cooling
product.

Figure 4-7 NetCol5000-C(065, 080) main control board

(1) Main control board

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 82

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices

Figure 4-8 Main control board

(1) FE port

● For NetCol5000-A020, open the front door, and connect one end of the
network cable to the FE port on the side of the smart cooling product LCD.

Figure 4-9 FE ports on the NetCol5000-A020

● For NetCol5000-A050, NetCol5000-A042, NetCol5000-A035, NetCol8000-

C070, NetCol8000-C150, NetCol8000-A060/A120, and FusionCol8000-E220/
E240/E400/C080/C210, open the rear door, and connect one end of the
network cable to the COM/FE port on the main control module of the smart
cooling product.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 83

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices

Figure 4-10 Main control module

(1) COM/FE port

Step 2 Connect the other end of the network cable to the Ethernet port on the LAN
switch.

----End

4.2.5 Connecting the UPS Monitoring Cable

4.2.5.1 Connecting the UPS2000-G/UPS2000-H Monitoring Cable (SNMP)

Prerequisites
A network cable used for monitoring is prepared.

Procedure
Step 1 Connect one end of a network cable to the Ethernet port on the SNMP card of the
UPS2000-G/UPS2000-H.

Figure 4-11 Ethernet port

(1) Ethernet port

Step 2 Connect the other end of the network cable to the Ethernet port on the LAN
switch.

----End

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 84

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices

4.2.5.2 Connecting the UPS5000-A Monitoring Cable

Prerequisites
A network cable used for monitoring is prepared.

Procedure
Step 1 Connect one end of a network cable to the FE port of the UPS5000-A.

Figure 4-12 UPS5000-A-30 kVA/40 kVA functional components and control signal
ports

(1) FE port

Figure 4-13 UPS5000-A-60 kVA/80 kVA/120 kVA functional components and

control signal ports

(1) FE port

Figure 4-14 FE port on the UPS monitoring module of the 300 kVA UPS and
models with higher capacities

(1) FE port

Step 2 Connect the other end of the network cable to the Ethernet port on the LAN
switch.

----End

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 85

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices

4.2.5.3 Connecting a Monitoring Cable to the UPS5000-E/UPS5000-H/

UPS5000-S

Prerequisites
A network cable used for monitoring is prepared.

Procedure
Step 1 Connect one end of a network cable to the FE port on the UPS5000-E/UPS5000-H/
UPS5000-S monitoring card.

Step 2 Connect the other end of the network cable to the Ethernet port on the LAN
switch.

----End

4.2.6 Connecting the SmartLi Monitoring Cable

Prerequisites
A network cable used for monitoring is prepared.

Procedure
Step 1 Connect one end of the network cable to the FE port on the monitoring interface
unit.

Figure 4-15 Monitoring interface unit of the SmartLi

(1) Monitoring interface unit

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 86

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices

Figure 4-16 FE port on the monitoring interface unit

Step 2 Connect the other end of the network cable to the Ethernet port on the LAN
switch.

----End

4.2.7 Connecting the PDU8000 Monitoring Cable

Prerequisites
A network cable used for monitoring is prepared.

Procedure
Step 1 Connect one end of the network cable to the FE port on the display panel of
PDU8000, as shown in Figure 4-17.

Figure 4-17 Connecting a monitoring cable to the PDU8000 (FE port)

(1) FE port

Step 2 Connect the other end of the network cable to the Ethernet port on the LAN
switch.

----End

4.2.8 Connecting a Monitoring Cable to the MTS9604B-

N20B1/MTS9606B-N20C2
Prerequisites
A network cable used for monitoring is prepared.

Procedure
Step 1 Connect one end of the network cable to the FE communications port on the
SMU02C in the MTS9604B-N20B1/MTS9606B-N20C2 cabinet.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 87

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices

Figure 4-18 FE communications port

Step 2 Connect the other end of the network cable to the Ethernet port on the LAN
switch.

----End

4.2.9 Connecting a Monitoring Cable to TP483000D/

TP482000B

Prerequisites
A network cable used for monitoring is prepared.

Procedure
Step 1 Connect one end of the network cable to the FE port on TP483000D/TP482000B.

Step 2 Connect the other end of the network cable to the Ethernet port on the LAN
switch.

----End

4.2.10 Connecting a Monitoring Cable to an iBOX

Prerequisites
A network cable used for monitoring is prepared.

Procedure
Step 1 Connect one end of the network cable to the PoE port on the iBOX.

Step 2 Connect the other end of the network cable to the Ethernet port on the LAN
switch.

----End

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 88

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices

4.3 Scenarios for Connecting the ECC800-Pro Outside

the Smart Module

4.3.1 Preparing a Monitoring Cable

Prerequisites
● A twisted pair, cord end terminal, and RJ45 connector are prepared.
● The following tools are prepared:
– Wire stripper
– Crimping tool
– RJ11 crimping tool
– Electrician's knife
– Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) insulation tape

Preparing a Cord End Terminal

Figure 4-19 shows how to prepare a cord end terminal.

Figure 4-19 Preparing a cord end terminal

Preparing the RS485 Monitoring Cable

Figure 4-20 shows how to prepare a cord end terminal for the ECC800-Pro
collector.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 89

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices

Figure 4-20 Preparing the RS485 monitoring cable for ECC800-Pro collector

Preparing a Dry Contact Monitoring Cable

The method of preparing a dry contact monitoring cable is similar to the method
of preparing the RS485 monitoring cable. Prepare cord end terminals on both ends
of each required core wire based on the number of dry contacts.

4.3.2 ECC800-Pro

4.3.2.1 Product Configuration

The ECC800-Pro data center controller is mainly used to monitor the devices and
environment in a data center. It consists of the power module and main control
module, which are pluggable.

You can configure the ECC800-Pro collector in the following two manners:

Configuration 1 (typical configuration): one power module and one main control
module

Configuration 2: two power modules and one main control module.

NOTE

● In configuration 1, install a filler panel in slot 2.

● In configuration 2, install power modules in slots 1 and 2.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 90

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices

Figure 4-21 ECC800-Pro collector in configuration 2

(1) Slot 1: power modules (2) Slot 2: power modules (3) Slot 3: main control
module

Table 4-9 ECC800-Pro environmental specifications

Item Specifications

Operating –20°C to +50°C

temperature

Storage temperature –40°C to +70°C

Relative humidity 5%–95% RH (non-condensing)

Altitude 0–4000 m (When the altitude is between 3000 m and

4000 m, the temperature decreases by 1°C for each
additional 200 m.)

Table 4-10 ECC800-Pro structural specifications

Item Specifications

Dimensions (L x W x H) 442 mm x 330 mm x 43.6 mm

Weight 7.5 kg (dual power supplies + main

control module)

Color Black

Installation requirements Can be installed in a 1 U space in a

standard 19-inch cabinet

Environmental protection RoHS5, REACH, WEEE

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 91

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices

Figure 4-22 ECC800-Pro (rear view)

(1) 53.5V DC_OUT1 (2) 53.5V DC_OUT2 (3) AC_INPUT1

(4) AC_INPUT2

Power Port
The ECC800-Pro provides four power ports, including two AC input ports
(AC_INPUT1 and AC_INPUT2) and two DC output ports (DC_OUT1 and
DC_OUT2). Table 4-11 provides the power port pin definitions.

Table 4-11 Power port pin definitions

Port Type Pin Description
sequence

AC Pin1 L

Pin2 PE

Pin3 N

DC Pin1 48V+

Pin2 48VGND

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 92

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices

4.3.2.2 Main Control Module

Figure 4-23 ECC800-Pro collector main control module

(1) USB (2) Status indicator (3) AIDI_1 (4) AIDI_2

(5) COM1/AIDI_4 (6) COM3/12V (7) WAN1 (8) LAN1/POE

(9) LAN2/POE (10) WAN2 (11) COM4/CAN (12) COM2/AIDI_5

(13) AIDI_3 (14) DO/12V (15) RF_Z (802.15.4) (16) WLAN (reserved)

(17) 4G (18) SW button

NOTE

The WLAN port is reserved and cannot be connected to a WLAN antenna for WLAN
communication.

Figure 4-24 ECC800-Pro main control module (side view)

(1) SIM card slot (2) Micro SD card slot (reserved)

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 93

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices

Specifications

Table 4-12 Technical specifications of the ECC800-Pro main control module

Item Specifications

Power input ● Supports one AC input or two AC inputs

● Rated voltage: 200–240 V AC
● Rated frequency: 50/60 Hz

Maximum 70W
power
consumption
of the main
control
module

Power output ● Output voltage: 42–58 V DC (rated voltage: 53.5 V DC)

● Output power of two power module supplies: 2000 W (200–
240 V AC); 940 W (linear derating at 85–175 V AC)
● Output power of a single power module supply: 1000 W
(200–240 V AC); 470 W (linear derating at 85–175 V AC)

WAN port ● Supports two WAN ports. WAN1 is used to connect to the
management system, and WAN2 is used for maintenance.
The ports support autonegotiation of 10/100/1000 Mbit/s
communication rates.
● Connect shielded network cables to the WAN ports.

LAN port ● Supports two LAN ports, which can be connected to the
LAN. The ports support autonegotiation of 10/100/1000
Mbit/s communication rates.
● Connect shielded network cables to the LAN ports.

RS485 serial ● Output voltage: 13–15 V DC (rated voltage: 14.5 V DC)

port ● Four RS485 ports with the default communications rate of
expansion 9600 bit/s
● COM1–COM3 ports provide 12 V DC power.
● The power supply can be switched on or off and is on by
default.

PoE expansion Supports two PoE (GE) ports for expansion of the PoE bus, and
supports network isolation and ring network.

AIDI ● Output voltage: 13–15 V DC (rated voltage: 14.5 V DC)

expansion ● Provides five universal AIDI ports for connecting to sensors
(RJ45) such as smoke sensors, water sensors, and NTC sensors.
AIDI_1 to AIDI_3 are full-function AIDI ports, and AIDI_4 to
AIDI_5 are simplified AIDI ports without type identification.
● The power supply can be switched on or off and is on by
default.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 94

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices

Item Specifications

DO expansion ● Output voltage: 13–15 V DC (rated voltage: 14.5 V DC)

(RJ45) ● Supports one active DO port.
● The power supply can be switched on or off and is on by
default.

Fault isolation There are three groups of 12 V ports. A group has a maximum
current of 660 mA, a route has a maximum current of 800 mA,
and the maximum total current is 2 A.
Group 1: AIDI_1 and DO/12V ports
Group 2: AIDI_2, COM1/AIDI_4, and COM3/12V ports
Group 3: AIDI_3 and COM2/AIDI_5 ports

Wireless Supports wireless communication that complies with

communicatio IEEE802.15.4.
n

4G Supports the 4G module, SMS sending, and 3G communication,

and provides a standard SIM card slot.
1. China: 2G and 4G networks support China Unicom or China
Mobile SIM cards, and 3G networks support only China
Unicom SIM cards.
2. Outside China: Select SIM cards according to the following
wireless modes and frequency bands:
● 4G: LTE-FDD, covering frequency bands B1, B3, B5, B7, B8
and B20; LTE-TDD, covering frequency bands B38, B40,
and B41
● 3G: WCDMA, covering frequency bands B1, B5, and B8
● 2G: GSM, covering frequency bands 900 MHz/1800 MHz
NOTE
● The prerequisite for using a SIM card is that the site has signal
coverage.
● Due to the performance limitation of the wireless module, China
Telecom SIM cards are not supported.

USB ● Supports USB 2.0 and 5 V, 1 A power supply.

● After installing the WiFi module, connect the WiFi module
to the ECC800-Pro using the app on the mobile phone or
pad to view the basic information about the smart module,
such as layout, resources, energy efficiency, environment,
and alarms.
● You can insert a USB flash drive to export historical data
and configuration files and import configuration files.

SW button ● Restores the default IP address, factory settings, and user

information.
● Supports RF_Z (802.15.4) networking.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 95

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices

Table 4-13 ECC800-Pro RF_Z parameters

Item Specifications

RF_Z operating 2405–2480 MHz

frequency

RF_Z EIRP (max.) 8 dBm

Table 4-14 ECC800-Pro 4G parameters

Item Specifications

Operating frequency ● 4G: LTE-FDD, covering frequency bands B1, B3, B5,
B7, B8 and B20; LTE-TDD, covering frequency bands
B38, B40, and B41
● 3G: WCDMA, covering frequency bands B1, B5, and
B8
● 2G: GSM, covering frequency bands 900 MHz/1800
MHz

EIRP (max.) 23 dBm

Communications Port
The ECC800-Pro provides the following communications ports. Figure 4-25 shows
the pins of the RJ45 port.

Figure 4-25 RJ45 port pins

There are four GE ports, that is, two WAN ports (WAN1 and WAN2) and two LAN
ports (LAN1/POE and LAN2/POE).

Table 4-15 GE port pin definitions

Item Description

Pin Pin1 GE1+

sequence
Pin2 GE1-

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 96

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices

Item Description

Pin3 GE2+

Pin4 GE3+

Pin5 GE3-

Pin6 GE2-

Pin7 GE4+

Pin8 GE4-

Indicator Green Linked, steady on

indicator

Yellow ACT data communication, blinking

indicator

Table 4-16 COM1/AIDI_4, COM2/AIDI_5 port pin definitions

Item Description

Pin Pin1 RS485+

sequence
Pin2 RS485-

Pin3 12V DC_OUT

Pin4 RS485+

Pin5 RS485-

Pin6 DI-

Pin7 DI+

Pin8 GND

Indicator Green Power output indicator

indicator ● Steady on: The 12 V DC output is normal.
● Off: No 12 V DC output is provided.

Table 4-17 COM3/12V port pin definitions

Item Description

Pin Pin1 RS485+

sequence
Pin2 RS485-

Pin3 12V DC_OUT

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 97

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices

Item Description

Pin4 RS485+

Pin5 RS485-

Pin6 -

Pin7 -

Pin8 GND

Indicator Green Power output indicator

indicator ● Steady on: The 12 V DC output is normal.
● Off: No 12 V DC output is provided.

Table 4-18 COM4/CAN port pin definitions

Item Description

Pin Pin1 RS485+

sequence
Pin2 RS485-

Pin3 -

Pin4 RS485+

Pin5 RS485-

Pin6 -

Pin7 CAN_H

Pin8 CAN_L

The following provides the AIDI_1, AIDI_2 and AIDI_3 ports pin definitions.

NOTE

● Pins 1, 2, 4, and 5 identify sensor types.

● Pin 3 and Pin 8 are power output ports.
● Pin 6 and Pin 7 collect sensor data. Pin 7 can detect current type sensors (4–20 mA). Pin
6 and Pin 7 can detect the output status of passive dry contact type sensors. Pin 3 and
Pin 7 can detect temperature sensors.

Table 4-19 AIDI_1, AIDI_2 and AIDI_3 ports pin definitions

Item Description

Pin Pin1 Type_1

sequence
Pin2 Type_2

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 98

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices

Item Description

Pin3 12V DC

Pin4 Type_3

Pin5 Type_4

Pin6 DI-

Pin7 DI+

Pin8 GND

Indicator Green Power output indicator

indicator ● Steady on: The 12 V DC output is normal.
● Off: No 12 V DC output is provided.

Table 4-20 DO/12V port pin definitions

Item Description

Pin Pin1 -
sequence
Pin2 -

Pin3 12V DC_OUT

Pin4 -

Pin5 -

Pin6 DO_OUT+

Pin7 DO_OUT-

Pin8 GND

Indicator Green Power output indicator

indicator ● Steady on: The 12 V DC output is normal.
● Off: No 12 V DC output is provided.

Table 4-21 USB port pin definitions

Item Description

Pin sequence Pin1 5V

Pin2 DM

Pin3 DP

Pin4 GND

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 99

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices

Indicators

Table 4-22 Indicators on the ECC800-Pro main control module

Indicator Color Name Status Description

RUN Green Running status Steady on The power supply is normal,

indicator the program is being loaded.

Off The power supply is

abnormal.

Blinking at The software runs properly

long (the indicator blinks at 0.5
intervals Hz, on for 1s and then off
for 1s) or the ECC800-Pro
registers with the NetEco
successfully.

Blinking at The ECC800-Pro does not

short register with the NetEco
intervals (the indicator blinks at 5 Hz,
on for 0.125s and then off
for 0.125s).

ALM Red Alarm indicator Steady on A system failure alarm is

generated.

Off The system is normal.

RF_Z Green Communication Blinking at A network is set up, and no

status indicator long node access is allowed (the
intervals indicator blinks at 0.5 Hz, on
for 1s and then off for 1s).

Blinking at A network is set up, and

super node access is allowed (the
short indicator blinks at 10 Hz, on
intervals for 0.05s and then off for
0.05s).

SW Button

Table 4-23 SW button description

Function Operation Description Indicator Status

Description

Wireless In non-wireless network (802.15.4) The RF_Z indicator is

network RF_Z pairing mode, press and hold the blinking at super
(802.15.4) button for 3s to 5s to enter the short intervals.
pairing wireless network pairing mode.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 100

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices

Function Operation Description Indicator Status

Description

In wireless network (802.15.4) The RF_Z indicator is

pairing mode, press and hold the blinking at long
button for 3s to 5s to exit the intervals.
pairing mode; or the system
automatically exits the pairing mode
after 30 minutes without pressing
the button.

Press and hold the button for more The RF_Z indicator is
than 8s to erase network blinking at super
parameters. The system short intervals.
automatically enters the wireless
network pairing mode.

WLAN enabling Press the button for less than 3s to None

enable WLAN.

Restoring the Press and hold down the button for None
default IP 1 minute.
address, factory
settings, and
user information

4.3.2.3 Power Module

Indicator

Table 4-24 PSU indicator description

Indicator Color Name Status Description

Green Power Steady on The converter has a power

indicator input.

Off The converter has no power

input or is faulty.

Blinking at The converter is being queried

long (the indicator blinks at 0.5 Hz,
intervals on for 1s and then off for 1s).

Blinking at The converter application

short program is being loaded (the
intervals indicator blinks at 4 Hz, on for
0.125s and then off for 0.125s).

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 101

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices

Indicator Color Name Status Description

Yellow Alarm Steady on The converter generates a

indicator forewarning indicating that
power will be limited due to
ambient overtemperature, or
generates a protection
shutdown alarm due to
ambient overtemperature or
undertemperature.

Power input overvoltage or

undervoltage protection

Reverse DC input connection

Slight current imbalance

Output overvoltage

Hibernation

Off The converter generates no

protection alarms.

Blinking at The communication between

long the converter and the outside is
intervals interrupted (the indicator blinks
at 0.5 Hz, on for 1s and then
off for 1s).

Red Fault Steady on The converter locks out due to

indicator output overvoltage.

The converter delivers no

output due to internal faults.

Off The converter is working

properly.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 102

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices

4.3.3 UIM20A Expansion Module

Figure 4-26 UIM20A expansion module front panel

(1) Indicators and button (2) COM1/AI/DI_1 - COM8/AI/ (3) POE

DI_8

Figure 4-27 UIM20A expansion module rear panel

(1) DIP switch (reserved) (2) COM_OUT (reserved) (3) COM_IN (reserved)

Table 4-25 UIM20A expansion module specifications

Item Specifications

Width 120 mm

Depth 200 mm

Height 43 mm

Operating –30°C to +65°C

temperature

Installation Installed in a 19-inch rack

requirement
s

Environmen RoHS5
tal
protection

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 103

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices

Specifications

Table 4-26 UIM20A technical specifications

Item Specifications

Power input Supports the RS485 or PoE power supply.

COM/AIDI (RJ45) ● Supports eight RS485 or AI/DI signal inputs.

● Can connect to sensors such as the smoke sensor, water
sensor, door status sensor, and infrared sensor.
● Each port can supply power. Two RJ45 ports share one
12 V DC power supply that is controlled independently.
The maximum output current is 900 mA when the
voltage is 12 V. (COM1/AIDI_1 and COM2/AIDI_2 form a
group, COM3/AIDI_3 and COM4/AIDI_4 form a group,
COM5/AIDI_5 and COM6/AIDI_6 form a group, and
COM7/AIDI_7 and COM8/AIDI_8 form a group).
● The 12 V DC power supply can be switched on or off
and is on by default.

POE Connects to the ECC800-Pro through the PoE port.

E-label 4.0 Supported

Communications Port
The following table describes the pin assignment for ports COM1/AIDI_1 to
COM8/AIDI_8.

Table 4-27 Pin assignment for ports COM1/AIDI_1 to COM8/AIDI_8

Item Description

Pin Pin1 RS485+

sequence
Pin2 RS485-

Pin3 12V

Pin4 RS485+

Pin5 RS485-

Pin6 D-

Pin7 D+

Pin8 GND

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 104

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices

The following table describes the pin assignments for the COM_IN and COM_OUT
ports.

Table 4-28 Pin assignment for the COM_IN and COM_OUT ports
Item Description

Pin Pin1 RS485+

sequence
Pin2 RS485-

Pin3 12 V (input power, supplying power to the module)

Pin4 RS485+

Pin5 RS485-

Pin6 -

Pin7 -

Pin8 GND

Indicators and Buttons

Table 4-29 UIM20A indicators

Indicator Status Description

RUN Steady A board application is being loaded.

on

Off The board is not running.

Blinking The ECC800-Pro is successfully registered, and the

at long software runs properly (blinking at long intervals (0.5
intervals Hz), on for 1s and then off for 1s).

Blinking The communication is interrupted or the ECC800-Pro is

at short unsuccessfully registered (blinking at 2.5 Hz, on for 0.2s
intervals and then off for 0.2s).

Blinking Blinking at super short intervals for 0.5s and then off for
0.5s; last 10s (blinking at super short intervals: 10 Hz,
on for 0.05s and then off for 0.05s)

ALM Steady A system fault alarm is raised.

on

Off The system is normal.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 105

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices

Table 4-30 BLINK button description

Function Operation Indicator Status

Description Description

Blinking Press the button for The RUN indicator blinks at super
less than 2s. short intervals for 0.5s and then off for
0.5s; last 10s (blinking at super short
intervals for 10 Hz, on for 0.05s and
then off for 0.05s).

4.3.4 Connecting a Monitoring Cable to the UIM20A

Expansion Module

Prerequisites
The RS485 monitoring cable is prepared.

Procedure
Step 1 Connect one end of the network cable to the POE port on the UIM20A expansion
module.

Step 2 Connect the other end of the network cable to the LAN port on the ECC800-Pro.
NOTE

If the COM or AI/DI ports on the ECC800-Pro-Pro are insufficient, you can connect devices to the
UIM20A expansion module.

----End

4.3.5 Connecting the Access Management System Cable

4.3.5.1 Connecting a Monitoring Cable to the A8802RS Access Controller

General Cable Connections to an Access Controller

● When connecting the door access system, you need to connect a door access
controller, an ECC800-Pro collector (or a UIM20A expansion module), a door
exit button, the fingerprint and card reader (with a keypad), card reader with
a keypad, single-door/double-door magnetic lock, and emergency door
release button.
● You can connect the fingerprint and card reader (with a keypad), card reader
with a keypad, and exit button to the CH1 or CH2 terminal on the left of the
access controller in the following figure, and connect the double-door and
single-door magnetic locks to the CH1 or CH2 terminal on the right of the
access controller in the following figure.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 106

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices

● The following figure uses the double-door access controller as an example to

illustrate the wiring method for the access control system. In this example, the
fingerprint and card reader (with a keypad) connects to the CH1 terminal on
the left of the access controller, the card reader with a keypad connects to the
CH2 terminal on the left of the access controller, the double-door magnetic
lock connects to the CH1 terminal on the right of the access controller, and
the single-door magnetic lock connects to the CH2 terminal on the right of
the access controller.

Figure 4-28 General cable connections for the access control system

NOTE

● Connect the RS485 ports on the access controller and the fingerprint and card reader (with a
keypad) respectively to any two of COM1 to COM4 ports on the ECC800-Pro collector.
● Fingerprint and card reader (with a keypad) refers to the fingerprint and card reader with a
keypad or the fingerprint and card reader.

Connecting Cables to the Exit Button

Figure 4-29 shows the cable connections to the access controller and exit button,
using the cord end terminal to crimp the cable.

Figure 4-29 Connecting cables to the exit button

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 107

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices

Connecting Cables to the Fingerprint and Card Reader with a Keypad

The following figure shows the cable connections to the access controller and
fingerprint and card reader with a keypad, using the cord end terminal to crimp
the cable.

Figure 4-30 Connecting cables to the fingerprint and card reader with a keypad

● Connect one end of the network cable to the female connector of the
fingerprint and card reader with a keypad. Strip the other end of the network
cable and connect it to the access controller terminal, as shown in the
preceding figure.
NOTE

If the network is non-standard, connect it by referring to the cable sequence in the

following table.

Table 4-31 Cable connections for the fingerprint and card reader with a
keypad
Conversion Cable Wire of the Network Access Controller
Cable Terminal

Red wire Pin3 R-12V

Green wire Pin4 R-D0

White wire Pin5 R-D1

Black wire Pin8 R-GND

● Connect one end of another network cable to the RS485 port on the
fingerprint and card reader with a keypad, and connect the other end of the
network cable to the non-energized COM port on the ECC800-Pro collector.
The following table shows the pin mapping for the RS485 port and the COM
port.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 108

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices

Table 4-32 Pin mapping for the RS485 port and the COM port
RS485 Port on Fingerprint and Card Reader COM Port on ECC800-
with a Keypad Pro Collector

Pin Definition Pin

Pin1 485A (brown) Pin1

Pin2 485B (gray) Pin2

Connecting Cables to the Card Reader with a Keypad

The following figure shows the cable connections to the access controller and card
reader with a keypad, using the cord end terminal to crimp the cable.

Figure 4-31 Connecting cables to the card reader with a keypad

Connecting Cables to the Single-Door Magnetic Lock, Double-Door

Magnetic Lock, and Emergency Door Release Button
● The double-door magnetic lock is delivered with eight cables. Connect the
cables to the double-door magnetic lock, as shown in Figure 4-32. Crimp the
cable on the access controller side using a cord end terminal.
● Figure 4-33 shows the cable connections to the access controller, single-door
magnetic lock, and emergency door release button. Crimp the cables using
cord end terminals.
NOTE

● The magnetic lock is delivered with a small white terminal. Cut off the white
terminal and then use a cord end terminal for crimping.
● The cable installation sequences shown in the following figure are for reference
only. If any differences exist between the wiring diagram and this figure, the wiring
diagram prevails.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 109

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices

Figure 4-32 Connecting cables to the double-door magnetic lock and

emergency door release button

Figure 4-33 Connecting cables to the single-door magnetic lock and

emergency door release button

Connecting the Power Cable to the Access Controller

The access controller is powered by 220 V power supply. The power module is
installed inside the access controller. The access controller can obtain power from
a power supply outside the equipment room.
Strip the cable, install the connector (BOM number: 14170096), and connect the
wires respectively to the L, N, and PE wiring terminals on the terminal block in the
access controller power module, as shown by (1) in Figure 4-34. Route the other
end of the cable along the cable trough inside the access controller and then out
of the cable outlet, and connect it to the power supply to receive power.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 110

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices

NOTE

Pay attention to the polarity when connecting cables.

Figure 4-34 Connecting cables to the access controller

(1) Connecting the power cable for the access (2) Connecting to the power supply, as
controller described in Table 4-33

Table 4-33 Power cable connection for the access controller

Power Supply Cable Connection

Power supply outside the equipment Install the connector (BOM number:
room 14170096) to the other end of the
power cable and connect the power
cable to a circuit breaker in the power
supply outside the equipment room.

Related Information

Table 4-34 Card reader and key terminal definition

Terminal Identity Definition

BT Key input

R-AL Card reader pry signal input

R-BP Control card reader buzzer

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 111

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices

Terminal Identity Definition

R-LED Control card reader LED lights

R-D1 Card reader data 1

R-D0 Card reader data 0

R-Gnd Card reader public ground

R-12V Reader power + 12 V

Table 4-35 Lock and door magnetic terminal definition

Terminal Identity Definition

LK+ Lock output power +

LK- Lock output power -/Passive output -

NP Passive output +

LKS Lock signal input +

ST Door magnetic signal input +

Gnd Common ground

Table 4-36 Alarm input terminal definition

Terminal Identity Definition

AL(1-2) Two-door controller, no power supply

output signal

Gnd Common ground

Table 4-37 Power terminal definition

Terminal Identity Definition

LK-P +12V Lock the power input

+ 12 V

GND Lock the power input -

BAT + Battery +

- Battery -

DC +12V Controller + 12 V DC
power input

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 112

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices

Terminal Identity Definition

GND Controller DC power

input-

AC 11V Controller AC power

input

Table 4-38 Indicator light definition

Terminal Identity Definition

P The controller power light, red

RUN Controller working indicator light,

white blue, flashing

LK(1-4) Lock status indicator light

Table 4-39 RS485 interface

Terminal Identity Definition

AL3(A8802RS) RS485-A

Gnd RS485-B

Table 4-40 Access control system cable list

BOM BOM Description Cable Position
Number

25030384 Electric Cable, 300V/500V, 60227 IEC Access controller power

53(RVV), 3x1mm2, Black(3Cores: cable
Brown, Blue, Yellow/Green), 10A,
Outdoor Cable, CCC, CE

25030641 Electric Cable, 300V, UL2464, Cable from the magnetic

4x20AWG, Black(4Cores: Yellow, lock to the access
Green, Violet, White), 9A, Non- controller
shielding Outdoor Cable, UL

25030393 Electric Cable, 300V/500V, 60227 IEC Cable from the emergency
53(RVV), 2x0.75mm2, Black(2Cores: door release button to the
Brown, Blue), 6A, Flat Outdoor Cable, access controller
CCC, CE

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 113

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices

BOM BOM Description Cable Position

Number

14180327 Terminal Block, 4-Pin, Screw Fixed,

24–12 AWG, Pitch 5.08 mm, Male and
Female Using Together, Only for
Power Supply

25031053 Electric Cable, 300V, UL2464, Cable from the card

7x20AWG, Black(7Cores: Red, Black, reader to the access
Yellow, Green, Orange, White, Blue), controller
9A, Non-shielding Cable, UL

14180327 Terminal Block, 4-Pin, Screw Fixed,

24–12 AWG, Pitch 5.08 mm, Male and
Female Using Together, Only for
Power Supply

25030393 Electric Cable, 300V/500V, 60227 IEC Cable from the door exit
53(RVV), 2x0.75mm2, Black(2Cores: button to the access
Brown, Blue), 6A, Flat Outdoor Cable, controller
CCC, CE

4.3.5.2 Connecting a Monitoring Cable to the Door Status Sensor

Prerequisites
A monitoring cable required is prepared.

Context
When connecting the door status sensor to an ECC800-Pro collector or a UIM20A
expansion module, you need to perform the following steps to prepare a special
monitoring cable.

Procedure
Step 1 Open the door status sensor, connect two cables, as shown in Figure 4-35.

Figure 4-35 Connecting a monitoring cable to the door status sensor

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 114

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices

Step 2 Prepare an RJ45 connector on one end of the network cable by following to the
instruction in 4.3.1 Preparing a Monitoring Cable.
Step 3 Connect the green core wire 6 and the brown-white core wire 7 to the cables
routed out from the door status sensor.
Step 4 Connect one end of the RJ45 network cable to the AI/DI port on the ECC800-Pro
collector.

----End

4.3.6 Connecting Cables to Sensors

4.3.6.1 Connecting Cables to Sensors

If the ECC800-Pro collector is connected to the following types of sensors, connect
cables to the devices by referring to Figure 4-36.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 115

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices

Figure 4-36 Wiring diagram for sensors

4.3.6.2 Connecting the Temperature Sensor Monitoring Cable

Prerequisites
The RS485 monitoring cable is prepared.

Procedure
Step 1 Connect the temperature sensor to the temperature and humidity sensor.
1. Connect one end of the network cable to the wiring port on the temperature
sensor.
2. Connect the other end of the network cable to the NTC1~3 or NTC4~6 port
on the temperature and humidity sensor.
Step 2 Connect the temperature and humidity sensor to the UIM20A expansion module.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 116

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices

1. Connect one end of the network cable to the RS485-OUT port on the
temperature and humidity sensor.
2. Connect the other end of the network cable to the COM1/AIDI_1, COM3/
AIDI_3, COM5/AIDI_5, or COM7/AIDI_7 port on the UIM20A expansion
module.
NOTE

– Temperature and humidity sensors can be cascaded through the RS485-IN and
RS485-OUT ports. A maximum of eight temperature and humidity sensors can be
cascaded.
– A maximum of four temperature and humidity sensors can be connected to the
UIM20A expansion module. Temperature and humidity sensors need to be
connected to the COM1/AIDI_1, COM3/AIDI_3, COM5/AIDI_5, and COM7/AIDI_7
ports on the UIM20A expansion module in sequence.

----End

4.3.6.3 Connecting a Monitoring Cable to the Hydrogen Detection System

Prerequisites
The RS485 monitoring cable is prepared.

Procedure
Step 1 Connect one end of a common network cable to the hydrogen detection system
RJ45 RS485 port.
Step 2 Connect the other end to the COM port on an ECC800-Pro collector or a UIM20A
expansion module.

----End

4.3.6.4 Connecting a Monitoring Cable to the Smoke Sensor

Prerequisites
A monitoring cable required is prepared.

Context
When connecting the smoke sensor and the ECC800-Pro collector or the UIM20A
expansion module, you need to perform the following steps to prepare a special
monitoring cable.

Procedure
Step 1 Prepare an RJ45 connector on one end of the network cable by following to the
instruction in Preparing a Monitoring Cable.
Step 2 Short-circuit core wires 1 and 8 on the other end of the network cable.
Step 3 Connect the core wires of the network cable to the cables for the smoke sensor,
based on the mappings in Table 4-41.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 117

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices

Table 4-41 Connecting cables to the smoke sensor

Core Wires of the Network Cable Cables for the Smoke Sensor

Core wire 1 (orange-white), core wire GND (black)

8 (brown)

Core wire 3 (green-white) +12 V (red)

Core wire 6 (green) Normally closed end (yellow)

Core wire 7 (brown-white) Common end (green)

None (reserved, cable connection not Normally opened end (blue)

required, only insulation required)

Step 4 Connect one end of the RJ45 network cable to the AI/DI port on the ECC800-Pro
collector or a UIM20A expansion module.

----End

4.3.6.5 Connecting a Monitoring Cable to a Temperature and Humidity

Sensor

Procedure
Step 1 Connect one end of the network cable to the pins of the temperature and
humidity sensor.
● Connect the T/H sensor (BOM number: 33010346) to the RS485 port.
● Connect the T/H sensor (BOM number: 02312PBL) to the RJ45 port.

Figure 4-37 Interface for the T/H sensor network cable

Table 4-42 Network cable wire sequence

PIN Definition

pin1 RS485 (A)

pin2 RS485 (B)

pin3 V+12V input

pin4 -

pin5 -

pin6 -

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 118

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices

PIN Definition

pin7 -

pin8 V-12V input

Step 2 Connect the other end of the network cable to the COM1/AIDI_1, COM3/AIDI_3,
COM5/AIDI_5, or COM7/AIDI_7 port on the UIM20A expansion module.

----End

4.3.6.6 Connecting a Monitoring Cable to the Region-type Water Sensor

Prerequisites
A monitoring cable is prepared.

Procedure
Step 1 Connect one end of the network cable to the Ethernet port on the water detector.

Step 2 Connect the other end of the network cable to the AI/DI port on the ECC800-Pro
collector or the UIM20A expansion module.

----End

4.3.6.7 Connecting a Monitoring Cable to the Location-type Water Sensor

Prerequisites
A network cable used for monitoring is prepared.

Procedure
Step 1 Connect one end of the network cable to the RJ45 port on the tie line.

Step 2 Connect the other end of the network cable to the live COM port on the ECC800-
Pro or the UIM20A expansion module.

----End

4.3.7 Connecting the Smart Cooling Product Monitoring Cable

4.3.7.1 Connecting the NetCol5000 Monitoring Cable

Prerequisites
A network cable used for monitoring is prepared.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 119

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices

Context
When NetCol5000-C(065, 080) or NetCol5000-A050/A042/A035/A025/A020/C030
connects to the NetEco over Modbus RTU, connect cables by referring to this
section.

Procedure
Step 1 Connect one end of the network cable to the communications port on the
NetCol5000 side panel.
● The COM port of NetCol5000-C(065, 080) is on the main control board at the
smart cooling product rear doors.

Figure 4-38 NetCol5000-C(065, 080) main control board

(1) Main control board

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 120

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices

Figure 4-39 COM ports

(1) COM1 port (2) COM2 port

NOTE

– When there is only one smart cooling product, it communicates with the ECC
collector over the COM1 port.
– If multiple smart cooling products are networked, connect the COM1 port on the
first smart cooling product to the COM port on the ECC collector, connect the
COM2 port on the first smart cooling product to the COM1 port on the second
smart cooling product, and connect the other smart cooling products in the same
way. A maximum of four smart cooling products can be networked.
● Both the COM ports of NetCol5000-A050, NetCol5000-A042, NetCol5000-
A035 and NetCol5000-A025 are on the main control modules at the smart
cooling product rear doors. The NetCol5000-A042 is used as an example to
show the position of the main control module.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 121

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices

Figure 4-40 NetCol5000-A042 main control module

(1) Main control module

Figure 4-41 COM port on the main control module

(1) COM port

● Open the smart cooling product rear door, remove the filter, and connect the
network cable to the communications port J73 on the main control module in
NetCol5000-A020/NetCol5000-C030.
NOTE

The following figure shows the pin sequence of the network cable that connects to the J73
communications port.

Figure 4-42 Pin sequence of a network cable

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 122

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices

Figure 4-43 NetCol5000-A020/NetCol5000-C030 communications port J73

(1) J73 (teamwork bus port and host monitoring port)

NOTICE

● The main control board can be Arm7 or M4. The appearance varies with the
model delivered.
● The Arm7 main control board has S1 and S2 DIP switches, and the M4 main
control board has only the S2 DIP switch. The S1 DIP switch needs to be set for
the Arm7 main control board and does not need to be set for the M4 main
control board.
● The Arm7 main control board uses the software of V100R001, and the M4
main control board uses the software of V100R002.
● You need to set only the seventh toggle switch based on teamwork
requirements and leave other toggle switches in their default status.

Figure 4-44 NetCol5000 main control board

(1) Teamwork communications port 1 (2) Teamwork communications port 2

(3) S1 DIP switch of the main control board (4) S2 DIP switch of the main control board

Table 4-43 Operations of the DIP switch

Toggle Default Value Operations

Switch

1 OFF Remaining in OFF

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 123

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices

Toggle Default Value Operations

Switch

2 OFF Remaining in OFF

3 ON Remaining in ON

4 ON Remaining in ON

5 OFF Remaining in OFF

6 ON Remaining in ON

7 OFF ● Not in teamwork mode: Remaining in OFF

● In teamwork mode: Set toggle switch 7 on the
main control boards of the first and last smart
cooling products to ON, and toggle switch 7
on the main control boards of the other smart
cooling products to OFF.

8 ON Remaining in ON

Step 2 Connect the other end of the network cable to the COM port on the ECC800-Pro
collector or the UIM20A expansion module.

----End

4.3.7.2 Connecting the NetCol8000 Monitoring Cable

Prerequisites
A network cable used for monitoring is prepared.

Context
● When NetCol8000-C070/C150, NetCol8000-A050/A060/A100/A120, or
FusionCol8000-E220/E240/E400/C080/C210 connects to the NetEco over
Modbus RTU, connect cables by referring to this section.
● The following figure shows the pin sequence of the network cable.

Figure 4-45 Pin sequence of a network cable

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 124

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices

Procedure
Step 1 Connect one end of the network cable to the monitoring port on the smart
cooling product.
● For NetCol8000-A050/A100/C070/C150, open the front door of the cabinet
and connect one end of the network cable to teamwork communications port
1 or 2 on the main control board of the cabinet.

Figure 4-46 Main control board of the NetCol8000-A050

(1) Main control board

Figure 4-47 Main control board of the NetCol8000-A100

(1) Main control board

Figure 4-48 Main control board of the NetCol8000-C070

(1) Main control board

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 125

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices

Figure 4-49 Main control board of the NetCol8000-C150

(1) Main control board

NOTICE

● The main control board can be Arm7 or M4. The appearance varies with the
model delivered.
● The Arm7 main control board has S1 and S2 DIP switches, and the M4 main
control board has only the S2 DIP switch. The S1 DIP switch needs to be set for
the Arm7 main control board and does not need to be set for the M4 main
control board.
● The Arm7 main control board uses the software of V100R001, and the M4
main control board uses the software of V100R002.
● You need to set only the seventh toggle switch based on teamwork
requirements and leave other toggle switches in their default status.

Figure 4-50 NetCol8000 main control board

(1) Teamwork communications port 1 (2) Teamwork communications port 2

(3) S1 DIP switch of the main control board (4) S2 DIP switch of the main control board

Table 4-44 Operations of the DIP switch

Toggle Default Operations

Switch Value

1 OFF Remaining in OFF

2 OFF Remaining in OFF

3 ON Remaining in ON

4 ON Remaining in ON

5 OFF Remaining in OFF

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 126

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices

Toggle Default Operations

Switch Value

6 ON Remaining in ON

7 OFF ● Not in teamwork mode: Remaining in OFF

● In teamwork mode: Set toggle switch 7 on
the main control boards of the first and last
smart cooling products to ON, and toggle
switch 7 on the main control boards of the
other smart cooling products to OFF.

8 ON Remaining in ON

● For NetCol8000-A060/A120 or FusionCol8000-E220/E240/E400/C080/C210,

open the rear door and connect one end of the network cable to the COM/FE
port on the main control module of the smart cooling product.

Figure 4-51 Main control module

(1) COM/FE port

Step 2 Connect the other end of the network cable to the COM port on the ECC800-Pro
collector or the UIM20A expansion module.

----End

4.3.8 Connecting a Monitoring Cable to a Chiller

Prerequisites
A network cable used for monitoring is prepared.

Procedure
Step 1 Connect one end of the network cable to the COM port on the chiller.
Step 2 Connect the other end of the network cable to the COM port on the ECC800-Pro
collector or the UIM20A expansion module.

----End

4.3.9 Connecting the UPS Monitoring Cable

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 127

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices

4.3.9.1 Connecting a Monitoring Cable to the UPS2000-G (Modbus)

Prerequisites
A network cable used for monitoring is prepared.

Procedure
Step 1 Connect one end of the network cable to the COM_1 or COM_2 port on the
Modbus expansion card of the UPS2000-G.

Figure 4-52 RS485 port

(1) COM1 port (RS485 supported) (2) COM2 port (RS485 supported)

Step 2 Connect the other end of the network cable to the COM port on the ECC800-Pro
collector or the UIM20A expansion module.

----End

4.3.9.2 Connecting a Monitoring Cable to the UPS5000-A

Prerequisites
A network cable used for monitoring is prepared.

Procedure
Step 1 Connect one end of a network cable to the COM port of the UPS5000-A.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 128

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices

Figure 4-53 UPS5000-A-30 kVA/40 kVA functional components and control signal
ports

(1) COM port

Figure 4-54 UPS5000-A-60 kVA/80 kVA/120 kVA functional components and

control signal ports

(1) COM port

Figure 4-55 COM port on the UPS monitoring module of the 300 kVA UPS and
models with higher capacities

(1) COM port

Step 2 Connect one end of the network cable to the COM port on the ECC800-Pro
collector or the UIM20A expansion module.

----End

4.3.9.3 Connecting a Monitoring Cable to the UPS5000-E/UPS5000-S

Prerequisites
A network cable used for monitoring is prepared.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 129

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices

Procedure
Step 1 Connect one end of a network cable to the FE port on the UPS5000-E/UPS5000-S
monitoring module.
Step 2 Connect the other end of the network cable to the COM port on the ECC800-Pro
collector or the UIM20A expansion module.

----End

4.3.10 Connecting the PDC Monitoring Cable

4.3.10.1 Connecting the PDU8000 Monitoring Cable

Prerequisites
A network cable used for monitoring is prepared.

Procedure
Step 1 Connect one end of the network cable to the COM port in the display panel of
PDU8000.

Figure 4-56 Connecting the PDU8000 monitoring cable (COM port)

(1) COM port

Step 2 Connect the other end of the network cable to the COM port on the ECC800-Pro
collector or the UIM20A expansion module.

----End

4.3.10.2 Connecting a Monitoring Cable to the Monitoring Type-

PDU2000-32-1PH-20/4-M1

Prerequisites
A network cable used for monitoring is prepared.

Procedure
Step 1 Connect one end of the network cable to the COM1 port or the COM2 port on the
PDU2000.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 130

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices

Figure 4-57 PDU2000 ports

Step 2 Connect the other end of the network cable to the COM port on the ECC800-Pro
collector or the UIM20A expansion module.
Step 3 (Optional) If multiple PDU2000s need to be cascaded, connect the COM1 or
COM2 port of one PDU2000 to the COM1 or COM2 port on the next PDU2000.
NOTE

A maximum of four PDU2000s can be cascaded.

----End

4.3.10.3 Connecting a Monitoring Cable to an HPXPDU2000-16-3PH-24-6-M1

Prerequisites
A network cable used for monitoring is prepared.

Procedure
Step 1 Connect the monitoring cable.
1. Connect one end of the network cable to port COM1 or COM2 on the
PDU2000. Figure 4-58 shows the ports on the PDU2000.

Figure 4-58 PDU2000 ports

2. Connect the other end of the network cable to the COM port on the ECC800-
Pro collector or the UIM20A expansion module.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 131

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices

Step 2 (Optional) Connect PDU2000 cascading cables. Use a common network cable to
connect port COM1 or COM2 on the PDU2000 to port COM1 or COM2 on another
PDU2000.
NOTE

● A maximum of four PDU2000s can be cascaded.

● If PDU2000s are cascaded, you need to connect only one PDU2000 to the ECC800-Pro
collector.

----End

4.3.11 Connecting the Fresh Air Unit Monitoring Cable

4.3.11.1 Connecting a Monitoring Cable to the Fresh Air Unit

Prerequisites
A network cable used for monitoring is prepared.

Procedure
Step 1 Connect core wires 1 (orange-white) and 2 (orange) at one end of the network
cable to pins 81 and 83 of the fresh air unit controller respectively.
NOTE

Pin 81 is defined as RS485+, and pin 83 is defined as RS485–.

Figure 4-59 Positions of pins 81 and 83

Step 2 Connect the other end of the network cable to the COM port on the ECC800-Pro
collector or the UIM20A expansion module.

----End

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 132

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices

4.4 Scenarios for Connecting the ECC800-Pro in the

Smart Module

4.4.1 Connecting a Monitoring Cable to the ECC800-Pro

Collector
Procedure
Step 1 For details about how to connect monitoring cables to the ECC800-Pro, see the
Smart Modular Data Center Management System Wiring Diagram.
NOTE

The onsite wiring diagram of the management system prevails. The method described in
this section is for reference only.

----End

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 133

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 5 Checking the Installation

5 Checking the Installation

5.1 Checking the Installation of the Cabinet

SN Check Item

1 The cabinet is placed as designed.

2 The rack is secure and reliable and meets the anti-seismic requirements.
The horizontal and vertical differences do not exceed 3 mm. You can use
a horizontal ruler and a lead ruler to measure the differences.

3 If the cabinet is placed on an ESD floor, all the expansion bolts of the
supports are secure with the floor; the installation sequence of the
insulation washers, flat washers, spring washers, and nuts (bolts) are
correct; the installation holes of the supports are secure with the
expansion bolts. The supports are insulated from the floor and guide
rails. The resistance of all the insulated points between the supports and
cabinets measured by the MΩ level of the multimeter is greater than 5
MΩ.

4 All the screws are secure; a flat washer and a spring washer are installed
for each screw; the washers are properly placed.

5 The cabinets are arranged in order. The cabinet queue at both sides of
the passage is straight, and the difference does not exceed 5 mm.

6 The connecting plates are installed properly when two cabinets are
deployed on one site.

7 The front, side, and rear doors of the cabinets are installed. The front and
rear doors can be opened and closed. The door locks function normally.

8 The exteriors and interiors of the cabinets (including the front door, rear
door, and sides of each cabinet) are clean. No dirt, damage, or
fingerprint is allowed.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 134

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 5 Checking the Installation

SN Check Item

9 All the outlets or inlets of the cabinets are sealed. The gap around a
cover plate does not exceed the width of the cover plate. If a bag is used,
the opening of the bag is tied up. The sizes of the outlets that use
plastics are appropriate. You can use other appropriate, insulated, or
flame-resistant materials to seal the outlets.

10 There are excessive hair bands, lines, and other wastes.

11 All the configured filler panels are installed.

12 The ESD wrist strap is inserted into the ESD installation hole.

13 The cabinet labels are smooth and tidy.

5.2 Checking the Installation of Components in the

Cabinet
SN Check Item

1 The devices are installed in the correct positions as designed.

2 All the panel screws of the devices are installed and secure.

3 The panel and exterior of each device are not dirty, and the paint is not
scraped off.

4 The labels (coating of the subrack, plate nameplate, transport label, and
product nameplate) of each device are not peeled off.

5 The bar code of each device is not peeled off.

6 The ejector lever of each board is placed in position.

7 The captive screws of each board are secure.

8 There is no vacant slot in the subrack, and filler panels are installed in
vacant slots.

9 A protective cover is installed for the power module if the power module
is configured with a protective cover.

5.3 Checking the Installation of Power Cables and

Ground Cables

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 135

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 5 Checking the Installation

SN Check Item

1 All the power cables and ground cables are copper-core cables.

2 There are no solder joints or connectors in power cables and ground

cables.

3 The extra length of power cables or ground cables is truncated and the
cables are not coiled.

4 There is no breaking equipment such as switches and fuses in the

electrical connection of the grounding system.

5 The ground bars and PGND bars are connected to one grounding
conductor.

6 The OT terminals at both ends of the power cables or ground cables are
crimped securely.

7 The bare wires and OT terminals at the wiring terminals are tightly
wrapped up with PVC insulation tapes or heat shrink tubing.

8 The power cables and ground cables connecting the PDB with each
device, and the ground cables connecting each device with the PGND
busbar of the cabinet are all correctly installed and have good contact.

9 The power cables and ground cables are bound separately from other
cables.

10 Labels are attached at both ends of the power cables and ground cables.

11 The plastic cover plate on the top of wiring terminals of the PDB is
properly installed.

5.4 Checking the Connection of Signal Cables

SN Check Item

1 There are no solder joints or connectors in signal cables. The signal

cables are not scratched or broken.

2 The connectors of signal cables are tight and secure.

3 Proper length of the cable is reserved at the connectors.

4 Proper length is reserved for signal cables at turning points. The turning
radius meets the requirement.

5 The optical fibers must be sheathed using corrugated pipes at outsides of

cabinets. Both ends of the pipes must be fastened. The edges are smooth
or be processed for cutting prevention.

6 No other cables are laid on optical fibers.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 136

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 5 Checking the Installation

SN Check Item

7 The extra optical cables are coiled on the cable coiler at the rear of the
cabinet.

8 The signal cables connected to the left part of the subrack are led out of
the subrack from the left. Similarly, the signal cables connected to the
right part of the subrack are led out of the subrack from the right.

9 The signal cables are bound separately from the power cables. The signal
cables are bound and arranged neatly and closely. The cable ties are
spaced evenly. The tips of the cable ties point to the same direction.

10 The extra length of the cable ties must be cut and the cut surface must
be smooth.

11 The cables whose connectors are far away from the cable entrance are
arranged at the external side of the cable bundle, while those near the
entrance are arranged at the internal side of the cable bundle. The trunk
cables are laid out smoothly without any tangling.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 137

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 6 Adding Devices

6 Adding Devices

6.1 Performing Basic Operations Before Adding Devices

Software installation and commissioning are required before the device
commissioning, collector commissioning, and NetEco commissioning. For details,
see "Software Installation and Commissioning" in iMaster NetEco Product
Documentation (DC) (V600R021C10_xx).

6.1.1 IP Address Preinstallation Planning

The IP address must be in compliance with the following requirements:
● The static IP address must be used.
● The IP address must be unique on the live network.
● You can plan only one IP address for one network interface. It is not allowed
to plan or set multiple IP addresses for the same network interface.
● The NetEco server can communicate with managed devices.
● The NetEco server can communicate with Web clients.
NOTE

The subnet mask of all IP addresses is 255.255.255.0.

Table 6-1 IP address list

Item Preinstallation Setting Description

Server IP 192.168.8.11 Used for logging in to the NetEco and

address PowerEcho.

6.1.2 Obtaining the NetEco Software License

The NetEco software license is not provided together with software to the
customer. Therefore, obtain the NetEco software license in advance.
Obtain the license from the Huawei's enterprise support website.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 138

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 6 Adding Devices

● For enterprise users:

a. Log in to Huawei's enterprise support website https://
support.huawei.com/enterprise.
b. Browse or search for iMaster NetEco License Application Guide, and
apply for the license of the NetEco software by referring to the guide.
● For carriers:
a. Log in to Huawei's carrier support website https://support.huawei.com.
b. Browse or search for iMaster NetEco License Application Guide, and
apply for the license of the NetEco software by referring to the guide.

6.1.3 Obtaining the Adapter Software Installation Packages

Obtaining the Adapter Software Installation Packages
This section describes how to obtain the adapter software installation package.
● For enterprise users:
a. Log in to the iMaster NetEco Huawei enterprise technical support
website.
b. Obtain the iMaster NetEco V600R021C10SPCXXX ReleaseDoc_EN
(Data Center).zip and DP_V600R021C10SPCXXX_XXAdapters.zip
packages, decompress the packages, and search for the adapter software
installation package in the DP_V600R021C10SPCXXX_XXAdapters based
on the NE types and versions in the iMaster NetEco V600R021 Version
Mapping (Data Center).
● For carriers:
a. Log in to the iMaster NetEco Huawei technical support website.
b. Obtain the iMaster NetEco V600R021C10SPCXXX ReleaseDoc_EN
(Data Center).zip and DP_V600R021C10SPCXXX_XXAdapters.zip
packages, decompress the packages, and search for the adapter software
installation package in the DP_V600R021C10SPCXXX_XXAdapters based
on the NE types and versions in the iMaster NetEco V600R021 Version
Mapping (Data Center).
On the Software tab page, download the NetEco software and digital signature
files.

Verifying Software Packages

To prevent software packages from being maliciously tampered with during
transmission or storage, you need to download the corresponding signature file
during the software package download for integrity verification.
After the software package is downloaded, verify its PGP digital signature
according to the OpenPGP Signature Verification Guide. If the software package
fails to pass the verification, do not use the software package and contact Huawei
technical support.
Before a software package is used in installation, its digital signature also needs to
be verified according to the OpenPGP Signature Verification Guide to ensure that
the software package is not tampered with.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 139

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 6 Adding Devices

● For carrier users, visit https://support.huawei.com/carrier/

digitalSignatureAction.
● For enterprise users, visit https://support.huawei.com/enterprise/zh/tool/
pgp-verify-TL1000000054..

6.1.4 Powering On a Server

This topic describes how to power on a server.

Procedure
Step 1 Check that the power cables and ground cables of the upstream components of
the server are securely connected with correct polarity and in good contact.
Step 2 Ensure that the upstream input power supply is not connected. Use a multimeter
to measure the resistance between the upstream output power supplies and
between the working ground and the protection ground. It is required that a short
circuit not occur between output power supplies or between the working ground
and the protection ground.
Step 3 Turn on the switch for the upstream power supply of the server.
Step 4 Press the power button on the chassis of the server to power on the server.
NOTE

After the server is started properly, the button/indicator of its power switch is displayed
green.

Figure 6-1 Power button on the 2288X V5 server

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 140

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 6 Adding Devices

Figure 6-2 TaiShan 200 server power button

----End

6.1.5 Logging In to the NetEco Client

This section describes how to log in to the NetEco client using a web browser.

Prerequisites
● The network connection between your PC and the client IP address of the
NetEco is normal and the function of the O&M plane are running properly.
● You have obtained the user name and password for login.

Procedure
Step 1 In the browser address box, enter https://IP address of the NetEco server:31943,
and then press Enter.
NOTE

● 192.168.8.11 is the default IP address of the NetEco.

● Latest Chrome (Stable Channel) and Firefox (ESR Release) are recommended.
● You are advised to set the display resolution as 1920 x 1080 or higher.
● Make sure that the IP address of the NetEco server is not contained in the compatibility view
website.

Step 2 Enter the User Name, Password, and click Login.

NOTE

● The preset user of NetEco is admin, the preset password is Changeme_123. This user
has all the operation rights on the managed objects. After the first login, change the
password in time to ensure account security and prevent unauthorized network attacks,
such as data tampering. Huawei will not be liable for any security issues caused by your
failure to change the preset password in time or password loss after changing.
● If the number of online users reaches the maximum number supported by the system, a
message is displayed, indicating that you cannot log in. In this case, contact the system
administrator.
● After you enter the incorrect password for three consecutive times, you must enter the
verification code upon the fourth login. After you enter the incorrect password for five
consecutive times, the user account or the IP address is locked for 10 minutes.

----End

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 141

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 6 Adding Devices

6.1.6 Loading the NetEco Software License

The NetEco license file is used to control the functions and management
capabilities of the NetEco. Before using NetEco, you need to load a commercial
license.

Prerequisites
● You have obtained a license.
● You have logged in to the NetEco client using a web browser.

Procedure
Step 1 Click Import License file when you log in to the NetEco at the first time.

Step 2 Click next to the License text box and select a license file.

Step 3 Click Upload.

The information about the imported license file is displayed.

Step 4 Click Apply.

----End

6.1.7 Installing NE Adapters

Install the NE adapters on the NetEco.

Prerequisites
You have obtained the adapter software installation packages.

Procedure
1. Choose Device Management > Configuration > Device Integration.
2. In the navigation tree on the left, choose Adapter Management and click
Upload.
3. On the page that is displayed, click + to select the file to be uploaded.
4. Click Upload to upload the files.
5. Select the NE adapter packages to be installed on the Adapter Management
page, and click Install. Then, click Yes in the displayed dialog box.
The time required for the installation is related to the number of adapters.
Wait for the installation to complete.

6.1.8 Adding a Management Domain

6.1.8.1 General Operation: Adding a Management Domain

This section describes how to create a management domain.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 142

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 6 Adding Devices

Prerequisites
The management domain adapter has been preconfigured or installed.

Context
● The management domains include Park, Building, Room, ContainerDC,
Subnet, NetecoSite, FusionModule500, Modular, Room-ShapeNode, and
Building-ShapeNode. You are advised to plan the subordinate relationship
between management domains and devices before performing operations.
● The NetEco is preconfigured with management domains such as cabinets,
battery cabinets, buildings, containers, floors, FusionModule500, smart
modules, NetEco sites, parks, PDUs, equipment rooms, and subnets. To use
more management domains, you need to install the corresponding adapter
software package on the NetEco.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the NetEco client.

Step 2 On the main menu, choose Device Management > Configuration > Planning
Configuration.

Step 3 Choose the upper-layer node of the management domain to be added in the
navigation tree on the left.

Step 4 In the Domain area on the lower left of the page, drag a management domain
icon to the required position in the planning configuration area.
NOTE

You can adjust the shape of Room, Room–ShapeNode, Building–ShapeNode, Floor–

ShapeNode, Container–ShapeNode, and NetecoSite by:
1. Hold down Shift and click the frame to add a yellow dot.
2. Click and move the yellow dot to design an irregular polygon.

3. To delete a management domain, click the domain icon and select Delete under .

Step 5 In the right side of the view area, set Management Info.
NOTE

You can configure Management Info, Electricity Info, and Refrigeration Info for the
equipment room management domain.

Step 6 Click on the toolbar to save the settings.

Step 7 Repeat steps Step 3 to Step 6 until the configuration is complete.

----End

6.1.8.2 Example: Adding a Smart Module

This section describes how to create a module in the root node, subnet, equipment
room, container, or site management domain.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 143

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 6 Adding Devices

Prerequisites
You have created management domains in Planning Configuration.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the NetEco client.
Step 2 On the main menu, choose Device Management > Configuration > Planning
Configuration.
Step 3 Choose the management domain where you want to add a smart module from
the navigation tree on the left.
Step 4 In the Domain area on the lower left of the page, select Modular from the drop-
down list box.
Step 5 Select the Modular to be added and drag the modular icon to the management
domain area.

Figure 6-3 Adding the smart module in the room area

Step 6 Modify Management Info of the smart module as required or retain the default
values.

Step 7 Click on the toolbar to save the settings.

----End

Follow-up Procedure
Perform the following operations on the Planning Configuration page as
required.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 144

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 6 Adding Devices

Related Procedure
Operatio
ns

Delete You can delete one module or multiple modules in batches on the
modules current page.
NOTE
If a module contains subdevices, you cannot delete it. You can delete the
module only after you delete subdevices in the module.
● Delete one module.
1. Right-click Modular and click Delete under .
2. In the displayed Confirm dialog box, click Yes.
● Delete multiple modules in batches.

1. Click on the toolbar. The Batch Delete dialog box is

displayed.

Figure 6-4 Deleting multiple modules in batches

2. In the filter box, set filter criteria to filter required modules.

3. Select the smart module to be deleted and click Delete.
4. In the displayed Confirm dialog box, click Yes.

Add tools 1. Select the module for which you want to add a pillar.
2. In the lower-left corner of the current page, click Tool.
3. Select the Pillar component to be added and drag it to the
planning configuration area.
NOTE
After the component is added, you can set attributes for the component
in the Component Info list in the right pane. The system automatically
displays values for Parent Name and Control Type, and you do not need
to manually set them, you only need to set Name.

4. In the upper area of the current page, click .

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 145

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 6 Adding Devices

6.1.8.3 Example: Adding a Container

This section describes how to create a module in the root node, subnet, equipment
room, container, or site management domain.

Prerequisites
You have created management domains in Planning Configuration.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the NetEco client.
Step 2 On the main menu, choose Device Management > Configuration > Planning
Configuration.
Step 3 Choose the management domain where you want to add a container from the
navigation tree on the left.
Step 4 In the Domain area on the lower left of the page, select Container from the drop-
down list box.
Step 5 Select the Container to be added and drag the modular icon to the management
domain area.
Step 6 Modify Management Info of the container as required or retain the default
values.

Step 7 Click on the toolbar to save the settings.

----End

Follow-up Procedure
Perform the following operations on the Planning Configuration page as
required.
Operation Description

Adding a text 1. Select the management domain to which you want to add
a text comment.
2. In the lower-left corner of the current page, click Tool and
choose the text tool.
3. You can select the text style, font size, color, and text
background in the Component Info area on the right.

4. In the upper area of the current page, click .

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 146

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 6 Adding Devices

Operation Description

Deleting a You can delete one container or multiple containers in

container batches on the current page.
NOTE
If a container contains subdevices, you cannot delete it. You can
delete the container only after you delete subdevices in the
container.
● Delete one container.
1. Select a container and click Delete under .
2. In the displayed Confirm dialog box, click Yes.
● Delete multiple containers in batches.
1. Click on the toolbar.
2. Add filter conditions, select multiple containers, and
click Delete.
3. In the displayed Confirm dialog box, click Yes.

6.1.9 Adding Devices

This section describes the process of adding devices.

Prerequisites
You have the operation rights for Planning Configuration.

Procedure
1. Log in to the NetEco client.
2. On the main menu, choose Device Management > Configuration >
Planning Configuration.

3. In area 1, select the management domain to which the device to be added

belongs.
4. In area 2, click the Device tab, select a device type from the drop-down list
box, and select the device to be added.
5. Drag the selected device icon to area 3.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 147

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 6 Adding Devices

6. In area 5, set device parameters.

7. In area 6, click to save the settings.

6.2 Scenarios for Connecting the ECC800-Pro in the

Smart Module

6.2.1 Commissioning Southbound Devices of the ECC800-Pro

For details, see the commissioning documents of solutions such as
FusionModule500/FusionModule800/FusionModule1000/FusionModule2000.

6.2.2 Adding a Smart U Space Manager

6.2.2.1 Commissioning the Smart U Space Manager on the ECC800-Pro

WebUI

Prerequisites
● Connect the smart U space manager to the COM port on the UIM20A
expansion module.
NOTE

● In a standard scenario, connect a smart U space manager to the COM6/AIDI_6 port

on the UIM20A expansion module.
● In a scenario where one UIM20A expansion module maps to four cabinets, connect
smart U space managers to the COM1/AIDI_1, COM3/AIDI_3, COM5/AIDI_5, and
COM7/AIDI_7 ports on the UIM20A expansion module. If the number of IT cabinets
is not an integer multiple of 4, according to the cable connection rules, leave the
unconnected COM ports on the UIM20A expansion module idle.
● The smart U space manager has been connected to the ECC800-Pro through
automatic discovery.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI as an administrator.
Step 2 View the position of the smart U space manager.
1. Choose Monitoring > Cabinet > IT Cabinet n > Smart U Space Manager.
2. Select Running Control and click Blink. In the actual environment, you will
see that the smart U space manager blinks to ensure that the device location
in the view is consistent with that in the smart module.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 148

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 6 Adding Devices

Figure 6-5 Viewing the position of the smart U space manager

----End

6.2.2.2 Adding Asset Information on the NetEco

Asset information needs to be added to help users comprehensively understand
the status of assets such as IT assets and infrastructure, ensure that asset changes
are controllable, and provide accurate basic data for capacity management.

Prerequisites
● You have the operation rights for Asset Account.
● You have the operation rights for Model Library and Manufacturer.
● You have the operation rights for Planning Configuration.
● On the Planning Configuration page, you have created a management
domain for the assets to be registered.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the NetEco client.

Step 2 Activate the device template.

1. Choose Operation Management > Asset Management> Asset
Configuration from the main menu.
2. In the navigation tree on the left, choose Model > Model Library.
3. Click Activate Template. The Import dialog box is displayed.
4. Select the device template to be imported and click Ok.

Step 3 Add asset information.

1. Choose Operation Management > Asset Management> Asset Inventory
from the main menu.
2. Click Import. The Import dialog box is displayed.
NOTE

On the Asset Inventory page, you can click New Device and specify the asset
information to register a single asset.
3. In the Import dialog box, click Asset registration template.xls to download
the template.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 149

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 6 Adding Devices

Figure 6-6 Batch import

4. Open the template and specify asset information.

– If an asset is located in a cabinet, you must specify the name,
manufacturer, model, asset location, and start U.
– If an asset is located in a management domain that is not a cabinet, you
must specify the name, manufacturer, model, and asset location. Asset
label, serial numbers, and asset numbers are optional.

5. In the Import dialog box, click , select the edited template, and click
Upload.
6. When the message indicating that the uploading is successful is displayed,
click Close.

Step 4 View the registered assets.

1. After assets are registered, you can view the assets on the Asset Inventory
page.
2. Enter any information about registered assets and click Search to search for
assets.

Figure 6-7 Viewing registered assets

----End

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 150

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 6 Adding Devices

6.2.3 iCooling Energy Management

6.2.3.1 Setting Cooling Management Parameters on the ECC800-Pro WebUI

The cooling capacity of the chilled water smart cooling products in the smart
module can be managed by collecting the running parameters of the chilled water
smart cooling products and using the smart module electricity management
function.

Prerequisites
● The communication between the NetEco and the ChillerPlantControl device
connected to the LAN switch is normal.
● The NetEco communicates properly with the ECC800-Pro and the smart
cooling product connected to the ECC800-Pro.
● Power management has been configured for the smart cooling product
connected to the ECC800-Pro, and the IT cabinet power statistics are correct.
● The number of smart cooling products (number of started smart cooling
products) with the valid maximum cooling capacity received by the ECC800-
Pro is greater than or equal to the Number of running smart cooling
products in this group in Teamwork settings of smart cooling products.
----End

Context
After the smart cooling product is successfully connected to the ECC800-Pro, the
cooling capacity management function is enabled by default.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI as an administrator.
Step 2 Choose Monitoring > Cooling > Running Parameters to access the Temperature
and Humidity Parameters page. Set Local yearly highest temperature as
required and click Submit.
Step 3 Choose Monitoring > Cooling > Running Parameters to access the Running
Parameters page. Set Number of redundant smart cooling products and Local
yearly highest temperature as required and tap Submit.

Figure 6-8 Setting running parameters

Step 4 Choose Monitoring > Cooling > Running Parameters. In the Cooling Capacity
Management area, set the parameters related to cooling capacity management

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 151

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 6 Adding Devices

for the water cooled smart cooling product, such as the target cooling load factor
and recommended supply water temperature statistics cycle.

----End

6.2.3.2 Setting iCooling Parameters on the NetEco

The terminal smart cooling product configuration function works as follows: The
system calculates the water temperatures of the smart cooling products in the
data center where the refrigeration station is located and the water temperatures
of the in-room smart cooling products. Then, it uses algorithms to calculate the
optimal water temperature with the actual load considered, and delivers the
optimal water temperature to each refrigeration station.

Prerequisites
● You have created a management domain on the Planning Configuration
page.
● You have added the ChillerPlantControl device to the management domain.
● The Cooling Optimization for Water Cooled System license has been
imported to the NetEco.

Context
● The following devices support the iCooling system: chiller, chilled water pump,
smart cooling product, and cooling tower.
● Cooling pPUE = Cooling energy consumption/IT energy consumption

Procedure
1. Log in to the NetEco client.
2. Choose Energy Efficiency Management > Energy Saving Management >
iCooling from the main menu.
3. Click Monitor to go to the Monitor tab page.
4. Click HVAC System Configuration to go to the page for configuring iCooling
energy efficiency parameters.
5. Configure the terminal smart cooling product.
a. Click Terminal Air-conditioning configuration. The Select Device dialog
box is displayed.
b. Select the smart cooling products to function as the data sources and
click Confirm.
NOTE

You can enter a smart cooling product name in the search box for search.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 152

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 6 Adding Devices

Figure 6-9 Configuring the terminal smart cooling product

6. Import configuration parameters.

a. Click Import and select Configuration Parameters.

b. In the displayed dialog box, click to download the optimization

configuration parameter template.
c. Open the configuration parameter template and set configuration
parameters.
d. Click to import the edited template file from the local PC.
e. Click Import.
7. Import algorithm parameters.
a. Click Import and select Algorithm Parameters.

b. In the displayed dialog box, click to download the optimization

algorithm parameter template.
c. Open the configuration parameter template and set configuration
parameters.
d. Click to import the edited template file from the local PC.
e. Click Import.

8. Click in the upper-left corner of the page to return to the Monitor page.

9. Click to enable the iCooling energy saving mode.

NOTE

OFF indicates that the iCooling energy saving mode is not enabled, and ON indicates
that the mode is enabled. When the iCooling energy saving mode is enabled, you
cannot configure the terminal smart cooling product, import configuration
parameters, or import algorithm parameters.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 153

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 6 Adding Devices

Related Tasks
● Exporting configuration parameters
Choose Export > Configuration Parameters, export the configuration
parameter form, and modify configuration parameters.

Figure 6-10 Exporting configuration parameters

● Exporting algorithm parameters

Choose Export > Algorithm Parameters, and export the algorithm parameter
form.

6.2.3.3 Viewing iCooling Energy Efficiency on the NetEco

On the overview page, you can view the PUE, accumulated energy consumption,
and running overview of the data center. After the iCooling function is enabled,
the system displays the running information in energy saving mode.

Prerequisites
● You have created a management domain on the Planning Configuration
page.
● You have added the ChillerPlantControl device to the management domain.
● You have installed the iCooling energy efficiency management license and
obtained the iCooling energy efficiency management permission.
● You have configured power and cooling capacity counters on the PUE
Configuration page. For details, see "Configuring PUE Counters" in iMaster
NetEco Product Documentation (DC) (V600R021C10_xx).

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the NetEco client.
Step 2 Choose Energy Efficiency Management > Energy Saving Management >
iCooling.
Step 3 Select the required management domain from the drop-down list in the upper-
right corner of the page.
Step 4 View Overall Running Status, PUE(Hours), Energy Saving and Total Consumed
Energy, and Running Overview.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 154

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 6 Adding Devices

NOTE

Overall Running Status covers:

● PUE in Common Mode, PUE in Energy Saving Mode, Dry-bulb Temperature, Wet-bulb
Temperature, and IT Load Rate.
● In the upper-right corner of the curve chart, you can click the color block before a parameter
to hide or display the curve about this parameter.
● You can click Hour, Day, or Month to view the overall running status by day, month, or year
respectively.
● You can click the Custom icon to customize the query time.

----End

6.2.4 (Optional) Viewing a Temperature Map on the NetEco

After obtaining the temperature map license, set the temperature map by
following the instructions provided in this section.

Prerequisites
● A temperature sensor has been successfully connected.
● You have created a management domain on the Planning Configuration
page.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the NetEco client.
Step 2 Choose Device Management > Device View > View from the main menu.
Step 3 On the View page, double-click the equipment room where the temperature
sensor is deployed.

Step 4 Click on the toolbar on the left and select Top cloud, Middle cloud, or Bottom
cloud to view the temperature map.

Step 5 Click on the toolbar on the left, set Temperature and Range, and click OK.
NOTE

If a temperature sensor has been added to a management domain but the temperature is not
set, the average value of the temperatures collected by the sensor is displayed.

----End

6.3 Scenarios for Connecting the Server

6.3.1 Setting SMS Modem Parameters on the NetEco

When short messages need to be sent, you need to set parameters for
notifications sent in SMS messages and commission the settings to ensure that
SMS messages can be properly sent.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 155

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 6 Adding Devices

Prerequisites
● An SMS modem has been installed and commissioned.
● You have obtained the interconnection parameters of the GMS modem from
the user, such as mobile number for receiving notifications.
● You have the operation rights for SMS Settings.

Context
● To send notifications to related personnel, you need to enter their personal
information, such as mobile numbers and email addresses. Therefore, you are
obligated to take considerable measures, in compliance with the laws of the
countries concerned and the user privacy policies of your company, to ensure
that the personal data of users is fully protected.
● For security purposes, personal information, such as mobile number and email
address, is anonymized on the GUI and encrypted during transmission.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the NetEco client.
Step 2 Choose System > System Settings > Notifications from the main menu.
Step 3 In the navigation tree on the left, choose SMS Modem Settings and set
interworking parameters of the SMS modem.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 156

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 6 Adding Devices

Table 6-2 SMS modem parameters

Parameter Description Example

Network system of SMS The options are GSM, CDMA

modem CDMA, LTE and FDDLTE.
The default value is
CDMA.
● The following GSM
SMS modems are
supported: E-TEK GSM
modem TD-8011, E-
TEK GSM modem
TD-8013, and
wavecom WMOD2B
GSM/GPRS modem.
● The following CDMA
SMS modems are
supported: E-TEK
CDMA modem
TD-8022R and E-TEK
CDMA modem
TD-8022.
● The following LTE and
FDDLTE SMS modems
are supported: E-TEK
TD-8412 modem.

Serial port for Serial port connections COM1

connecting SMS modem are secure hardware-
level connections. The
options are COM1 and
COM2. By default, this
parameter is left blank.

SMS modem bound rate Baud rate of the SMS 115200

modem serial port. The
default value is 9600.

Mobile number for A country code must be 8613111111111

receiving notification added before a mobile
number. For example,
the country code of
China is 86, and the
format of the mobile
number is as follows:
86+mobile number. The
recipient mobile number
is used only for testing.
When this parameter is
left blank, the test
button is unavailable.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 157

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 6 Adding Devices

Parameter Description Example

Allow long SMS It is recommended that Yes

messages long SMS messages be
supported.

Enabled If you select No, the Yes

settings are unavailable
and short messages
cannot be sent.

Step 4 Click Test to check whether the system is properly interconnected with the SMS
modem.
● If "Test succeeded." is displayed, they are properly connected. The received
SMS messages are in English.
● If no, "Connectivity failed." is displayed. Check that all parameter settings are
correct.

Step 5 Click Apply. In the Warning dialog box, click OK.

NOTE

If you click only Test, the interconnection status between the system and the mail server
can be tested and the entered parameter values cannot be stored in the database. Only
after you click Apply, all entered parameter values can be stored in the database.

----End

6.4 Scenarios for Connecting the LAN Switch

6.4.1 Adding an iBOX Collector

6.4.1.1 Setting Parameters on the iBOX WebUI

The parallel iBOX communication is used to synchronize the analog parameters
and configuration parameters of each iBOX system. It can also be used to
coordinate the measurement of internal resistance so that only one iBAT is
measuring the internal resistance at one time.

Prerequisites
● Operating system: Support Windows XP or later
● Browser: Internet Explorer 9 or later, FireFox 43 or later, and Chrome 41 or
later
● The IP addresses, subnet masks, and gateways for the PC and iBOX are in the
same network segment.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 158

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 6 Adding Devices

NOTE

The default settings of the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway are as follows:
● IP address: 192.168.0.10
● Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
● Gateway: 192.168.0.1

Procedure
1. Connect a straight-through cable from the PC network port to the Ethernet
port on the switch.
2. Open Internet Explorer and choose Tools > Internet Options.
3. Select the Advanced tab, check that Use TLS 1.1 and Use TLS 1.2 are
selected, and then click OK.
4. Enter https://iBOX IP address in the address box of a browser. The login page
is displayed. After you log in successfully, the home page is displayed.
NOTE

● In this document, the iBOX WebUI snapshots are obtained from iBOX V296B019.
The WebUI snapshots may vary with the iBOX version.
● The preset iBOX IP address is 192.168.0.10. You can set the iBOX IP address on the
WebUI.
● Enter the user name and password. The preset user name is admin, and the preset
password is Changeme. To protect the access security, change the password after
the first login.
● If you enter wrong passwords for five consecutive times, the system will be locked
for one hour. Then, you can operate normally.
● If you forget the IP address, hold down the Default button on the iBOX for more
than 10 seconds. Then the ALM indicator blinks at short intervals, and the iBOX IP
address is restored to the factory default value (192.168.0.10).
● If the user certificate is invalid, the browser prompts There is a problem with this
website's security certificate. Click Continue to this website (not
recommended) to go to the normal login page. The operation does not affect
WebUI functions but has potential risks. Therefore you are advised to update the
security certificate as soon as possible.
5. On the iBOX WebUI, choose System Settings > Batt. String Config, and set
Batt. String Config.

Figure 6-11 Batt. String Config

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 159

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 6 Adding Devices

Batt. String Description

Config

Current The actual specifications of the Hall effect sensor

acquisition source prevail.

Battery N line Set whether there is a battery N wire according to the

actual situation.

Single batt. group Indicates the number of Hall effect sensors connected
number of HALL to a single battery string.

Single batt. Specifies the capacity of each battery that is connected

capacity in the battery string in series.

Batt. installation Time when the battery is installed for the first time.
time Does not need to be reset when part of batteries are
replaced.

iBAT number of Indicates the total number of iBATs managed by the

iBOX iBOX.

Number of Indicates the total number of battery strings managed

battery strings by the iBOX.

Batt. string No. Sets the battery string numbers of the iBOXs connected
in parallel to unique ones when multiple iBOXs are
connected in parallel.

6. On the iBOX WebUI, choose System Settings > Running Parameter, and set
Running Parameter.

Figure 6-12 Running Parameter

Running Description
Parameter

Parallel There is no need to set this parameter for a single

Communication iBOX. If multiple iBOXs are connected in parallel, set
Configuration iBOX parallel communication switch to Yes, set
Number of iBOX configured under each UPS, and set
the IP address for each iBOX.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 160

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 6 Adding Devices

Running Description
Parameter

Modbus Config Set ModbusTCP encryption and ModbusTCP

authentication parameters, which should be consistent
with the setting of Connection Mode on the NetEco.

Alarm Threshold Set the battery internal resistance, charge overcurrent,

Settings charge overvoltage, and bias alarm thresholds.

iBAT Parameters Set the iBAT intelligent hibernation and battery

Config undervoltage protection threshold.

Basic Information If a BCB is configured, set BCB configuration to Done

and Batt. abnormal BCB trip to Enable.

Hall Reverse If the Hall effect sensor is reversely installed, you can
Config set reverse connection to correct it.

IScan Register Enable or disable iScan registration.

Config

Parallel Comm Enable or disable the TLSv1.1 protocol for parallel

TLS Config communication

7. On the System Settings page, set Alarm Parameters, Time, IP Address,

Certificate Management, Battery Curve, NetEco, and Parallel Net Join
Configuration Information.

Figure 6-13 Alarm Parameters

Figure 6-14 Time

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 161

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 6 Adding Devices

Figure 6-15 IP Address

Figure 6-16 Certificate Management

Figure 6-17 Battery Curve

Figure 6-18 NetEco

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 162

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 6 Adding Devices

Figure 6-19 Parallel Net Join Config

System Settings Description

Alarm Parameters Select a device type, and check the alarm name, alarm
enabling, severity, and setting result.

Time Set the local time zone, date, and time.

IP Address Set the IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway

for the iBOX based on the IP address assigned by the
administrator.

Certificate Set the web security certificate, Modbus TCP certificate

Management management, Modbus TCP CA certificate management,
parallel communication certificate management, and
parallel communication CA certificate management
parameters.

Battery Curve Set the battery curve based on the battery brand and
model.

NetEco Select the NMS type and restore the default Modbus
TCP authentication password.

Parallel Net Join Set this parameter when you connect iBOXs in parallel.
Configuration
Information

6.4.1.2 Creating an iBOX Collector on the NetEco

You can create an iBOX collector by manually creating the iBOX on the NetEco or
by adding a UPS for synchronizing the iBOX to the NetEco.

Prerequisites
● You have the operation rights for Planning Configuration.
● You have created a management domain for the device to be added on the
Planning Configuration page.

Context
The following operations describe how to manually create an iBOX.

● UPS_Huawei_UPS5000E_V1R3C00C01_MODBUSTCP

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 163

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 6 Adding Devices

● UPS_Huawei_UPS2000G_V1R1C38_MODBUSTCP
● UPS_Huawei_UPS5000E_V1R1C39_MODBUSTCP
● UPS_Huawei_UPS5000_MODBUSTCP
● UPS_Huawei_UPS5000E_V3R1C00_MODBUSTCP
● UPS_Huawei_UPS5000S-V3R2C30_MODBUSTCP
● UPS_Huawei_UPS5000S-1.2MW_V3R2C10_MODBUSTCP

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the NetEco client.

Step 2 On the main menu, choose Device Management > Configuration > Planning
Configuration.

Step 3 Choose the management domain where you want to create a device from the
navigation tree on the left.

Step 4 In the lower-left corner of the page, click the Device tab.

Step 5 In the Device area, select BMU from the drop-down list box.
NOTE

If the UPS is created in "Context", after UPS is added, the BMU will be automatically
synchronized.

Step 6 Select the Device to be added and drag the icon to the management domain
area.
NOTE

To delete a device, click the device and choose Delete under .

Step 7 Click the device. In the device parameter area on the right, set device parameters
according to the following table.

Table 6-3 Modbus-TCP device parameter description

Parameter Description

Managed Object Device name

Name

IP Set this parameter to the device IP address.

Port Set this parameter to the port number of the device.

NOTE
The port number is 502 by default. You can modify the port number
based on requirements.

Device Address Fixed value: 2.

NOTE
This parameter does not need to be configured.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 164

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 6 Adding Devices

Parameter Description

Connection Mode Connection mode of a device. You can set this parameter to
Non-SSL Connection or SSL Connection.
If you modify the connection mode on the NetEco, you
must modify the connection mode on the device WebUI
accordingly.
NOTE
● Connection Mode for the NetEco and device must be the same.
● By default, Connection Mode is set to SSL Connection for the
NetEco and device.
● A non-SSL connection has security risks. You are advised to
select the secure SSL connection.
NOTE
Battery detectors accessed through the UPS do not support device
software management.

Authentication Re-authentication password for the NetEco and device.

Password 1. Click Modify.
NOTE
After the device is saved, the Modify button is displayed.
2. In the displayed dialog box, enter the New Password
and Confirm Password.
NOTE
– The default re-authentication password for the NetEco and
device is Modifyme_123.
– The device password should be consistent with the NetEco
password.
– If the password does not meet requirements, modify it on
the device.
3. Select a value for Send To Device.
NOTE
If you select YES, the re-authentication password for the NetEco
and device is changed at the same time. If you select NO, only
the re-authentication password of NetEco is changed on the
server.
4. Click OK.

Timeout Period Timeout duration for a connection test. The default value is
3s.

Step 8 Click on the toolbar to save the device information.

Step 9 Click Connection test to start the connection test.

----End

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 165

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 6 Adding Devices

6.4.1.3 iBOX and iBAT Networking

Prerequisites
Before networking, ensure that all the iBOXs and iBATs have no network
parameters, that is, the RF_Z indicator on the iBOX is steady green and the
RUN/ALM indicator on the iBAT is steady red.

NOTICE

● If the RF_Z indicator on the iBOX is not steady green, hold down the
networking switch on the iBOX for 10–20 seconds to clear the original network.
● If the RUN/ALM indicator on the iBAT is not steady red, hold down the
networking switch on the iBAT for at least 5 seconds to clear the original
network.
● Do not operate the networking switch during networking. Otherwise, the
networking fails.

Context
To prevent the iBAT in a different group from connecting to another iBOX, ensure
that only one iBOX is under networking at a time. That is, only the RF_Z indicator
of this iBOX is blinking at super short intervals.

Procedure
Step 1 Hold down the networking switch on the iBOX for 2 seconds. The ALM indicator
blinks red once, and the RF_Z indicator turns from steady green to blinking green
at super short intervals, which indicates that the iBOX is being networked.
NOTE

● Blinking at long intervals: The indicator is on for 1s and then off for 1s alternately.
● Blinking at super short intervals: The indicator is on for 0.05s and then off for 0.05s
alternately.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 166

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 6 Adding Devices

Figure 6-20 iBOX

(1) Networking switch (2) ALM indicator (3) RF_Z indicator

Step 2 Hold down the iBAT networking switch for 2 seconds. When the RUN/ALM
indicator turns from steady red to blinking green at short intervals, and finally to
blinking green at long intervals, the iBAT connects to the iBOX network.
NOTE

● It is recommended that iBATs be networked from the positive battery string terminal
according to the battery cable connection sequence.
● The sequence of connecting the iBAT to the iBOX determines the battery number.

Step 3 Perform networking operations on the next iBAT only after networking for the
previous iBAT is successful. Repeat Step 2 to add other iBATs to the iBOX network.

Step 4 Hold down the networking switch on the iBOX for 2 seconds. When the RF_Z
indicator on the iBOX turns from blinking green at super short intervals to blinking
green at long intervals, the networking is complete.
NOTE

After the networking is complete, if the ALM indicator on the iBOX is steady on, the
number of devices online is smaller than the value of iBAT number of iBOX. Check that
iBAT number of iBOX is set to a correct value and that the iBATs are successfully
networked (The RUN/ALM indicator is blinking green at long intervals.).

Step 5 (Optional) If multiple iBOXs are cascaded, repeat Step 1 to Step 4 to perform
networking for other iBOXs and iBATs.

----End

6.4.2 Adding a Video Management System

NOTE

● Because cameras and the IVS do not support northbound and southbound isolation, the IVS
service IP address must be set to a northbound IP address.
● The camera IP address and the IVS service IP address must be in the same network.
● For details about the northbound IP address, see "Overview of Southbound and Northbound
Network Isolation" in iMaster NetEco Product Documentation (DC) (V600R021C10_xx).

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 167

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 6 Adding Devices

6.4.2.1 Obtaining Video Management System Documents

Before commissioning a camera, prepare the following documents in addition to
this document.

Table 6-4 Documentation for commissioning

Component Document

C3220/M2121 Huawei C Series SDC 8.0.1 Product Documentation

IVS1800 IVS1800 8.1.0 Product Documentation

6.4.2.2 Commissioning a C3220/M2121 Camera

Prerequisites
If multiple cameras are accessed, retain the connection of one camera and
disconnect connections from other cameras. After commissioning the connected
camera, commission other cameras in the same way.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the camera WebUI.
1. Configure the PC IP address and the camera IP address in the same network
segment. Enter the camera IP address (192.168.0.120 by default) in the
address bar of the Internet Explorer and press Enter.
NOTE

The following lists the requirements for the operating system and browser of the
camera WebUI:
– Supports Windows 7: Internet Explorer 10/11, Chrome 38+, FireFox 35–51
– Supports Windows 8: Internet Explorer 10/11, Chrome 38+, FireFox 35–51
– Supports Windows 10: Internet Explorer 11, Chrome 38+, FireFox 35–51
– The Internet Explorer tab plugin needs to be installed for Google Chrome 45 and
later versions.
– Only 32-bit browsers are supported.
2. Set the password as prompted upon the first login. Then use the new
password to log in.
NOTE

– To prevent security risks, the system prompts you to set the password of the admin
user when you log in to the system for the first time.
– If you enter incorrect passwords for five consecutive times, the account will be
locked for 5 minutes by default.
– To prevent security risks, periodically log in to the system as the admin user, click
the drop-down list in the upper right corner, and click Change Password to change
the administrator password.
– You need to set Internet Explorer before accessing the camera WebUI for the first
time.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 168

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 6 Adding Devices

Table 6-5 Internet Explorer settings

Settings Procedure

Disable the proxy server. 1. Choose Tools > Internet

Options.
The Internet Options dialog box
is displayed.
2. Click the Connections tab.
3. Click LAN Settings.
4. Deselect Use a proxy for your
LAN.
5. Click OK.

Enable the ActiveX controls and 1. Choose Tools > Internet

plug-ins or set them to the prompt Options.
mode. The Internet Options dialog box
is displayed.
2. Click the Security tab.
3. Select Internet.
4. Click Custom level.
The Security Settings-Internet
Zone dialog box is displayed.
5. Set Automatic prompting for
ActiveX controls to Enable, and
set Download unsigned ActiveX
controls and Initialize and script
ActiveX controls not marked as
safe for scripting to Prompt.
6. Click OK.

Enable TLS 1.1 or TLS 1.2. NOTE

You must enable TLS 1.1 or TLS 1.2
when the HTTPS protocol is used to
access the camera. Otherwise, the
camera WebUI cannot be opened.
1. Choose Tools > Internet
Options.
The Internet Options dialog box
is displayed.
2. Click the Advanced tab.
3. Select Use TLS 1.1 or Use TLS
1.2.
4. Click OK.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 169

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 6 Adding Devices

Settings Procedure

Set Use Pop-up Blocker to Disable. 1. Choose Tools > Internet

Options.
The Internet Options dialog box
is displayed.
2. Click the Security tab.
3. Select Internet.
4. Click Custom level.
The Security Settings-Internet
Zone dialog box is displayed.
5. Set Use Pop-up Blocker to
Disable.
6. Click OK.

Step 2 Commission cameras and set parameters for them. For details, see the delivered
documents.
1. Preview the site situation in real time and check the camera coverage through
videos. Adjust the lens if necessary.
2. On the View tab page, click the Network/Time tab to access the Network/
Time tab page.

Figure 6-21 Setting the IP address

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 170

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 6 Adding Devices

Table 6-6 IP address parameters

Parameter Description

IPv4 address Method for obtaining the IP address. The options are
assignment Obtain IP address automatically and Use the
following IP address. The default value is Obtain IP
address automatically.

IPv4 address Camera IP address. This parameter is available only

when IPv4 address assignment is set to Use the
following IP address.
Enter the planned IP address, for example,
192.168.1.161. IP addresses starting with 127 are
invalid. You must enter an IP address starting with a
value that ranges from 1 to 223.

IPv4 gateway Gateway IP address of the network where the camera is

located. The default value is 192.168.0.1.

IPv4 subnet Subnet mask of the network where the camera is

mask located. The default value is 255.255.255.0.

Primary DNS Primary DNS IP address. The default value is 0.0.0.0.

Secondary DNS Secondary DNS IP address. The default value is 0.0.0.0.

3. On the View tab page, click the General tab to access the General tab page.
Select Video and set the parameters, as shown in the following figures.

Figure 6-22 Setting primary stream parameters

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 171

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 6 Adding Devices

Figure 6-23 Setting secondary stream 1 parameters

Table 6-7 Video stream parameters

Parameter Description

Primary stream/ Set the stream type based on the site requirements.
Secondary – Primary stream: The primary streams feature high
stream bit rate, definition, and bandwidth usage. They are
applicable to local storage.
– Secondary stream: The secondary streams provide
smooth video, occupy small bandwidth, and are
applicable to data transmission over low-bandwidth
networks.
NOTE
SD card recording supports only primary streams.

Intelligent After intelligent encoding is enabled, a camera can

encoding automatically adapt to scenarios to reduce the bit rate
and save the storage space.
A higher intelligent encoding level indicates more
significant reduction of the bit rate, which however may
lead to image quality deterioration.

Slice This parameter is available only when you set Encoding

protocol to H.264.
Multi-slice encoding indicates that video streams are
divided into multiple segments. Each segment forms a
slice. The encoding process of each slice is independent
of each other. Therefore, the camera can encode and
decode multiple slices in parallel, improving encoding
and decoding performance. This parameter is selected
by default.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 172

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 6 Adding Devices

Parameter Description

Encoding Set the coding protocol based on the site requirements.

protocol The options are as follows:
– H.264: The H.264 protocol requires relatively small
bandwidth to ensure video quality.
– MJPEG: The MJPEG protocol decodes and displays
each frame independently without referring to the
previous and next frames. This protocol has a small
compression ratio and requires large bandwidth to
ensure video quality. This protocol is suitable for
video editing.
– H.265: The H.265 protocol is bandwidth-conserving
compared with the H.264 protocol.

Encoding The options of H.264 profiles include Base profile, Main

complexity profile, and High profile. Among these profiles, the
baseline profile has the lowest encoding compression
performance and lowest requirements on hardware
decoding performance, while the high profile has the
highest.

Resolution A higher resolution indicates clearer images and higher

bandwidth consumption.

Bit rate type This parameter is available only when you set Encoding
protocol to H.264 or H.265.
The bit rate is measured by data bits transmitted in a
unit of time.
– Variable bit rate: The bit rate varies depending on
the image complexity to ensure the clarity of images
with great dynamic changes. The bit rate is low if the
image is simple or static. The variable bit rate is
recommended.
– Constant bit rate: The constant bit rate remains the
same. The upper limit of the instantaneous bit rate is
set to 110%. If the bit rate is incorrectly configured
for images with great dynamic changes, the images
will be unclear.

Max. bit rate This parameter is available only when you set Bit rate
type to Variable bit rate.
The bit rate range depends on the selected resolution.

Bit rate value Average bit rate when Bit rate type is set to Constant
bit rate.
The bit rate range depends on the selected resolution.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 173

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 6 Adding Devices

Parameter Description

Bit rate control This parameter is available only when you set Bit rate
mode type to Constant bit rate. The options are as follows:
– Frame rate priority: Ensure the smoothness of the
video image.
– Image quality priority: Ensure the quality of the
video image.

Frame rate The frame rate is measured by the number of frames

displayed in a second.
A higher frame rate indicates clearer and smoother
images and higher bandwidth consumption.

Image quality This parameter is available only when you set Encoding
protocol to H.264 or H.265 and Bit rate type to
Variable bit rate.
Better image quality requires higher bandwidth.
Therefore, select proper image quality based on the site
requirements.

I-frame interval This parameter is available only when you set Encoding
protocol to H.264 or H.265.
An I frame is an intra-coded frame that represents a
fixed image independent of other picture types. Each
group of pictures (GOP) begins with this type of frame.
A smaller I-frame interval indicates better video quality
and higher bandwidth consumption.

Layered This parameter is available only when you set Encoding

encoding protocol to H.264 or H.265.
To enable layered encoding, select Layered encoding.

JPEG quality This parameter is available only when you set Encoding
protocol to MJPEG.
A larger value indicates higher image quality.

----End

Follow-up Procedure
Commission other cameras by referring to this section.

6.4.2.3 Commissioning the IVS1800

6.4.2.3.1 Setting Parameters on the IVS1800 WebUI

Prerequisites
For details about the IVS1800 hardware description and installation, see the Quick
Start in the corresponding IVS1800 product documentation. For details about the

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 174

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 6 Adding Devices

IVS1800 configuration, see the Configuration Guide. For details, see the
documentation delivered with the device or obtain the documentation by referring
to the "Reference Documentation" section.

The PC for logging in to the client and the IVS are on the same network.

Context
A default IP address has been configured for the IVS1800 before delivery. Modify
the IP address based on the actual network plan.

Procedure
Step 1 Enter https://IP address:8443 in the address box, and press Enter.

In the URL, IP address indicates the IP address of the IVS1800. The default IP
address is 192.168.3.111.

NOTE

The OMU Portal supports Internet Explorer 10.0 and later versions.

Step 2 Log in to the OMU portal. Set the service system and operating system passwords
at the first login.
1. Setting the password for the admin user of the service system
2. Setting the password for the admin user of the operating system
3. Setting the password for the root user of the operating system
4. Enter the user name and password to log in to the OMU portal again. The
following figure shows the home page after a successful login.

Figure 6-24 OMU portal home page

Step 3 Configure disk initialization.

NOTE

Recording data can be stored only after you install and initialize the disks.
1. Choose Local Configuration > Local Disk.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 175

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 6 Adding Devices

2. In the upper right corner of the RAID Groups area, click Initial Disk
3. Configure disk initialization.

Figure 6-25 Disk initialization (RAID 5 economical configuration by default)

Step 4 Modify the IP address for the IVS1800.

1. Choose Local Configuration > Server configuration. Set the service IP
address (internal IP address of the IVS1800), time zone, and time according to
the site requirements.

Figure 6-26 Configuring the server (Single Mode by default)

NOTE

Set Business IP to XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX, Subnet mask to 255.255.255.0, and Gateway IP

to XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX. The values here are examples. The actual value may vary.
2. Change the PC IP address to an address in the network segment of the new
IVS1800 IP address, enter the IVS1800 IP address in the address box of the
Internet browser, and log in to the OMU portal system.
3. (Optional) Configure the NTP synchronization. After setting The NTP clock
source server to Yes, set the IP address of the NTP server.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 176

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 6 Adding Devices

NOTE

Currently, the IVS1800 and NTP source server must be in the same LAN for NTP
synchronization. For details, see Step 5.
If the IVS1800 and the NTP source server are not in the same LAN, you need to
manually set the time as follows: Choose Local Configuration > Server configuration
and change Timezone config and Time config based on the time of the source server
to be synchronized.
4. Choose Maintenance > Unified Configuration, set Module Name to MU,
and click Search.
5. In the search result, click Edit in the row where the value of Parameter Name
is MUNNatIP and set Value to the external IP address of the IVS1800. Click
Save.

Figure 6-27 Setting the external IP address of the MU

6. Click Edit in the row where Parameter Name is NatRtspServerPort and set
Value to 554. Click Save.
NOTE

– In the smart ETH gateway networking scenario, the external IP address set for
MUNNatIP is the same as the external IP address mapped for the IVS1800 on the
ECC800-Pro.
– If no external IP address is mapped, retain the default value of NatRtspServerPort.
7. Set Module Name to OMU and click Search.
8. In the search result, click Edit in the row where the value of Parameter Name
is OMUNNatIP and set Value to the MUNNatIP address of the MU. Click
Save.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 177

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 6 Adding Devices

Figure 6-28 Setting the external IP address of the OMU

Step 5 Enable camera NTP synchronization.

The camera NTP synchronization function for the server is disabled by default. The
camera NTP synchronization function needs to be enabled for the server that
connects to the camera. After the camera NTP synchronization function is enabled,
cameras will automatically time-synchronize from their access servers.

1. Log in to the OMU portal as the admin user.

2. Choose Maintenance > Unified Configuration.
3. Set Module Name to SCU and Parameter type to System property, and
click Search.
4. In the search results, click Edit in the row where Parameter Name is NTPIPC
and set Value to 1.
5. Click Save. After the camera NTP synchronization function is enabled, the
camera, after being connected to the server, will automatically time-
synchronize with the server.

Figure 6-29 Configuring camera NTP synchronization

Step 6 Create a user.

When connecting to the IVS1800 on the NetEco, you need to log in to the VCN as
a non-admin user.

1. Log in to the OMU portal as the admin user.

2. Choose User Management > Add User.
NOTE

When creating a user, you can select Enable account validity period and set Valid from
and Valid to to set the account validity period for the created user.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 178

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 6 Adding Devices

3. Set Multi-point logins to a value greater than 2.

4. On the User List page, click Permission Settings next to the new user. You
can select Enable All Device View Rights or select the cameras to be
browsed and queried, obtain the documents delivered with the device or by
referring to the "Reference Documentation" section, set other parameters,
and click Save.

----End

6.4.2.3.2 Setting Parameters on the iClient

Prerequisites
The network communication between the IVS1800 and the camera is normal.

Procedure
Step 1 Install the iClient.
1. Download the iClient.

You can obtain the iClient in either of the following ways:

Method 1: Obtain the iClient installation program from the OMU portal.

Log in to the OMU portal, click Client Download in the

upper right corner, and save the installation program to a local
directory.

Method 2 1. Log in to the OMU portal, choose Local Configuration >

Basic Configuration, and view Current version.
2. Log in to https://support.huawei.com/enterprise/, and search
for and choose iClient. In the search result, click the
Software Download tab, click the version and patch number
corresponding to the current version, and download the
software package as required.

Figure 6-30 iClient software package search result

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 179

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 6 Adding Devices

2. Decompress the software package, double-click the installation program, and

complete the installation as prompted.
3. Right-click the client program and choose Run as administrator from the
shortcut menu. The login page is displayed.
4. Select Local Mode, set Lock screen (optional), and click Enter.
5. Select Micro Edge Access.
6. Add an IVS1800.

Figure 6-31 Adding a device

NOTE

– If the PCs of the iClient and IVS1800 are deployed in the same LAN, set Address to
the internal IP address of the IVS1800. If the iClient is installed on an external
network and the IVS1800 is deployed in the LAN, set Address to the external IP
address of the IVS1800.
– When the IVS1800 is added to the iClient by the admin user, the iClient checks
whether the login password of the admin user has been set. If the password is not
set, log in to the OMU portal to set the password.
7. Click Finish to go to the iClient.
Step 2 Add a camera. For details, see the documentation delivered with the device or
obtain the documentation by referring to the "Reference Documentation" section.
View the corresponding section.
1. On the home page of the iClient, click Device Management.
2. Right-click an IVS1800 and choose Camera Access.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 180

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 6 Adding Devices

Figure 6-32 Camera Access

3. Select Auto Batch Access and click Start.

4. Set the IP address segment.

Figure 6-33 Setting an IP network segment

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 181

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 6 Adding Devices

NOTE

– The driver protocol of IPC6325 and C3220 cameras is HWSDK.

– The IP address segment indicates the start and end IP addresses of cameras.
5. You can use IP Address to filter the required cameras in the camera search
result and select the required cameras. Alternatively, you can directly select
the required cameras in the camera list. Then verify accounts. The default
password of the SKD protocol is HuaWei123.

Figure 6-34 Verifying accounts

NOTE

If there are multiple IVS1800s for multiple smart modules, you are advised to evenly
distribute the cameras to each IVS1800.
6. Select the cameras to be added and click Next.
7. Click Finish.
8. Preview live video. On the iClient home page, click Live and drag a camera to
the live video pane. If the live video can be properly played, the camera is
successfully connected.
Step 3 Configure a recording policy.
1. Log in to the iClient and click Device Management on the home page.
2. Right-click an IVS1800 and choose Storage Management.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 182

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 6 Adding Devices

Figure 6-35 Selecting Storage Management

3. Click Storage Policy and configure a storage policy.

Figure 6-36 Configuring a storage policy

Step 4 Configure a server recording plan.

1. Log in to the iClient and click Device Management on the home page.
2. Right-click an IVS1800 and choose Storage Management.
3. Click the Server Recording Plan tab. The tab page for configuring a server
recording plan is displayed.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 183

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 6 Adding Devices

Figure 6-37 Server Recording Plan

4. Configure a server recording plan.

NOTE

If you set the recording plan policy to All, you do not need to set the recording plan time.
5. Click Save.

----End

6.4.2.4 Configuring Camera Parameters on the NetEco

This section describes how to set video parameters on the NetEco parameter
setting page.

Prerequisites
● You have the video management permission.
● Use Google Chrome or Mozilla Firefox of the latest version to play videos.
● Chrome or firefox is available for video playing
● Video streaming media service has been enabled on the System > System
Setting > System Configuration > Protocols Configuration > NetEco
Protocols page. If the service is disabled, enable it by following the
instructions provided in "Configuring Protocol Switch" in iMaster NetEco
Product Documentation (DC) (V600R021C10_xx).

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the NetEco client.

Step 2 Choose Maintenance Management > Security Protection > Camera

Management from the main menu.

Step 3 In the navigation tree on the left, choose Video Surveillance Subsystem.

Step 4 Click Create on the right of the page. The Creating a Video Subsystem dialog
box is displayed.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 184

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 6 Adding Devices

NOTE

Video streaming media service has been enabled on the System > System Setting >
System Configuration > Protocols Configuration > NetEco Protocols page. If the service
is disabled, enable it by following the instructions provided in "Configuring Protocol Switch"
in iMaster NetEco Product Documentation (DC) (V600R021C10_xx).

Step 5 In the left part of the dialog box, select VCN or IVS as required.
Step 6 In the right part of the dialog box, set the parameters according to Table 6-8.

NOTICE

If not all ActiveX controls are enabled, the test connection fails after filling in the
correct parameter information and clicking Test.

Table 6-8 Parameter description

Parameter Description Example

Server Name You can customize the server -

name.

IP Indicates the IP address of the XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX

VCN/IVS server. It is a correct
IPv4 address. Each digit ranges
from 0 to 255. The IP address
cannot be 0.0.0.0.

Port Indicates the port number of 9900

the VCN/IVS server.
NOTE
● The default port number for
VCN is 9900.
● The IVS server supports two
access modes: eSDK and IVS.
The default port number of the
eSDK is 9900, and the default
port number of the IVS is
18531.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 185

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 6 Adding Devices

Parameter Description Example

User Name Indicates the user name for Huawei123

logging in to the VCN/IVS
client.
NOTE
● The NetEco needs to have
browse and query permissions,
please configure the video
system users with browse and
query permissions.
● It is recommended that the
new user name created using
the IVS be used to access the
camera. Before accessing the
camera, ensure that the initial
password of the user has been
changed and the user has
successfully logged in to the
IVS.
● It is recommended that the
number of IVS clients to which
the user can log in to a value
greater than 5. Otherwise,
when the user has logged in to
the IVS client, the user cannot
log in to it through the NetEco.
● The admin user cannot log in
to the NetEco to connect to
the VCN.

Login Password Indicates the password for Change_Me

logging in to the VCN/IVS
client.
If the password does not
comply with the rules, please
change the password on device.

Step 7 Click Test after configuring parameters.

NOTE

● During the first test, the page turns blank. Wait 30s.
● If the test fails, a message indicating a connection failure is displayed.

Step 8 Click Save.

----End

6.4.2.5 Adding Cameras by Automatic Discovery on the NetEco

This section describes how to quickly add an online camera that is not in any
management domain to a management domain using the automatic discovery
function provided by the system.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 186

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 6 Adding Devices

Prerequisites
● You have the operation rights for Camera Management.
● A camera has connected to the VCN/IVS server.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the NetEco client.
Step 2 Choose Maintenance Management > Security Protection > Camera
Management from the main menu.
Step 3 In the navigation tree on the left, choose Video Surveillance Subsystem.

Step 4 On the Video Surveillance Subsystem page, click in the Operation item
column.
Step 5 Select one or more cameras and click Create.
Step 6 On the Discovery Camera page, add a camera by following the instructions
provided in Figure 6-38.

Figure 6-38 Adding a camera using automatic discovery

NOTE

● Add a camera to management domains excluding the root node, subnets and cabinet using
the automatic discovery function.
● After a camera is added, it will be displayed under the corresponding management domain
on the Planning Configuration page. On the Planning Configuration page, you can set
parameters such as the Name for the camera.

----End

Follow-up Procedure
On the Video Camera Management page, specify one or multiple keywords of
Name and IP Address to query camera information.

6.4.2.6 Setting Video Playback on the NetEco

Only cameras managed by the video subsystem support the video playback
function. By setting video playback, you can view videos that are manually
recorded.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 187

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 6 Adding Devices

Prerequisites
● A server recording plan has been configured on the VCN/IVS client.
● Video parameters have been set on the NetEco and cameras have been
connected to the NetEco.
● A camera has connected to the VCN/IVS server.
● The camera adapter has been installed on the NetEco.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the NetEco client.

Step 2 Choose Maintenance Management > Security Protection > Camera

Management from the main menu.

Step 3 In the navigation pane on the left, choose Historical Video.

Step 4 In the Camera List area, select a camera for video playback.

Step 5 In the Time area, set Start Time and End Time for video playback, and click
Query.

Figure 6-39 Setting video playback

Step 6 In the camera list on the right of the page, select the recording file to be viewed.

Step 7 Click to play back the video.

----End

6.4.3 Adding a Smart Cooling Product

6.4.3.1 Setting Monitoring Parameters for the Smart Cooling Product (over
Modbus-TCP)
The method of setting monitoring parameters for NetCol5000-C(065, 080),
NetCol5000-A035/A042/A050/C025/C030, NetCol8000-A060/A120, and
FusionCol8000-E220/E400/C080/C210 are the same.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 188

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 6 Adding Devices

Prerequisites
● You have obtained the IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway
information planned for the smart cooling product.
● The smart cooling product is powered on.

Context
If the smart cooling product is connected over Modbus-TCP, set parameters by
referring to this section.
This section uses FusionCol8000-E400 V100R021C10 as an example.

Procedure
Step 1 Tap Settings on the FusionCol8000-E400 home screen.
Step 2 Enter the user name and password of an administrator.
NOTE

The preset user name and password are respectively admin and 000001. To ensure access
security, change the password upon the first login.

Step 3 Choose Comm Settings > Modbus Settings and set Modbus-TCP parameters by
referring to Table 6-9.
NOTE

The encryption mode must be the same as it on the NMS.

WARNING

After the Encryption operation CBC parameter is set, the system automatically
restarts. Exercise caution when performing this operation.

Figure 6-40 Warning dialog box

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 189

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 6 Adding Devices

Table 6-9 Modbus TCP parameter settings

Parameter Setting Setting Method

Link mode Server, ● If you set Link mode to Server, the smart
Client, Server cooling product, as a server, supports two client
and client connection and establishes communication.
● If you set Link mode to Client, the smart
cooling product, as a client, can connect to a
remote server and establish communication.
● If you set Link mode to Server and client, the
smart cooling product, as a server, supports two
client connection and establishes
communication. In addition, the smart cooling
product, as a client, can connect to a remote
server and establish communication.

Client Enable, This parameter is configurable when Link mode is

encryption Disable set to Client.

Server Enable, This parameter is configurable when Link mode is

encryption Disable set to Server.

Encryption Enable, Encryption operation CBC is enabled by default.

operation Disable Determine whether to use the encryption
CBC operation CBC when connecting to other devices
based on the site requirements.

NMS IP - Enter the actual IP address of the NMS. IP

address addresses of the display panel, NMS client, and
NMS server must be unique. This parameter is
configurable when Link mode is set to Client.

NMS port - This parameter is configurable when Link mode

number involves Client.
● Connecting to the NetEco: Set this parameter to
32907 if Client encryption is enabled, or set it
to 32906 if Client encryption is disabled.
● Connecting to other NMSs: You are advised not
to change the value. In special cases, set this
parameter based on the site requirements.

Pre-shared - Secondary authentication password used for

password Modbus-TCP connection.

Step 4 Return to the home screen, and choose Settings > Comm Settings > WAN IP
Settings or Settings > Comm Settings > IP Settings.

Table 6-10 Parameters for WAN IP settings

Parameter Setting

IP address Set according to the actual plan.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 190

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 6 Adding Devices

Parameter Setting

Subnet mask Set according to the actual plan.

Gateway Set according to the actual plan.

----End

6.4.3.2 Creating a Smart Cooling Product on the NetEco

This section describes how to create a smart cooling product on the NetEco

Prerequisites
● You have the operation rights for Planning Configuration.
● You have created a management domain for the device to be added on the
Planning Configuration page.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the NetEco client.

Step 2 On the main menu, choose Device Management > Configuration > Planning
Configuration.

Step 3 Choose the management domain where you want to create a device from the
navigation tree on the left.

Step 4 In the lower-left corner of the page, click the Device tab.

Step 5 In the Device area, select Air Conditioner from the drop-down list box.

Step 6 Select the Device to be added and drag the icon to the management domain
area.
NOTE

To delete a device, click the device and choose Delete under .

Step 7 Click the device. In the device parameter area on the right, set device parameters
according to the following table.

Table 6-11 Modbus-TCP device parameter description

Parameter Description

Managed Device name

Object Name

IP Set the IP address of the device.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 191

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 6 Adding Devices

Parameter Description

Port Set this parameter to the port number of the device.

NOTE
When creating a smart cooling product of the Modbus-TCP type, if the
smart cooling product functions as a server, set the port number to 502.
If the smart cooling product functions as a client, set the port number to
1. If the smart cooling product functions as a server and a client, set the
port number to 502 or 1.

Device Set this parameter to the address set on the device.

Address

Connection Indicates the connection mode of a device. You can set this
Mode parameter to Non-SSL Connection or SSL Connection.
If you modify Connection Mode on the NetEco, you must
modify Connection Mode on the WebUI of the device at the
same time.
NOTE
● Connection Mode for the NetEco and device must be the same.
● By default, Connection Mode is set to SSL Connection for the
NetEco and device.
● A non-SSL connection has security risks. You are advised to select the
secure SSL connection.

Authenticatio Indicates the re-authentication password for the NetEco and

n Password device.
1. Click Modify.
NOTE
After the device is saved, the Modify button is displayed.
2. In the displayed dialog box, enter the New Password and
Confirm Password.
NOTE
– The default re-authentication password for the NetEco and device
is Modifyme_123.
– The device password should be consistent with the NetEco
password.
– If the password does not meet requirements, modify it on the
device.
3. Select Send To Device.
NOTE
If you select YES, the re-authentication password for the NetEco and
device is changed at the same time. If you select NO, only the re-
authentication password of NetEco is changed on the server.
4. Click OK.

Timeout Timeout duration for a connection test. The default value is 3s.
Period

Step 8 Click on the toolbar to save the device information.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 192

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 6 Adding Devices

Step 9 Click Connection test to start the connection test.

----End

6.4.4 Adding a Refrigeration Station

6.4.4.1 Creating a Chiller Subsystem on the NetEco (Modbus-TCP Protocol)

When the chiller subsystem is configured, bind all devices in the refrigeration
station to the chiller subsystem in sequence by referring to this section.

Prerequisites
● You have the operation rights for Planning Configuration.
● You have created a management domain for the device to be added on the
Planning Configuration page.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the NetEco client.

Step 2 On the main menu, choose Device Management > Configuration > Planning
Configuration.

Step 3 Choose the management domain where you want to create a device from the
navigation tree on the left.

Step 4 In the lower-left corner of the page, click the Device tab.

Step 5 In the Device area, select Subsystem from the drop-down list box.

Step 6 Select the device to be added and drag its icon to the management domain.
NOTE

To delete a device, click the device and choose Delete under .

Step 7 Click the device. In the device parameter area on the right, set device parameters
according to the following table.

Table 6-12 Modbus-TCP subsystem parameter description

Parameter Description

Managed Object Name of the subsystem and device to be created

Name

IP IP address of the chiller subsystem

Port Port number of the chiller subsystem

The default port number is 502. You can change the port
number as required.

Device Address Set this parameter to the address set on the device.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 193

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 6 Adding Devices

Parameter Description

Connection Mode Connection mode of a device. You can set this parameter to
Non-SSL Connection or SSL Connection.
If you modify the connection mode on the NetEco, you
must modify the connection mode on the device WebUI
accordingly.
NOTE
● The connection mode settings for the NetEco and device must
be the same.
● By default, Connection Mode is set to SSL Connection for the
NetEco and device.
● A non-SSL connection has security risks. You are advised to
select the secure SSL connection.

Authentication Indicates the re-authentication password for the NetEco

Password and device.
1. Click Modify. In the displayed dialog box, enter the New
Password and Confirm Password.
NOTE
– After the device is saved, the Modify button is displayed.
– For details about the device password, see the user manual
of the device.
– The device password should be consistent with the NetEco
password.
– If the password does not meet requirements, modify it on
the device.
2. Select a value for Send To Device.
NOTE
If you select YES, the re-authentication password for the NetEco
and device is changed at the same time. If you select NO, only
the re-authentication password of NetEco is changed on the
server.
3. Click OK.

Timeout Period Timeout duration for a connection test. The default value is
3s.

Step 8 Click on the toolbar to save the device information.

Step 9 Click Connection test to start the connection test.

----End

6.4.4.2 Creating Refrigeration Station Devices on the NetEco

This section describes how to add refrigeration station devices (chiller group
control, for example) on the NetEco.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 194

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 6 Adding Devices

Prerequisites
● You have the operation rights for Planning Configuration.
● You have created a management domain for the device to be added on the
Planning Configuration page.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the NetEco client.
Step 2 On the main menu, choose Device Management > Configuration > Planning
Configuration.
Step 3 Choose the management domain where you want to create a device from the
navigation tree on the left.
Step 4 In the lower-left corner of the page, click the Device tab.
Step 5 Click the drop-down list box in Type and select Chiller. Select cooling towers or
chillers from the drop-down list box to add other refrigeration station devices. The
specific type depends on the actual equipment in the refrigerating station.
Step 6 Select the device to be added and drag its icon to the management domain.
NOTE

To delete a device, click the device and choose Delete under .

Step 7 Click the device. In the device parameter area on the right, set device parameters
according to the following table.

Table 6-13 Subsystem device parameter description

Parameter Description

Managed Object Name of the subsystem and device to be created

Name

Subsystem Subsystem corresponding to the chiller created in 6.4.4.1

Creating a Chiller Subsystem on the NetEco (Modbus-
TCP Protocol)

Step 8 Click on the toolbar to save the device information.

Step 9 Click Connection test to start the connection test.

----End

6.4.5 Adding a UPS

6.4.5.1 Setting Monitoring Parameters for a UPS2000-G (over SNMP)

Before connecting UPS2000-G to NetEco, you should set the IP address on the
UPS2000-G, add user and set permissions on the WebUI of UPS2000-G.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 195

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 6 Adding Devices

Prerequisites
● You have obtained the IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway planned
for the UPS2000-G. UPS stands for uninterruptible power system.
● The UPS2000-G is powered on.

Context
● UPSs have various versions, for which UPS WebUIs may differ. Perform
operations based on the actual WebUI.
● Connecting the UPS2000-G to the NetEco in DES and MD5 protocols poses
potential risks. Therefore, exercise caution when deciding to do so.

Procedure
Step 1 Set the IP address on the UPS2000-G.

1. Press next to the UPS2000-G LCD.

2. Press and select Settings.

3. Press and enter the password.

NOTE

The preset password is 000001. For access security, change the password after the first
login.
4. Press , select Communication card.

5. Press to enter the IP address setting.

6. Press , set the value size by and .

7. Press and move the cursor to Sub mask and Default GW, set Sub mask
and Default GW by using the same as the preceding steps.
8. Press ESC to exit.

Step 2 Log in to the UPS2000-G WebUI.

1. On the PC with an IP address in the same network segment as the UPS2000-
G, type https://IP address of the UPS2000-G in the address box of a browser
and press Enter.
2. Enter the user name and password for logging in to the UPS2000-G and click
Login.
NOTE

The preset user name and password for the UPS2000-G are admin and Changeme,
respectively. To ensure access security, change the password after first login.
3. Set user permissions by referring to Step 3 or Step 4 based on the site
requirements.

Step 3 Add a user and set user permissions on the WebUI (WebUI 1).
1. Choose System Settings > SNMP Settings.
2. In the SNMP area, set SNMP Version to SNMPv3 and SNMP Port to 161,
and click Submit.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 196

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 6 Adding Devices

3. In the SNMPv3 area, click Add.

4. In the displayed SNMPv3 dialog box, set SNMPv3 parameters, and click
Confirm.
– You are advised to set MD5/SHA password and DES/AES password to
different values.
– MD5 is an insecure protocol. SHA is recommended. DES is an insecure
protocol. AES is recommended.
– Record the User Name, MD5/SHA password, and DES/AES password for
using when creating a UPS on the NetEco.

Figure 6-41 Setting SNMPv3 parameters

5. In the SNMP Trap area, click Add.

6. In the displayed SNMP Trap dialog box, set SNMP trap parameters, and click
Confirm.
– Enter the IP address of the NetEco server in the Trap Target Address text
box.
– Set Trap Port to 162.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 197

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 6 Adding Devices

Figure 6-42 Setting SNMP trap parameters

Step 4 Add a user and set user permissions on the WebUI (WebUI 2).
1. Choose Configure > SNMP.
2. Select SNMPv3 for SNMP version, enter 161 for SNMP port, and click
Confirm.

Figure 6-43 Setting SNMP parameters

3. Click Add in SNMP.

Figure 6-44 Setting SNMP parameters_02

4. In the displayed Add SNMPv3 User dialog box, set related parameters and
click Add.
– You are advised to set MD5/SHA Password and DES/AES Password to
different values.
– MD5 is an insecure protocol. SHA is recommended. DES is an insecure
protocol. AES is recommended.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 198

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 6 Adding Devices

– For security purposes, you are advised to set Permission to Read.

– Record the User Name, MD5/SHA Password, and DES/AES Password for
using when creating a UPS2000-G on the NetEco.

Figure 6-45 Setting SNMP parameters_03

5. Click Add in NMS Address and Permission Settings.

6. In the displayed Add NMS Address Info dialog box, set related parameters
and click Add.
– Enter the IP address of the NetEco server in the NMS addr. text box.
– For security purposes, you are advised to set Permission to Read.

Figure 6-46 Adding the NMS IP address

7. Click Add under SNMP TRAP.

8. In the displayed Add SNMP Trap dialog box, set related parameters and click
Add.
– Enter the IP address of the NetEco server in the Trap Address text box.
– Set Trap port to 162.

----End

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 199

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 6 Adding Devices

6.4.5.2 Setting Monitoring Parameters for a UPS2000-H (over SNMP)

Before connecting UPS2000-H to NetEco, you should set the IP address on the
UPS2000-H, add user and set permissions on the WebUI of UPS2000.

Prerequisites
● You have obtained the IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway
information planned for the UPS2000.
● The UPS2000 is powered on.

Context
● UPS WebUIs may vary slightly depending on the UPS software version.
Perform operations based on the actual WebUI.
● Connecting the UPS2000 to the NetEco in DES and MD5 protocols poses
potential risks. Therefore, exercise caution when deciding to do so.

Procedure
Step 1 Set SNMP card parameters on the app.
1. Log in to the app. For details, see Logging In to the NetEco App.
2. On the main screen, tap Settings.
3. Tap Optional card settings and set the SNMP card IP address, SNMP card
subnet mask, and SNMP card gateway.
Step 2 Log in to the UPS2000-H WebUI.
1. On the PC with an IP address in the same network segment as the UPS2000-
H, type https://IP address of the UPS2000-H in the address box of a browser
and press Enter.
2. Enter the user name and password for logging in to the UPS2000-H and click
Login.
NOTE

The preset user name and password for the UPS2000-H are admin and Changeme,
respectively. To ensure access security, change the password after first login.
3. Set user permissions by referring to Step 3 or Step 4 based on the site
requirements.
Step 3 Add a user and set user permissions on the WebUI (WebUI 1).
1. Choose System Settings > SNMP Settings.
2. In the SNMP area, set SNMP Version to SNMPv3 and SNMP Port to 161,
and click Submit.
3. In the SNMPv3 area, click Add.
4. In the displayed SNMPv3 dialog box, set SNMPv3 parameters, and click
Confirm.
– You are advised to set MD5/SHA password and DES/AES password to
different values.
– MD5 is an insecure protocol. SHA is recommended. DES is an insecure
protocol. AES is recommended.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 200

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 6 Adding Devices

– Record the User Name, MD5/SHA password, and DES/AES password for
using when creating a UPS on the NetEco.

Figure 6-47 Setting SNMPv3 parameters

5. In the SNMP Trap area, click Add.

6. In the displayed SNMP Trap dialog box, set SNMP trap parameters, and click
Confirm.
– Enter the IP address of the NetEco server in the Trap Target Address text
box.
– Set Trap Port to 162.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 201

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 6 Adding Devices

Figure 6-48 Setting SNMP trap parameters

Step 4 Add a user and set user permissions on the WebUI (WebUI 2).
1. Choose Configure > SNMP.
2. Select SNMPv3 for SNMP version, enter 161 for SNMP port, and click
Confirm.

Figure 6-49 Setting SNMP parameters

3. Click Add in SNMP.

Figure 6-50 Setting SNMP parameters_02

4. In the displayed Add SNMPv3 User dialog box, set related parameters and
click Add.
– You are advised to set MD5/SHA Password and DES/AES Password to
different values.
– MD5 is an insecure protocol. SHA is recommended. DES is an insecure
protocol. AES is recommended.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 202

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 6 Adding Devices

– For security purposes, you are advised to set Permission to Read.

– Record the User Name, MD5/SHA Password, and DES/AES Password for
using when creating a UPS2000-G on the NetEco.

Figure 6-51 Setting SNMP parameters_03

5. Click Add in NMS Address and Permission Settings.

6. In the displayed Add NMS Address Info dialog box, set related parameters
and click Add.
– Enter the IP address of the NetEco server in the NMS addr. text box.
– For security purposes, you are advised to set Permission to Read.

Figure 6-52 Adding the NMS IP address

7. Click Add under SNMP TRAP.

8. In the displayed Add SNMP Trap dialog box, set related parameters and click
Add.
– Enter the IP address of the NetEco server in the Trap Address text box.
– Set Trap port to 162.

----End

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 203

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 6 Adding Devices

6.4.5.3 Setting UPS5000 Monitoring Parameters (over SNMP)

Before connecting the UPS5000 to the NetEco, set the IP address on the UPS5000,
and add a user and set permissions on the UPS5000 WebUI.

Prerequisites
● You have obtained the IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway planned
for the UPS5000.
● The UPS5000 is powered on.

Context
● UPS WebUIs may vary slightly depending on the UPS software version.
Perform operations based on the actual WebUI.
● The non-encryption algorithm used in UPS5000 poses potential risks.
Therefore, exercise caution when deciding to use the non-encryption
algorithm.

Procedure
Step 1 Set the IP address for the UPS5000 on the LUI.
1. Choose System Info > Settings > Comm Settings > IP Settings.
NOTE

The preset password is 000001.

2. Set IP address assign to Manual, and set IP address, Subnet mask,
Gateway, IPv6 Address, and so on.
Step 2 Access the UPS5000 WebUI.
1. On the PC with an IP address in the same network segment as the UPS5000,
type the UPS5000 IP address in the address box of a browser and press Enter.
The UPS5000 IP address is set in Step 1.
2. Enter the user name and password for logging in to the UPS5000 and click
Login.
NOTE

The preset user name and password are admin and Changeme respectively for the
UPS5000.
3. Set user permissions by referring to Step 3 or Step 4 based on the site
requirements.
Step 3 Add a user and set user permissions on the WebUI (WebUI 1).
1. Choose System Settings > SNMP Settings.
2. In the SNMP area, set SNMP Version to SNMPv3 and SNMP Port to 161,
and click Submit.
3. In the SNMPv3 area, click Add.
4. In the displayed SNMPv3 dialog box, set SNMPv3 parameters, and click
Confirm.
– You are advised to set MD5/SHA password and DES/AES password to
different values.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 204

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 6 Adding Devices

– MD5 is an insecure protocol. SHA is recommended. DES is an insecure

protocol. AES is recommended.
– Record the User Name, MD5/SHA password, and DES/AES password for
using when creating a UPS on the NetEco.

Figure 6-53 Setting SNMPv3 parameters

5. In the SNMP Trap area, click Add.

6. In the displayed SNMP Trap dialog box, set SNMP trap parameters, and click
Confirm.
– Enter the IP address of the NetEco server in the Trap Target Address text
box.
– Set Trap Port to 162.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 205

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 6 Adding Devices

Figure 6-54 Setting SNMP trap parameters

Step 4 Add a user and set user permissions on the WebUI (WebUI 2).
1. Choose Config. > Site Config..
2. In the SNMP area, set SNMP version to SNMPv3, and set SNMP port to 161.

Figure 6-55 Setting SNMP parameters

3. Click Add in SNMP.

Figure 6-56 Setting SNMP parameters_02

4. Set User name, MD5/SHA Password, and DES/AES Password for the user to
be added.
– You are advised to set MD5/SHA password and DES/AES password to
different values.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 206

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 6 Adding Devices

– MD5 is an insecure protocol. SHA is recommended. DES is an insecure

protocol. AES is recommended.
– Record the User Name, MD5/SHA password, and DES/AES password for
using when creating a UPS5000 on the NetEco.
5. After setting the SNMP information, click Submit.
6. Click Add in SNMP Trap.

Figure 6-57 Setting SNMP parameters_03

7. Set Trap Address to the IP address of the NetEco server, and set Trap Port to
162.
Step 5 (Optional) If an iBOX is configured for the UPS5000, verify that the UPS5000 and
iBOX communications addresses are unique.
1. Log in to the UPS5000 WebUI.
2. Choose System Settings > Comm. Settings > RS485 Settings or choose
Monitoring > Comm. Config. > RS485 Settings and verify that Address is set
to 1 for the UPS5000.
3. Choose System Settings > iBOX Settings > Basic Parameters or choose
Monitoring > iBOX Param. > Basic Param. and verify that iBOX logical start
addr is set to 2 for the UPS5000.

----End

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 207

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 6 Adding Devices

6.4.5.4 Setting UPS5000 Monitoring Parameters (Modbus TCP)

Before connecting the UPS5000 to the NetEco, set monitoring parameters such as
the IP address on the UPS5000.

Prerequisites
● You have obtained the IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway planned
for the UPS5000.
● UPS WebUIs may vary slightly depending on the UPS software version.
Perform operations based on the actual WebUI.
● The UPS5000 is powered on.

Context
Before connecting the UPS5000 to the NetEco, set monitoring parameters such as
the IP address on the UPS5000.

Procedure
Step 1 Set the IP address for the UPS5000 on the LUI.
1. Choose System Info > Settings > Comm Settings > IP Settings.
NOTE

The preset password is 000001.

2. Set IP address assign to Manual, and set IP address, Subnet mask,
Gateway, IPv6 Address, and so on.
Step 2 Connect a network management system over SSL or non-SSL as follows:
1. On the PC with an IP address in the same network segment as the UPS5000,
type the UPS5000 IP address in the address box of a browser and press Enter.
The UPS5000 IP address is set in Step 1. Log in to the UPS5000 WebUI.
2. Enter the user name and password for logging in to the UPS5000 and click
Login.
NOTE

The preset user name and password are admin and Changeme respectively for the
UPS5000.
3. Set UPS5000 parameters.
NOTE

– Set parameters on the WebUI based on the actual situation. For details, see
"Operation (UPS5000 WebUI 1)" or "Operation (UPS5000 WebUI 2)" in the
following table.
– A non-SSL connection has security risks. You are advised to select the secure SSL
connection.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 208

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 6 Adding Devices

Table 6-14 UPS5000 settings

Connec Operation (UPS5000 WebUI 1) Operation (UPS5000

tion WebUI 2)
Mode
(NetEc
o UI)

SSL 1. Choose System Settings > 1. Choose Monitoring >

connecti Comm Settings. The Comm Comm Settings. The
on Settings page is displayed. Comm Settings page is
2. In the ModbusTCP Settings displayed.
area, set ModbusTCP 2. In the ModbusTCP
Encryption to Enable. Settings area, set
3. Click Submit. ModbusTCP Encryption
to Enable.
4. Choose System Settings >
ModbusTCP. 3. Click Submit.
5. In the Set Authentication 4. Choose Config. > Site
Password area, set Pre-shared Config. > ModbusTCP
Password and Confirm Pre- Authentication.
shared Password. 5. Set Authentication to
6. Click Submit. Enable, and set New
Record the value of Pre-shared password and Confirm
Password in Authentication password.
Password of the added device 6. Click Submit.
on the NetEco. Record the value of
Confirm Password in
Authentication
Password of the added
device on the NetEco.

Non- 1. Choose System Settings > 1. Choose Monitoring >

SSL Comm Settings. The Comm Comm Settings. The
connecti Settings page is displayed. Comm Settings page is
on 2. In the ModbusTCP Settings displayed.
area, set ModbusTCP 2. Set ModbusTCP
Encryption to Disable. Encryption to Disable.
3. Click Submit. 3. Click Submit.

Step 3 (Optional) If an iBOX is configured for the UPS5000, verify that the UPS5000 and
iBOX communications addresses are unique.
1. Log in to the UPS5000 WebUI.
2. Choose System Settings > Comm. Settings > RS485 Settings or choose
Monitoring > Comm. Config. > RS485 Settings and verify that Address is set
to 1 for the UPS5000.
3. Choose System Settings > iBOX Settings > Basic Parameters or choose
Monitoring > iBOX Param. > Basic Param. and verify that iBOX logical start
addr is set to 2 for the UPS5000.

----End

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 209

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 6 Adding Devices

6.4.5.5 Creating a UPS on the NetEco

This section describes how to create a UPS on the NetEco.

Prerequisites
● You have the operation rights for Planning Configuration.
● You have created a management domain for the device to be added on the
Planning Configuration page.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the NetEco client.
Step 2 On the main menu, choose Device Management > Configuration > Planning
Configuration.
Step 3 Choose the management domain where you want to create a device from the
navigation tree on the left.
Step 4 In the lower-left corner of the page, click the Device tab.
Step 5 In the Device area, select UPS from the drop-down list box.
Step 6 Select the device to be added and drag its icon to the management domain.
NOTE

To delete a device, click the device and choose Delete under .

Step 7 Click the device. In the device parameter area on the right, set device parameters
according to the following table.

Table 6-15 Modbus-TCP device parameter description

Parameter Description

Managed Object Device name

Name

IP Set the IP address of the device.

Port Set this parameter to the port through which the device
connects to the collector.
The port number is 502 by default. You can modify the port
number based on requirements.

Device Address Set this parameter to the address set on the device.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 210

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 6 Adding Devices

Parameter Description

Connection Mode Indicates the connection mode of a device. You can set this
parameter to Non-SSL Connection or SSL Connection.
If you modify the connection mode on the NetEco, you
must modify the connection mode on the device WebUI
accordingly.
NOTE
● Connection Mode for the NetEco and device must be the same.
● By default, Connection Mode is set to SSL Connection for the
NetEco and device.
● A non-SSL connection has security risks. You are advised to
select the secure SSL connection.

Authentication Indicates the re-authentication password for the NetEco

password and device.
1. Click Modify.
NOTE
After the device is saved, the Modify button is displayed.
2. In the displayed dialog box, enter the New Password
and Confirm Password.
NOTE
– The default re-authentication password for the NetEco and
device is Modifyme_123.
– The device password should be consistent with the NetEco
password.
– If the password does not meet requirements, modify it on
the device.
3. Select a value for Send To Device.
NOTE
If you select YES, the re-authentication password for the NetEco
and device is changed at the same time. If you select NO, only
the re-authentication password of NetEco is changed on the
server.
4. Click OK.

Timeout Period Timeout duration for a connection test. The default value is
3s.

Table 6-16 SNMPv1/v2 device parameter description

Parameter Description

Managed Object Device name

Name

IP Set this parameter to the device IP address.

Port Set this parameter to the port number of the device. (set to
161 by default)

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 211

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 6 Adding Devices

Parameter Description

Read Community Set this parameter to the read community set on the device.
It is recommended that the community be modified every
three months.

Write Community Set this parameter to the write community set on the
device.
Modifying community per three months is advised.

NOTE

SNMPv1 and SNMPv2 are insecure. SNMPv3 is recommended because it is more secure.

Table 6-17 SNMPv3 device parameter description

Parameter Description

Managed Object Device name

Name

IP Set this parameter to the device IP address.

Port Set this parameter to the port number of the device. (set to
161 by default)

Security Name Set this parameter to the user name added in SNMPv3 on
the device.

Authentication Set this parameter to the authentication protocol set on the

Protocol device. The default selection is SHA.
Support SHA and MD5 agreement.
NOTE
MD5 is an insecure protocol. SHA is recommended.

Authentication Set this parameter to the authentication algorithm key

Password configured on the subdevice.
Value range: a–z, A–Z, 0–9, _ (8–15 characters, at least two
types of characters, different from the user name or its
reverse)

Privacy Protocol Set this parameter to the privacy protocol set on the device.
The default selection is AES128.
Support CBC_DES, AES128, AES192, and AES256
agreement.
NOTE
DES is an insecure protocol. AES is recommended.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 212

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 6 Adding Devices

Parameter Description

Privacy Password Set this parameter to the proprietary protocol key

configured on the device.
Value range: a–z, A–Z, 0–9, _ (8–15 characters, at least two
types of characters, different from the user name or its
reverse)
NOTE
You are advised to set Authentication Password and Privacy
Password to different values.

Step 8 Click on the toolbar to save the device information.

Step 9 Click Connection test to start the connection test.
NOTE

For UPS, if a battery monitor unit (BMU) is connected, the BMU will be automatically created.

----End

6.4.6 Adding a PDU

6.4.6.1 Setting PDU8000 Monitoring Parameters (SNMP)

Prerequisites
● You have obtained the IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway planned
for the PDU8000.
● The PDU8000 is powered on.

Context
● Before connecting the PDU8000 to the NetEco over SNMP, set monitoring
parameters, such as the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway, on the
PDU8000.
● The menus on the LCD vary with the PDU8000 version.

Procedure
Step 1 Tap Settings on the PDU8000 home screen.

Step 2 Enter the PDU8000 user name and password and tap .
NOTE

The preset user name and password for the PDU8000 are admin and 000001 respectively.
To ensure access security, change the password upon the first login.

Step 3 Tap Communication.

1. Check that IP address assign is set to Manual.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 213

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 6 Adding Devices

2. Set IP address, Subnet mask, and Gateway as planned.

3. Tap SNMP Configuration to enter the setting screen.

Figure 6-58 SNMP Configuration

4. On the SNMP Configuration screen, set SNMP Version to SNMPv3, retain

the default value 161 for SNMP Port, and tap Submit.
5. Tap Add under SNMPv3 User. Set User Name. Set Auth. protocol to SHA,
and specify MD5/SHA and Confirm Password. Set Private protocol to AES,
and specify DES/AES and Confirm Password. After setting the parameters,

tap .
6. Select Privacy protocol to AES, specify DES/AES and Confirm Password, and

tap .
7. On the Trap Config. screen, tap Add, set Trap Des. Address to the IP address
of the NetEco server and set Trap Port to 162. Select SNMP Version to

SNMPv3. After setting the parameters, tap .

----End

6.4.6.2 Setting PDU8000 Monitoring Parameters (Modbus TCP)

Prerequisites
● You have obtained the IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway planned
for the PDU8000.
● The PDU8000 is powered on.

Context
Before connecting the PDU8000 to the NetEco, set monitoring parameters such as
the IP address on the PDU8000.

Procedure
Step 1 Tap Settings on the PDU8000 home screen.

Step 2 Enter the PDU8000 user name and password and tap .

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 214

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 6 Adding Devices

NOTE

The preset user name and password for the PDU8000 are admin and 000001 respectively.
To ensure access security, change the password upon the first login.

Step 3 Choose Communication.

1. Set IP address assign to Manual, and set IP address, Subnet mask, and
Gateway.
2. Set SSL to Enable and ModbusTCPcertification to Enable.

----End

6.4.6.3 Creating a PDU on the NetEco

This section describes how to create a PDU on the NetEco.

Prerequisites
● You have the operation rights for Planning Configuration.
● You have created a management domain for the device to be added on the
Planning Configuration page.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the NetEco client.

Step 2 On the main menu, choose Device Management > Configuration > Planning
Configuration.

Step 3 Choose the management domain where you want to create a device from the
navigation tree on the left.

Step 4 In the lower-left corner of the page, click the Device tab.

Step 5 In the Device area, select PDU from the drop-down list box.

Step 6 Select the device to be added and drag its icon to the management domain.
NOTE

To delete a device, click the device and choose Delete under .

Step 7 Click the device. In the device parameter area on the right, set device parameters
according to the following table.

Table 6-18 Modbus-TCP device parameter description

Parameter Description

Managed Object Device name

Name

IP Device IP address

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 215

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 6 Adding Devices

Parameter Description

Port Device port number

The default port number is 502. You can change the port
number as required.

Device Address Address set on the device

Connection Mode Connection mode of a device. You can set this parameter to
Non-SSL Connection or SSL Connection.
If you modify the connection mode on the NetEco, you
must modify the connection mode on the device WebUI
accordingly.
NOTE
● The connection mode settings for the NetEco and device must
be the same.
● By default, Connection Mode is set to SSL Connection for the
NetEco and device.
A non-SSL connection has security risks. You are advised to
select the secure SSL connection.

Timeout Period Timeout duration for a connection test. The default value is
3s.

Table 6-19 SNMPv3 device parameter description

Parameter Description

Managed Object Device name

Name

IP Set this parameter to the device IP address.

Port Set this parameter to the port number of the device. (set to
161 by default)

Security Name Set this parameter to the user name added in SNMPv3 on
the device.

Authentication Set this parameter to the authentication protocol set on the

Protocol device. The default selection is SHA.
Support SHA and MD5 agreement.
NOTE
MD5 is an insecure protocol. SHA is recommended.

Authentication Set this parameter to the authentication algorithm key

Password configured on the subdevice.
Value range: a–z, A–Z, 0–9, _ (8–15 characters, at least two
types of characters, different from the user name or its
reverse)

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 216

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 6 Adding Devices

Parameter Description

Privacy Protocol Set this parameter to the privacy protocol set on the device.
The default selection is AES128.
Support CBC_DES, AES128, AES192, and AES256
agreement.
NOTE
DES is an insecure protocol. AES is recommended.

Privacy Password Set this parameter to the proprietary protocol key

configured on the device.
Value range: a–z, A–Z, 0–9, _ (8–15 characters, at least two
types of characters, different from the user name or its
reverse)
NOTE
You are advised to set Authentication Password and Privacy
Password to different values.

Step 8 Click on the toolbar to save the device information.

Step 9 Click Connection test to start the connection test.

----End

6.4.7 Adding an MTS9604B-N20B1/MTS9606B-N20C2 Power

Supply

6.4.7.1 Creating a MTS9604B-N20B1/MTS9606B-N20C2 Power Supply on the

NetEco
This section describes how to create a MTS9604B-N20B1/MTS9606B-N20C2 power
supply on the NetEco.

Prerequisites
● You have the operation rights for Planning Configuration.
● You have created a management domain for the device to be added on the
Planning Configuration page.
● The adapter of the MTS9604B-N20B1/MTS9606B-N20C2 power supply has
been installed.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the NetEco client.
Step 2 On the main menu, choose Device Management > Configuration > Planning
Configuration.
Step 3 Choose the management domain where you want to create a device from the
navigation tree on the left.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 217

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 6 Adding Devices

Step 4 In the lower-left corner of the page, click the Device tab.
Step 5 In the Device area, select PDU from the drop-down list box.
Step 6 Select the device to be added and drag its icon to the management domain.
NOTE

To delete a device, click the device and choose Delete under .

Step 7 Click the device. In the device parameter area on the right, set device parameters
according to the following table.

Table 6-20 SNMPv3 device parameter description

Parameter Description

Managed Object Device name

Name

IP Set this parameter to the device IP address.

Port Set this parameter to the port number of the device. (set to
161 by default)

Security Name Set this parameter to the user name added in SNMPv3 on
the device.

Authentication Set this parameter to the authentication protocol set on the

Protocol device. The default selection is SHA.
Support SHA and MD5 agreement.
NOTE
MD5 is an insecure protocol. SHA is recommended.

Authentication Set this parameter to the authentication algorithm key

Password configured on the subdevice.
Value range: a–z, A–Z, 0–9, _ (8–15 characters, at least two
types of characters, different from the user name or its
reverse)

Privacy Protocol Set this parameter to the privacy protocol set on the device.
The default selection is AES128.
Support CBC_DES, AES128, AES192, and AES256
agreement.
NOTE
DES is an insecure protocol. AES is recommended.

Privacy Password Set this parameter to the proprietary protocol key

configured on the device.
Value range: a–z, A–Z, 0–9, _ (8–15 characters, at least two
types of characters, different from the user name or its
reverse)
NOTE
You are advised to set Authentication Password and Privacy
Password to different values.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 218

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 6 Adding Devices

Step 8 Click on the toolbar to save the device information.

Step 9 Click Connection test to start the connection test.

----End

6.4.8 Adding a SmartLi

6.4.8.1 Setting SmartLi Monitoring Parameters (Modbus TCP)

Before connecting the SmartLi to the NetEco, set monitoring parameters such as
the IP address on the SmartLi.

Prerequisites
● You have obtained the IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway planned
for the SmartLi.
● The SmartLi is powered on.

Context
SmartLi model: SmartLi-512V-80AH-F-01

Procedure
Step 1 On the SmartLi LCD home screen, tap Settings.
Step 2 Enter the SmartLi password.
NOTE

The preset password is 000001.

Step 3 Choose Communication.

1. Set IP address assign to Manual, and set IP address, Subnet mask, and
Gateway.
2. Set ModbusTCP encryption to Enable.
NOTE

If Modbus TCP encryption is disabled on the device, SSL connection must be disabled
on the NetEco.

----End

6.4.8.2 Creating a SmartLi on the NetEco

This section describes how to create a SmartLi on the NetEco.

Prerequisites
● You have the operation rights for Planning Configuration.
● You have created a management domain for the device to be added on the
Planning Configuration page.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 219

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 6 Adding Devices

● The SmartLi adapter has been installed on the NetEco.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the NetEco client.

Step 2 On the main menu, choose Device Management > Configuration > Planning
Configuration.

Step 3 Choose the management domain where you want to create a device from the
navigation tree on the left.

Step 4 In the lower-left corner of the page, click the Device tab.

Step 5 In the Device area, select Battery from the drop-down list box.

Step 6 Select the device to be added and drag its icon to the management domain.
NOTE

To delete a device, click the device and choose Delete under .

Step 7 Click the device. In the device parameter area on the right, set device parameters
according to the following table.

Table 6-21 SmartLi parameter description

Parameter Description

Managed Object Device name

Name

IP Device IP address

Port Set this parameter to the port number of the device. (set to
502 by default)

Device Address Set this parameter to the address set on the device.

Connection Mode Connection mode of the device. You can set this parameter
to Non-SSL Connection or SSL Connection.
If you modify the connection mode on the NetEco, you
must modify the connection mode on the device WebUI
accordingly.
NOTE
● The connection mode settings for the NetEco and device must
be the same.
● By default, Connection Mode is set to SSL Connection for the
NetEco and device.
● A non-SSL connection has security risks. You are advised to
select the secure SSL connection.

Timeout Period Timeout duration for a connection test. The default value is
3s.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 220

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 6 Adding Devices

Parameter Description

Authentication Re-authentication password for the NetEco and device. The

Password default value is Modifyme_123.

Step 8 Click on the toolbar to save the device information.

Step 9 Click Connection test to start the connection test.

----End

6.4.9 Adding a CO Power Module

6.4.9.1 Setting Monitoring Parameters for the TP483000D and TP482000B

Before connecting a TP483000D or TP482000B to the NetEco, set the IP address
on the TP483000D or TP482000B.

Prerequisites
● You have obtained the IP address planned for the TP483000D or TP482000B.
● The TP483000D or TP482000B has been powered on and is running properly.

Procedure
Step 1 On the TP483000D or TP482000B LCD, choose Setting Wizard > Comm Para.
Step 2 Set IP Address, Subnet Mask, and Gateway based on the planned data.

----End

6.4.9.2 Creating a Power Module on the NetEco

This section describes how to create a CO power module on the NetEco.

Prerequisites
● You have the operation rights for Planning Configuration.
● You have created a management domain for the device to be added on the
Planning Configuration page.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the NetEco client.
Step 2 On the main menu, choose Device Management > Configuration > Planning
Configuration.
Step 3 Choose the management domain where you want to create a device from the
navigation tree on the left.
Step 4 In the lower-left corner of the page, click the Device tab.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 221

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 6 Adding Devices

Step 5 In the Device area, select PDU from the drop-down list box.

Step 6 Select the device to be added and drag its icon to the management domain.
NOTE

To delete a device, click the device and choose Delete under .

Step 7 Click the device. In the device parameter area on the right, set device parameters
according to the following table.

Table 6-22 SNMPv3 device parameter description

Parameter Description

Managed Object Device name

Name

IP Set this parameter to the device IP address.

Port Set this parameter to the port number of the device. (set to
161 by default)

Security Name Set this parameter to the user name added in SNMPv3 on
the device.

Authentication Set this parameter to the authentication protocol set on the

Protocol device. The default selection is SHA.
Support SHA and MD5 agreement.
NOTE
MD5 is an insecure protocol. SHA is recommended.

Authentication Set this parameter to the authentication algorithm key

Password configured on the subdevice.
Value range: a–z, A–Z, 0–9, _ (8–15 characters, at least two
types of characters, different from the user name or its
reverse)

Privacy Protocol Set this parameter to the privacy protocol set on the device.
The default selection is AES128.
Support CBC_DES, AES128, AES192, and AES256
agreement.
NOTE
DES is an insecure protocol. AES is recommended.

Privacy Password Set this parameter to the proprietary protocol key

configured on the device.
Value range: a–z, A–Z, 0–9, _ (8–15 characters, at least two
types of characters, different from the user name or its
reverse)
NOTE
You are advised to set Authentication Password and Privacy
Password to different values.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 222

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 6 Adding Devices

Step 8 Click on the toolbar to save the device information.

Step 9 Click Connection test to start the connection test.

----End

6.4.10 Adding an rPDU

6.4.10.1 Setting RPDU_HUAWEI_PDU2000-32-1PH-20-4-M2 Monitoring

Parameters

Prerequisites
● You have obtained the IP address (factory default: 192.168.1.45) of the
PDU2000.
● You have installed the hardware and powered on the PDU2000.
● A PC with an IP address in the same network segment as that of the
PDU2000 is prepared, and the PC has connected to the PDU2000 over a
switch.
● You have obtained the planned IP address and subnet mask of the PDU2000.

Context
Set the PDU2000 IP address before you connect the PDU2000 to the NetEco.

Procedure
Step 1 Use a PC with an IP address in the same network segment as that of the
PDU2000. Enter https://192.168.1.45 in the address bar, and press Enter on the
keyboard.

Step 2 Enter monitoring parameters of the PDU2000. For the input method, see Table
6-23. For parameters not mentioned in the table, retain the default value.

Table 6-23 Remarks

Parameter Setting Method

IP address Enter the planned PDU2000 IP

address.

Subnet mask Enter the planned PDU2000 subnet

mask.

Gateway Enter the planned PDU2000 gateway.

Address reporting the SNMP Enter the IP address of the NetEco the
PDU2000 connects to.

----End

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 223

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 6 Adding Devices

6.4.10.2 Creating an rPDU on the NetEco

This section describes how to create an rPDU on the NetEco.

Prerequisites
● You have the operation rights for Planning Configuration.
● You have created a management domain for the device to be added on the
Planning Configuration page.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the NetEco client.
Step 2 On the main menu, choose Device Management > Configuration > Planning
Configuration.
Step 3 Choose the management domain where you want to create a device from the
navigation tree on the left.
Step 4 In the lower-left corner of the page, click the Device tab.
Step 5 In the Device area, select RPDU from the drop-down list box.
Step 6 Select the device to be added and drag its icon to the management domain.
NOTE

● If the management domain is a rack or DDF, click the management domain and choose
Design under . The page for adding a device is displayed.

● To delete a device, click the device and choose Delete under .

Step 7 Click the device. In the device parameter area on the right, set device parameters
according to the following table.

Table 6-24 SNMPv1/v2 device parameter description

Parameter Description

Managed Object Device name

Name

IP Set this parameter to the device IP address.

Port Set this parameter to the port number of the device. (set to
161 by default)

Read Community Set this parameter to the read community set on the device.
It is recommended that the community be modified every
three months.

Write Community Set this parameter to the write community set on the
device.
Modifying community per three months is advised.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 224

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 6 Adding Devices

NOTE

SNMPv1 and SNMPv2 are insecure. SNMPv3 is recommended because it is more secure.

Table 6-25 SNMPv3 device parameter description

Parameter Description

Managed Object Device name

Name

IP Set this parameter to the device IP address.

Port Set this parameter to the port number of the device. (set to
161 by default)

Security Name Set this parameter to the user name added in SNMPv3 on
the device.

Authentication Set this parameter to the authentication protocol set on the

Protocol device. The default selection is SHA.
Support SHA and MD5 agreement.
NOTE
MD5 is an insecure protocol. SHA is recommended.

Authentication Set this parameter to the authentication algorithm key

Password configured on the subdevice.
Value range: a–z, A–Z, 0–9, _ (8–15 characters, at least two
types of characters, different from the user name or its
reverse)

Privacy Protocol Set this parameter to the privacy protocol set on the device.
The default selection is AES128.
Support CBC_DES, AES128, AES192, and AES256
agreement.
NOTE
DES is an insecure protocol. AES is recommended.

Privacy Password Set this parameter to the proprietary protocol key

configured on the device.
Value range: a–z, A–Z, 0–9, _ (8–15 characters, at least two
types of characters, different from the user name or its
reverse)
NOTE
You are advised to set Authentication Password and Privacy
Password to different values.

Step 8 Click on the toolbar to save the device information.

Step 9 Click Connection test to start the connection test.

----End

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 225

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 6 Adding Devices

6.5 Scenarios for Connecting the ECC800-Pro Outside

the Smart Module

6.5.1 Setting and Adding the ECC800-Pro Collector

6.5.1.1 Preparations and Login

Prerequisites
● Supported operating system: Windows 7 and later versions
● It is recommended that the screen resolution be 1366 x 768 or higher.
● Browser: Chrome, Firefox 32, Internet Explorer 11 or later

Procedure
Step 1 Connect a network cable between the PC network port and the WAN1 port
(protected by a security mechanism) on the ECC800-Pro.

Table 6-26 Default IP addresses for the WAN and LAN ports on the ECC800-Pro

Port Default IP Address

WAN1 192.168.8.10

WAN2 192.168.0.10
192.168.248.10 (FusionModule800)

LAN1 and LAN2 192.168.248.10

NOTICE

● In ECC800 V100R002C10 and earlier versions, the default IP address of port

WAN_1 is 192.168.1.10.
● The WAN1 port IP address cannot be set to an IP address in any of the
following network segments: 192.168.0.x, 192.168.245.x, 192.168.246.x and
192.168.248.x.
● IP addresses for the WAN1 and WAN2 ports should not be set in the same
network segment.
● In some customized scenarios, the default IP address for the WAN2 port is
192.168.248.10. The default value may vary.
● WAN ports support the Internet access and LAN ports support the intranet
access. Connect the PC network port to the WAN1 port or LAN port on the
ECC800-Pro based on the access network.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 226

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 6 Adding Devices

Step 2 Configure the PC IP address and the WAN1 IP address in the same network
segment.
If the WAN1 port IP address is 192.168.8.10, subnet mask is 255.255.255.0, and
default gateway is 192.168.8.1, set the PC IP address to 192.168.8.12, subnet mask
to 255.255.255.0, and default gateway to 192.168.8.1.
Step 3 Set LAN parameters.
NOTE

● If the ECC800-Pro connects to a LAN and a proxy server has been selected, perform Step
3.3 and Step 3.4.
● If the ECC800-Pro connects to the Internet, and the PC in a LAN accesses the Internet
over a proxy server, do not perform Step 3.3 and Step 3.4. Otherwise, you will fail to
access the ECC800-Pro.
1. Open the Internet Explorer and choose Tools > Internet Options.
2. Click the Advanced tab and select Use TLS1.1 and Use TLS1.2.
3. (Optional) Click the Connections tab and select LAN settings.
4. (Optional) On Proxy server, clear Use a proxy server for your LAN.
5. Click OK.
Step 4 Set Internet Explorer parameters.
1. When you use Internet Explorer for access, set Internet Explorer to ensure the
normal display of and operations on the WebUI. Choose Tools >
Compatibility View, and add the web access address to the compatibility
view.
2. Choose Tools > Internet options > Security, choose Add the ECC800-Pro IP
address to the list of trusted sites.

Figure 6-59 Adding an address

3. Enable file download and set the security level of the trusted site to low.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 227

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 6 Adding Devices

Figure 6-60 Setting parameters

NOTE

When switching between different versions of the ECC800-Pro on your PC, you are
advised to clear the historical Internet Explorer cache. Failing to do so may cause some
information missed or exception after login. The following provides the details:
1. Open Internet Explorer and choose Tools > Internet Options > General.
2. Select Delete browsing history on exit and click Delete.
3. In the Delete Browsing History dialog box, select all options except Password,
and click Delete.

Step 5 Log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI.

1. Enter https://monitoring IP address (such as monitoring IP address https://
192.168.8.10) in the address box of the browser, and then press Enter to
enter the WebUI login page.

Figure 6-61 WebUI login page

2. On the login page, enter the preset user name admin and preset password
Changeme, set the language, and click Log In.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 228

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 6 Adding Devices

NOTE

– After the first login, change the password in time to ensure account security and
prevent unauthorized network attacks, such as data tampering. Huawei will not be
liable for any security issues caused by your failure to change the preset password
in time or password loss after changing.
– Change the password of the user account periodically.
– Record and keep the password properly. If you forgot the password, you will be
unable to log in to the WebUI.
– When the event notification is configured and the password retrieval mode is
configured under user management, the password can be retrieved.
– An account is logged out due to timeout if no operation is performed within 10
minutes after system login.
– A maximum of three users can log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI at the same time.

----End

6.5.1.2 Setting the ECC800-Pro IP Address

Before connecting the ECC800-Pro to the NetEco, configure the IP address, subnet
mask, and default gateway for the ECC800-Pro.

Prerequisites
● You have obtained the IP address (192.168.8.10 by default) of the ECC800-Pro.
● The browser (Internet Explorer 11 or later, Firefox, or Chrome) for logging in
to the ECC800-Pro WebUI is available.
● You have installed hardware for the ECC800-Pro and powered it on.
● A PC with an IP address in the same network segment as that of the ECC800-
Pro is connected to the ECC800-Pro over a LAN switch.
● You have obtained the IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway planned
for the ECC800-Pro.

Context
A unified IP address (192.168.8.10) is configured for all ECC800-Pros before
delivery. Reconfigure an IP address for the ECC800-Pro as required to ensure
normal communication with a server.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI as an administrator.
Step 2 Choose System Settings > System Parameters > Monitor IP, and change the IP
address, subnet mask, and default gateway of the ECC800-Pro based on the
parameters planned for the ECC800-Pro collector, as shown in Figure 6-62.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 229

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 6 Adding Devices

Figure 6-62 Changing the ECC800-Pro IP address

Step 3 Click Submit.

----End

6.5.1.3 Setting the ECC800-Pro System Type

Prerequisites
● You have obtained the IP address (192.168.8.10 by default) of the ECC800-Pro.
● The browser (Internet Explorer 11 or later, Firefox, or Chrome) for logging in
to the ECC800-Pro WebUI is available.
● You have installed hardware for the ECC800-Pro and powered it on.
● A PC with an IP address in the same network segment as that of the ECC800-
Pro is connected to the ECC800-Pro over a LAN switch.
● You have obtained the IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway planned
for the ECC800-Pro.

Context
When connecting the ECC800-Pro outside the smart module to the NetEco, you
need to set the system type to General.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI as an administrator.
Step 2 Choose System > System Parameters > Site Configuration, set System type to
General, and click Submit.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 230

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 6 Adding Devices

Figure 6-63 Setting the system type

----End

6.5.1.4 Setting RS485 Parameters for the ECC800-Pro Collector

Prerequisites
● You have obtained the IP address and login user name and password for the
ECC800-Pro collector.
● A PC with an IP address in the same network segment as the ECC800-Pro
collector is prepared, and the PC has been connected to the ECC800-Pro
collector over a switch.

Context
To ensure the normal connection between the ECC800-Pro collector and devices,
properly set the RS485 parameters for the ECC800-Pro collector, such as
BaudRate, DataBit, StopBit and Parity. Ensure these parameters stay consistent
with those of the devices.

This section describes how to set RS485 port parameters for the COM1 port on the
ECC800-Pro.

Procedure
Step 1 Set RS485 port parameters on the WebUI of the ECC800-Pro collector.
1. Use a PC, enter https://XX.XX.XX.XX in the address bar to log in to the WebUI
of the ECC800-Pro collector.
NOTE

– XX.XX.XX.XX indicates the IP address of the collector.

– To ensure the security of data transmission, the NetEco transmits data after
encrypting it over the Secure Sockets Layer (SSL).
2. Choose Monitoring > System > ECC800 > Running Parameters.
3. Click Unhide All Advanced Signals.
4. Click COM Port Parameters.
5. Select a value from the Baud rate, Data bit, Stop bit, and Parity drop-down
list boxes, and click Submit, as shown in Figure 6-64.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 231

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 6 Adding Devices

Figure 6-64 Setting RS485 port parameters

Step 2 Choose System > NMS Application > Transparent Transmission Channel and
confirm the corresponding port of the ECC800-Pro collector.

When creating an RS485 device on the NetEco, you need to specify the port
number corresponding to the ECC800-Pro RS485 port to which the device is
connected.

Figure 6-65 Transparent Transmission Channel

Table 6-27 Mapping between ECC800-Pro ports and port numbers

COM Port COM1 COM2 COM3 COM4

Port Number 3211 3212 3213 3214

If a device is connected to a COM port on the UIM20A expansion module, the port
number is displayed on the WebUI after transparent transmission is enabled for
the COM port and the configuration is saved. For example, the port number of
COM1 on UIM1 is 3215 in Figure 6-65.

NOTE

● An ECC800-Pro can connect to a maximum of four UIM20A expansion modules with the
transparent transmission function.
● A UIM20A expansion module provides a maximum of eight COM ports with the
transparent transmission function.
● If the port is set for the first time, you are prompted to set an authentication
password. On the Set Authentication Password tab page, set
Authentication password and Confirm authentication password and click
Submit.
NOTE

Enable Security Authentication is set to Enable by default. If so, an authentication

password must be set. If Enable Security Authentication is set to Disable, there is no
need to set an authentication password but this is risky.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 232

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 6 Adding Devices

● If the port has been used, you will be prompted that the transparent
transmission function cannot be enabled and you need to select an idle port.

----End

6.5.1.5 Setting NetEco Parameters

Procedure
Step 1 Apply for a fixed IP address to the equipment room network administrator.

Step 2 Sett ECC800-Pro communications parameters.

● (WAN1 port networking) On the ECC800-Pro WebUI, set the IP address,
subnet mask, and default gateway, and click Submit.

Table 6-28 IP parameters

Path Paramete Default Setting

r Value

System IP 192.168.8. Set this parameter based on the IP

Settings > 10 address assigned by the network
System administrator.
Paramete
rs > Subnet 255.255.25 Set this parameter based on the
Monitor mask 5.0 subnet mask assigned by the
IP > network administrator.
WAN_1 Default 192.168.8. Set this parameter based on the
gateway 1 default gateway address assigned by
the network administrator.

● (4G networking) Set mobile data parameters on the ECC800-Pro WebUI.

Table 6-29 Mobile data

Path Paramete Default Setting

r Value

Choose Mobile Disable Set this parameter to Enable and

System data click Submit.
Settings > control
System
Paramete
rs >
Mobile
Data.

Step 3 Set NetEco communications parameters and authentication password on the

ECC800-Pro WebUI.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 233

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 6 Adding Devices

Table 6-30 NetEco parameters

Path Parameter Default Setting

Value

System Server IP 192.168.8. IP address of the primary NetEco

Settings > 11 server
NMS NOTE
Application The NetEco IP address and the ECC800-
> NetEco > Pro IP address must be configured in
Communicat the same network to ensure normal
connection between the NetEco and
ion
the ECC800-Pro.
Parameters
Port number 31220 31220

Network port WAN_1 WAN_1

for link setup

Table 6-31 Setting an authentication password

Path Parameter Default Setting

Value

System Authenticatio Modifyme Set this parameter based on

Settings > n password _123 customer requirements.
NMS NOTE
Application Requirements for setting passwords:
> NetEco > 'a~z','A~Z','0~9','~!@#^*_={}:,./?-`
Set $'(8-32 characters that include at least
three of the following types: lowercase
Authenticati
letters, uppercase letters, digits, and
on Password special characters)

Confirm - -
authenticatio
n password

Step 4 Click Submit.

----End

6.5.1.6 Creating an ECC800-Pro Collector on the NetEco

This section describes how to create an ECC800-Pro collector on the NetEco.

Prerequisites
● You have created a smart module or container in Planning Configuration.
● The IP address of the NetEco connected has been configured on the ECC800-
Pro WebUI.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 234

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 6 Adding Devices

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the NetEco client.
Step 2 On the main menu, choose Device Management > Configuration > Planning
Configuration.
Step 3 Choose the management domain where you want to create a device from the
navigation tree on the left.

Step 4 Click in the upper-left corner of the toolbar.

Step 5 Click Access in the Operation column. The Device Integration dialog box is
displayed.
Step 6 In the Device Integration dialog box, add the ECC800 to the specified
management domain.

Figure 6-66 Adding the ECC800-Pro by automatic discovery

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 235

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 6 Adding Devices

NOTE

● There is no requirement on the type of management domain for connecting the ECC800-Pro
whose system type is General.
● The ECC800-Pros whose system type is General can be deployed in different management
domains. In equipment room scenario, such ECC800-Pros can be deployed on the same floor.
In a container scenario, such ECC800-Pros can be deployed in the same container.
● Multiple ECC800-Pros whose system type is General can be connected to the same
management domain.
● Click OK, and view the task information, including Type, Device Name, Region, Progress,
Status, Start Time, End Time, and Information in the displayed Progress page.
● After the ECC800-Pro is bound to a smart module, you can view the ECC800-Pro in the
corresponding module on the Planning Configuration page, or configure Management
Info and Asset Information for the device as required.

Step 7 Access the management domain and ECC800-Pro devices based on the site
requirements.
Drag a device to the corresponding U position in the cabinet.

Figure 6-67 ECC800-Pro device

Step 8 Select the device icon, and configure parameters for the device in the right pane
based on actual conditions.
NOTE

Names of devices connected through ECC800-Pro:

● For devices that are synchronized to the NetEco through the ECC800-Pro for the first
time, their names are different on the NetEco and web-based ECC800-Pro client and are
all the default names.
● The modification of the device name on the ECC800-Pro web client will be synchronized
to the NetEco.

Step 9 Click on the toolbar to save the device information.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 236

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 6 Adding Devices

NOTE

After the ECC800-Pro device is bound, select the ECC800-Pro device in the left navigation tree.
Then, change the authentication password in the Management Info area so that the password
on the ECC800-Pro WebUI is the same as that on the NetEco for the ECC800-Pro to connect to
the NetEco properly. The preset authentication password for the ECC800-Pro device is
Modifyme_123.
Perform the following operations on the Modify page:
1. Enter the new password in the New password and Confirm password text boxes.
2. Perform the following operations as required in the Send To Device column.
If YES is selected, change and synchronize the authentication passwords for the ECC800-Pro
and ECC800-Pro WebUI synchronized on the server so that the authentication passwords on
both sides are the same.
If NO is selected, change the authentication password for the ECC800-Pro synchronized on
the server.
3. Click OK.
You are advised to change the password once every three months.

Step 10 You can perform the following operations after clicking the device icon:

● Choose Manage under to view View.

● To delete a device, select the device and click Delete under .

----End

6.5.1.7 Setting the Transparent Transmission Function for the ECC800-Pro

Collector
This section describes how to set the transparent transmission function for the
ECC800-Pro collector.

Context
● Using the transparent transmission function, the NMS can directly manage
southbound components that are not monitored by the ECC800-Pro.
● A device connected to the COM port on the ECC800-Pro or UIM20A expansion
module can be connected to the NetEco using the transparent transmission
function.
● In this example, the COM2 port of the ECC800-Pro is used for transparent
transmission.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI as an administrator.
Step 2 Choose System Settings > NMS Application > Transparent Transmission
Channel.
Step 3 In the Transparent Transmission of Local COM Ports area, set COM2(Port:
3212) to Enable and click Submit.
NOTE

Mapping relationship: COM1 corresponds to port 3211, COM2 port 3212, COM3 port 3213, and
COM4 port 3214.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 237

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 6 Adding Devices

● If the port is set for the first time, you are prompted to set an authentication
password. In the Set Authentication Password area, set Authentication
password and Confirm authentication password and click Submit.
NOTE

Enable Security Authentication is set to Enable by default. If so, an authentication

password must be set. If Enable Security Authentication is set to Disable, there is no
need to set an authentication password but this is risky.
● If the port has been used, you will be prompted that the transparent
transmission function cannot be enabled and you need to select an idle port.

Step 4 Log in to the NetEco WebUI as an administrator.

Step 5 Choose Device Management > Configuration > Planning Configuration.

Step 6 Choose the management domain where you want to create a device from the
navigation tree on the left.
NOTE

● Ensure that the ECC800-Pro connected to the device has been synchronized to the
NetEco.
● Ensure that the management domain to add the device is the management domain or
sub-management domain of the ECC800-Pro.

Step 7 (Optional) If the management domain is a rack, click the management domain
and choose Design under . The page for adding a device is displayed.
Otherwise, skip this step.

Step 8 In the lower-left corner of the page, click the Device tab.

Step 9 In the Device area, select Sensor from the drop-down list box.

In this example, a Polymer temperature and humidity (T/H) sensor is added in the
equipment room of the root node. Select the device to be added and drag its icon
to the management domain.

Step 10 Click the device. In the device parameter area on the right, set device parameters.
● IP Address indicates the ECC800-Pro login IP address.
● Port indicates the ECC800-Pro COM2 port (3212).
● Device Address indicates the Polymer T/H sensor address.

Step 11 Click on the toolbar to save the device information.

Step 12 On the main menu, choose Device Management > Configuration > Device
Integration.

Step 13 In the navigation tree on the left, choose Transparent Transmission Channel
Management.

Step 14 Click Modify after selecting the IP address of the ECC800-Pro connected to the
NMS.

Step 15 In the Modify dialog box, set Connection Mode.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 238

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 6 Adding Devices

Table 6-32 Connection modes

Connection Mode Description

Compatible ● On the ECC800-Pro WebUI, set Enable Security

Authentication to Disable.
● In transparent transmission channel management
settings, the compatibility mode has security
risks. You are advised to select the security
protocol mode.

Security protocol Enter the authentication password set on the

ECC800-Pro WebUI.

Step 16 After the setting is complete, click OK.

----End

6.5.1.8 Setting Transparent Transmission for the UIM20A Expansion Module

on the ECC800-Pro WebUI
This section describes how to set the transparent transmission function for the
UIM20A expansion module.

Context
● Using the transparent transmission function, the NMS can directly manage
southbound components that are not monitored by the ECC800-Pro.
● A device connected to the COM port on the UIM20A expansion module can
be connected to the NetEco using the transparent transmission function.
● In this example, the COM1 port on UIM20A expansion module 1 is used for
transparent transmission.
● The UIM20A expansion module has been connected to the ECC800-Pro.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI as an administrator.
Step 2 Choose System Settings > NMS Application > Transparent Transmission
Channel.
Step 3 In the Transparent Transmission of UIM COM Ports area, click Add.
Step 4 Select UIM1 from the UIM drop-down list box, select Enable from the COM1Port
drop-down list box, and click to Submit.

Figure 6-68 Enabling transparent transmission for a UIM COM port

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 239

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 6 Adding Devices

NOTE

After transparent transmission is enabled for the COM1 port, the port number 3215 is
displayed on the ECC800-Pro WebUI. Record the value.
● If the port is set for the first time, you are prompted to set an authentication
password. On the Set Authentication Password tab page, set
Authentication password and Confirm authentication password and click
Submit.
NOTE

Enable Security Authentication is set to Enable by default. If so, an authentication

password must be set. If Enable Security Authentication is set to Disable, there is no
need to set an authentication password but this is risky.
● If the port has been used, you will be prompted that the transparent
transmission function cannot be enabled and you need to select an idle port.
Step 5 Log in to the NetEco WebUI as an administrator.
Step 6 Choose Device Management > Configuration > Planning Configuration.
Step 7 Choose the management domain where you want to create a device from the
navigation tree on the left.
NOTE

● Ensure that the ECC800-Pro connected to the device has been synchronized to the
NetEco.
● Ensure that the management domain to add the device is the management domain or
sub-management domain of the ECC800-Pro.

Step 8 (Optional) If the management domain is a rack, click the management domain
and choose Design under . The page for adding a device is displayed.
Otherwise, skip this step.
Step 9 In the lower-left corner of the page, click the Device tab.
Step 10 In the Device area, select Sensor from the drop-down list box.
In this example, a Polymer temperature and humidity (T/H) sensor is added in the
equipment room of the root node. Select the device to be added and drag its icon
to the management domain.
Step 11 Click the device. In the device parameter area on the right, set device parameters.
● IP Address indicates the ECC800-Pro login IP address.
● Port indicates the ECC800-Pro COM2 port (3212).
● Device Address indicates the Polymer T/H sensor address.

Step 12 Click on the toolbar to save the device information.

Step 13 On the main menu, choose Device Management > Configuration > Device
Integration.
Step 14 In the navigation tree on the left, choose Transparent Transmission Channel
Management.
Step 15 Click Modify after selecting the IP address of the ECC800-Pro connected to the
NMS.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 240

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 6 Adding Devices

Step 16 In the Modify dialog box, set Connection Mode.

Table 6-33 Connection modes

Connection Mode Description

Compatible ● On the ECC800-Pro WebUI, set Enable Security

Authentication to Disable.
● In transparent transmission channel management
settings, the compatibility mode has security
risks. You are advised to select the security
protocol mode.

Security protocol Enter the authentication password set on the

ECC800-Pro WebUI.

Step 17 After the setting is complete, click OK.

----End

6.5.2 Adding Sensors

6.5.2.1 Adding Dry Contact Interface Devices

6.5.2.1.1 Setting Door Status Sensor Monitoring Parameters on the ECC800-Pro

Web
After connecting a door status sensor (DSS) to the AI/DI port of an ECC800-Pro
collector, you need to set DSS parameters on the web user interface (WebUI) of
the collector.

Prerequisites
● You have obtained the IP address, and login user name and password for the
ECC800-Pro collector.
● A PC with an IP address in the same network segment as the ECC800-Pro
collector is prepared, and the PC has been connected to the ECC800-Pro
collector over a switch.

Context
This section describes how to set DSS monitoring parameters when a DSS is
connected to the AI/DI_1 port of the ECC800-Pro collector. Set the parameters
based on the actual port connected to the DSS onsite.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the WebUI of the ECC800-Pro collector.
Step 2 Choose Monitoring > System > ECC800 > Running Parameters > AI/DI_1 Port
Settings.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 241

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 6 Adding Devices

Step 3 Set AI/DI_1 to Enable.

Step 4 Click Submit.
Step 5 Select Door sensor from the AI/DI_1 sensor type drop-down list box.

Figure 6-69 Setting a sensor type for a dry contact

Step 6 Click Unhide All Advanced Signals, then click Power Supply Parameters. Ensure
that III power supply enable(AIDI_1/DO) is Yes.
Step 7 Click Submit.

----End

6.5.2.1.2 Setting Smoke Sensor and Water Leakage Sensor Parameters on the
ECC800-Pro Web
After connecting a smoke sensor or water leakage sensor to the AI/DI port of an
ECC800-Pro collector, you need to set smoke sensor or water leakage sensor
parameters on the web user interface (WebUI) of the collector.

Prerequisites
● You have obtained the IP address, and login user name and password for the
ECC800-Pro collector.
● A PC with an IP address in the same network segment as the ECC800-Pro
collector is prepared, and the PC has been connected to the ECC800-Pro
collector over a switch.

Context
● This section describes how to set smoke sensor or water leakage sensor
monitoring parameters when a smoke sensor or water leakage sensor is
connected to the AI/DI_1 port of the ECC800-Pro collector. Set the parameters
based on the actual port connected to the smoke sensor or water leakage
sensor onsite.
● A smoke sensor or water leakage sensor is a self-identification device. After a
smoke sensor or water leakage sensor is connected to the AI/DI port of an
ECC800-Pro collector, the sensor type is automatically identified and you do
not need to manually set AI/DI_1 Sensor Type on the WebUI.
To enable automatic device identification, choose System Settings > Device
Management > Device Addition > Auto Discover Device.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the WebUI of the ECC800-Pro collector.
Step 2 Choose Monitoring > System > ECC800 > Running Parameters > AI/DI_1 Port
Settings.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 242

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 6 Adding Devices

Step 3 Set AI/DI_1 to Enable.

Step 4 Click Submit.

Step 5 Check whether AI/DI_1 sensor type is automatically identified. The following uses
Smoke sensor as an example.

Figure 6-70 Setting a sensor type for a dry contact

Step 6 Click Unhide All Advanced Signals, then click Power Supply Parameters. Ensure
that III power supply enable(AIDI_1/DO) is Yes.

Step 7 Click Submit.

----End

6.5.2.1.3 Setting Device Monitoring Parameters of an NO/NC Dry Contact on the

ECC800-Pro Web
After a normally open (NO) or normally closed (NC) dry contact is connected to
the AI/DI port of an ECC800-Pro collector, you need to set device parameters of
the NO or NC dry contact on the WebUI.

Prerequisites
● You have obtained the IP address, and login user name and password for the
ECC800-Pro collector.
● A PC with an IP address in the same network segment as the ECC800-Pro
collector is prepared, and the PC has been connected to the ECC800-Pro
collector over a switch.

Context
● An NO or NC dry contact is a device whose normal status signal is open (or
closed) and whose alarm signal is closed (or open), such as a skylight
controller.
● This section describes how to set skylight controller monitoring parameters
when a skylight controller is connected to the AI/DI_1 port of the ECC800-Pro
collector. Set the parameters based on the actual port connected to the
skylight controller onsite.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the WebUI of the ECC800-Pro collector.

Step 2 Choose Monitoring > System > ECC800 > Running Parameters > AI/DI_1 Port
Settings.

Step 3 Set AI/DI_1 to Enable.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 243

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 6 Adding Devices

Step 4 Click Submit.

Step 5 Select NO or NC for AI/DI_1 Sensor Type from the drop-down list.

Figure 6-71 Setting the sensor type of a dry contact

NOTE

● NO: indicates a normally open dry contact. The dry contact will report an alarm in the
normally closed state.
● NC: indicates a normally closed dry contact. The dry contact will report an alarm in the
normally open state.

Step 6 Click Unhide All Advanced Signals, then click Power Supply Parameters. Ensure
that III power supply enable(AIDI_1/DO) is Yes.
Step 7 Click Submit.

----End

6.5.2.1.4 Creating an Icon for a Door Status Sensor on the NetEco

This section describes how to create and configure an icon for a door status sensor
in an equipment room or container.

Prerequisites
You have the operation rights for configuring View.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the NetEco client.
Step 2 Choose Device Management > Device View > View from the main menu.
Step 3 On the view page, double-click the equipment room or container where the door
status sensor is installed.

Step 4 Click on the toolbar on the left. The Toolbox dialog box is displayed.

Step 5 Drag in the toolbox to the position where the door status sensor needs to be
displayed in the view. The Property Panel dialog box is displayed.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 244

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 6 Adding Devices

Figure 6-72 Property Panel

Step 6 In the Basic Properties area, set basic properties.

Table 6-34 Parameter configuration description

Parameter Configuration Operation

Name Enter a new name.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 245

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 6 Adding Devices

Parameter Configuration Operation

Setting 1. Click Setting. The Setting Rule dialog box is displayed.

Figure 6-73 Setting Rule

2. Set the real-time value, which is the same as the real-time

signal.
3. Click OK.

Counter 1. Click ... next to Counter. The Select Data dialog box is
displayed.
2. Set Object and Counter to be added.
3. Click OK.
NOTE
After the managed object and counter are bound, you can
remotely open and close a door using the door status sensor icon.
1. Click the door status sensor icon and choose Close or Open
under .
2. In the displayed dialog box, click Yes.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 246

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 6 Adding Devices

Parameter Configuration Operation

Current Alarm 1. Click ... next to Current Alarm. The Select Data dialog box
is displayed.

Figure 6-74 Binding alarms

2. Select the alarm to be bound.

3. Click OK.
NOTE
A maximum of 20 alarms can be bound. After an alarm is bound
to a device, the color of the alarm is displayed on the device if the
alarm is generated on the device.

Step 7 In the Extended Properties area, set extended properties.

1. Click Extended Properties to expand the area.
2. Set extended properties based on the site requirements.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 247

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 6 Adding Devices

Figure 6-75 Extended Properties

----End

6.5.2.1.5 Creating the Water Sensor on the NetEco

This section describes how to create Water Sensor icons to bind the managed
objects, indicators, and alarms.

Prerequisites
You have the operation rights for configuring View.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the NetEco client.
Step 2 Choose Device Management > Device View > View from the main menu.
Step 3 On the View page, double-click the equipment room where the water sensor is
deployed.

Step 4 Click on the toolbar on the left. The Toolbox dialog box is displayed.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 248

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 6 Adding Devices

Step 5 Drag in the toolbox to the position where the water sensor needs to be
displayed in the view. The Property Panel dialog box is displayed.

Figure 6-76 Property Panel

Step 6 In the Basic Properties area, set basic properties.

Table 6-35 Parameter configuration description

Parameter Configuration Operation

Name Enter a new name.

Counter 1. Click ... next to Counter. The Select Data dialog box is
displayed.
2. Set Object and Counter to be added.
3. Click OK.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 249

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 6 Adding Devices

Parameter Configuration Operation

Current Alarm 1. Click ... next to Current Alarm. The Select Data dialog
box is displayed.

Figure 6-77 Binding alarms

2. Select the alarm to be bound.

3. Click OK.
NOTE
A maximum of 20 alarms can be bound. After an alarm is bound
to a device, the color of the alarm is displayed on the device if
the alarm is generated on the device.

Step 7 In the Extended Properties area, set extended properties.

1. Click Extended Properties to expand the area.
2. Set extended properties based on the site requirements.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 250

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 6 Adding Devices

Figure 6-78 Extended Properties

----End

6.5.2.1.6 Modifying Alarm Names for Devices on the NetEco

This section describes how to modify alarm names for devices on the NetEco.

Procedure
1. Log in to the NetEco client.
2. Choose Device Management > Alarm Management > Alarm Settings from
the main menu.
3. In the navigation pane on the left, click Redefine Alarm.
4. In the management domain tree, select the device whose alarms need to be
redefined. All the alarms of the device are displayed.

5. Click in the Operation column of the alarm to be redefined. The Set Rule
dialog box is displayed.
6. Set New Name, New Severity, and New Type as required.
7. Click OK.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 251

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 6 Adding Devices

Follow-up Procedure
You can apply alarm redefinition rules to alarms of the same type in batches:

1. Select the alarm rules to be applied to devices in batches.

– If you need to apply a specified alarm rule to the alarms of other devices
of the same type, select the data of the specified alarm rule in the
Redefined Alarm list. Click Batch Apply to Devices. On the Batch Apply
to Devices page, select Selected for Selected Items.
– If you need to apply all alarm rules of the target device to alarms of
other devices of the same type, click Batch Apply to Devices. On the
Batch Apply to Devices page, select All for Selected Items.
2. Select the application scope of the device batch application.
– If you need to apply a specified alarm rule of the target device to the
alarms of all devices of the same type, select All Objects for Application
scope.
– If you need to apply a specified alarm rule of the target device to the
alarms of specified devices of the same type, select Custom for
Application scope and select the devices to which the alarm rule is to be
applied in the management domain area.
3. Click OK.

6.5.2.1.7 Modifying Performance Counter Names for Devices on the NetEco

This section describes how to modify device performance counter names on the
NetEco.

Prerequisites
● You have the operation rights for Planning Configuration.
● You have created an ECC800-Pro collector in the Planning Configuration
page.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the NetEco client.

Step 2 On the main menu, choose Device Management > Configuration > Signal
Management.

Step 3 In the navigation pane on the left, select a device.

Step 4 Click the Sampling, Configuration, or Statistic tab and modify performance
counter names.

Step 5 Click Apply.

----End

6.5.2.2 Adding a Temperature and Humidity Sensor

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 252

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 6 Adding Devices

6.5.2.2.1 Setting Monitoring Parameters for a T/H Sensor (BOM Number:

33010346)

Prerequisites
● The device address planned for the ambient temperature and humidity sensor
is obtained.
● The ambient temperature and humidity sensor connects to the collector and
displays values on the display panel.
● The IP address, user name, and password for logging in to the collector are
obtained.
● A PC with an IP address in the same network segment as the collector is
prepared, and the PC connects to the collector over a switch.

Context
Before connecting the ambient temperature and humidity sensor to the NetEco,
set monitoring parameters, such as the device address and baud rate, on the
sensor, and then modify the port parameters for the collector connecting to the
sensor to ensure that the values of BaudRate, DataBit, StopBit, and Parity on the
sensor are consistent with those for the collector port.

Procedure
Step 1 Hold down Set on the display panel of the ambient temperature and humidity
sensor for 2 seconds.

Step 2 When Add is displayed, set the device address by pressing + and -. When creating
an ambient temperature and humidity sensor on the NetEco, set Device Address
to the same value.

Step 3 Press Set.

Step 4 When bAu is displayed, retain the default value or change the baud rate by
pressing + and -. Set BaudRate for the collector port to the same value.
NOTE

DataBit, StopBit, and Parity for the ambient temperature and humidity sensor cannot be
set on the WebUI. Their values are 8, 1, and None respectively.

Step 5 Set RS485 port parameters for the collector based on the value of BaudRate,
DataBit, StopBit, and Parity of the device. For ECC800-Pro collector settings, see
6.5.1.4 Setting RS485 Parameters for the ECC800-Pro Collector.

----End

6.5.2.2.2 Creating a Temperature and Humidity Sensor on the NetEco

Prerequisites
● You have the operation rights for Planning Configuration.
● You have created a management domain for the device to be added on the
Planning Configuration page.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 253

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 6 Adding Devices

● The ECC800-Pro connected to the device has been connected to the NetEco.
● Transparent transmission has been enabled for the COM port on the ECC800-
Pro or UIM20A expansion module to which the device is connected.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the NetEco client.

Step 2 On the main menu, choose Device Management > Configuration > Planning
Configuration.

Step 3 Choose the management domain where you want to create a device from the
navigation tree on the left.

Step 4 In the lower-left corner of the page, click the Device tab.

Step 5 In the Device area, select Sensor from the drop-down list box.

Step 6 Select the device to be added and drag its icon to the management domain.
NOTE

To delete a device, click the device and choose Delete under .

Step 7 Click the device. In the device parameter area on the right, set device parameters
according to the following table.

Table 6-36 Modbus-RTU device parameter description

Parameter Description

Managed Object Device name

Name

IP Set this parameter to the IP address of the collector to

which the device is connected.

Port Set this parameter to the port through which the device
connects to the collector.
For details about the ports on the ECC800-Pro collector, see
6.5.1.4 Setting RS485 Parameters for the ECC800-Pro
Collector.

Device Address Set this parameter to the address set on the device.

Step 8 Click on the toolbar to save the device information.

Step 9 Click Connection test to start the connection test.

----End

6.5.2.3 Adding a Water Leakage Sensor

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 254

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 6 Adding Devices

6.5.2.3.1 Creating a Water Leakage Sensor on the NetEco

This section describes how to create a water sensor on the NetEco.

Prerequisites
● You have the operation rights for Planning Configuration.
● You have created a management domain for the device to be added on the
Planning Configuration page.
● The ECC800-Pro connected to the device has been connected to the NetEco.
● Transparent transmission has been enabled for the COM port on the ECC800-
Pro or UIM20A expansion module to which the device is connected.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the NetEco client.
Step 2 On the main menu, choose Device Management > Configuration > Planning
Configuration.
Step 3 Choose the management domain where you want to create a device from the
navigation tree on the left.
Step 4 In the lower-left corner of the page, click the Device tab.
Step 5 In the Device area, select Sensor from the drop-down list box.
Step 6 Select the device to be added and drag its icon to the management domain.
NOTE

To delete a device, click the device and choose Delete under .

Step 7 Click the device. In the device parameter area on the right, set device parameters
according to the following table.

Table 6-37 Modbus-RTU device parameter description

Parameter Description

Managed Object Device name

Name

IP Set the IP address of the data collector to which the device

connects.

Port Set this parameter to the port through which the device
connects to the collector.
For details about the ports on the ECC800-Pro collector, see
6.5.1.4 Setting RS485 Parameters for the ECC800-Pro
Collector.

Device Address Set this parameter to the address set on the device (set to 1
by default).

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 255

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 6 Adding Devices

Step 8 Click on the toolbar to save the device information.

Step 9 Click Connection test to start the connection test.

----End

6.5.2.4 Adding a Hydrogen Sensor

6.5.2.4.1 Setting Monitoring Parameters for a Hydrogen Sensor

Prerequisites
● The device address planned for the hydrogen sensor is obtained.
● The hydrogen sensor is powered on.
● The IP address, user name, and password for logging in to the collector are
obtained.
● A PC with an IP address in the same network segment as the collector is
prepared, and the PC connects to the collector over a switch.

Context
Before connecting the hydrogen sensor to the NetEco, modify the port parameters
for the collector connecting to the hydrogen sensor to ensure that the values of
BaudRate, DataBit, StopBit, and Parity on the hydrogen sensor are consistent
with those for the collector port.

Procedure
Step 1 Set the hydrogen sensor device address by setting the ADD dual in-line package
(DIP) on the hydrogen detector RS485 monitoring card.
● If a toggle switch is flipped to OFF, the value of this toggle switch is 0.
● If a toggle switch is flipped to ON, the value of this toggle switch is 1.

Table 6-38 Mapping between Hydrogen Sensor communications address and DIP
switch

Communicati SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4

ons Address

1 1 1 1 0

5 1 0 1 0

10 0 1 0 1

15 0 0 0 0

BaudRate, DataBit, StopBit and Parity on hydrogen sensor cannot be set, the
default setting is 9600, 8, 1 and None.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 256

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 6 Adding Devices

Step 2 Set RS485 port parameters for the collector based on the value of BaudRate,
DataBit, StopBit, and Parity of the device. For ECC800-Pro collector settings, see
6.5.1.4 Setting RS485 Parameters for the ECC800-Pro Collector.

----End

6.5.2.4.2 Creating a Hydrogen Sensor on the NetEco

Prerequisites
● You have logged in to the NetEco client.
● You have the operation rights for Planning Configuration.
● You have created a management domain for the device to be added on the
Planning Configuration page.
● The ECC800-Pro connected to the device has been connected to the NetEco.
● Transparent transmission has been enabled for the COM port on the ECC800-
Pro or UIM20A expansion module to which the device is connected.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the NetEco client.

Step 2 On the main menu, choose Device Management > Configuration > Planning
Configuration.

Step 3 Choose the management domain where you want to create a device from the
navigation tree on the left.

Step 4 In the lower-left corner of the page, click the Device tab.

Step 5 In the Device area, select Sensor from the drop-down list box.

Step 6 Select the device to be added and drag its icon to the management domain.
NOTE

To delete a device, click the device and choose Delete under .

Step 7 Click the device. In the device parameter area on the right, set device parameters
according to the following table.

Table 6-39 Modbus-RTU device parameter description

Parameter Description

Managed Object Device name

Name

IP Set this parameter to the IP address of the collector to

which the device is connected.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 257

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 6 Adding Devices

Parameter Description

Port Set this parameter to the port through which the device
connects to the collector.
For details about the ports on the ECC800-Pro collector, see
6.5.1.4 Setting RS485 Parameters for the ECC800-Pro
Collector.

Device Address Set this parameter to the address set on the device.

Step 8 Click on the toolbar to save the device information.

Step 9 Click Connection test to start the connection test.

----End

6.5.3 Adding the Access Management System

6.5.3.1 Setting Monitoring Parameters for the A8802RS Access Controller

Procedure
Step 1 Set the address of the access controller using the DIP toggle switches, set the
device address to 0 by default, as shown in Table 6-40.

Table 6-40 Setting the address of the access controller

Device Address Toggle Switch 1 Toggle Switch 2

0 OFF OFF

1 ON OFF

2 OFF ON

3 ON ON

Step 2 Set the baud rate of the access controller to 19200. The preset data bit, stop bit,
and check bit are 8, 1, and none respectively. For ECC800-Pro collector settings,
see 6.5.1.4 Setting RS485 Parameters for the ECC800-Pro Collector.

----End

6.5.3.2 Creating an Access Controller on the NetEco

This section describes how to create an access controller on the NetEco.

Prerequisites
● You have the operation rights for Access Control Management and Planning
Configuration.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 258

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 6 Adding Devices

● You have created a management domain for the device to be added on the
Planning Configuration page.
● The ECC800-Pro connected to the device has been connected to the NetEco.
● Transparent transmission has been enabled for the COM port on the ECC800-
Pro or UIM20A expansion module to which the device is connected.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the NetEco client.
Step 2 Choose Maintenance Management > Security Protection > Access Control
Management from the main menu.
Step 3 On the Device Management page, click Create. The Planning Configuration
page is displayed.
Step 4 Add an access controller to the Planning Configuration page.
1. Choose the management domain where you want to create a device from the
navigation tree on the left.
2. In the lower-left corner of the page, click the Device tab.
3. In the Device area, select Access Controller from the drop-down list box.
4. Select an access controller and drag its icon to the management domain.
NOTE

To delete a device, click the device and choose Delete under .

5. Click the device. In the device parameter area on the right, set device
parameters according to the following table.

Table 6-41 Parameter description

Parameter Description

Managed Object Device name

Name

IP IP address of the collector to which the device is

connected

Port Port through which the device connects to the collector

For details about the ports on the ECC800-Pro collector,
see 6.5.1.4 Setting RS485 Parameters for the ECC800-
Pro Collector.

Device Address Address set on the device. The default value is 0.

Timeout Period Timeout duration for a connection test. The default

value is 3s.

Step 5 Click on the toolbar to save the device information.

Step 6 On the Transmission Channel Management page, set the connection mode to
secure mode and set the security password.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 259

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 6 Adding Devices

1. On the main menu, choose Device Management > Configuration > Device
Integration.
2. In the navigation tree on the left, choose Transparent Transmission Channel
Management.
3. Select the IP address of the ECC800-Pro connected to the access controller
and click Modify.
4. In the dialog box that is displayed, set Connection mode to Security
protocol. Set Password to the authentication password that you have set on
the ECC800-Pro, enter the confirm password, and click OK.
5. Click OK.

Figure 6-79 Transmission Channel Management

Step 7 Go back to the planning configuration page of the access controller. Click
Connection test. If the connection is successful, the A8802RS access controller is
connected to the NetEco.
----End

Follow-up Procedure
After an access controller is created, its information is displayed on the Device
Management page, as shown in Figure 6-80.

Figure 6-80 Checking the access controller information

NOTICE

After the access controller is added, format it manually in the access controller list
to avoid failure in initializing the access controller.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 260

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 6 Adding Devices

6.5.3.3 Formatting an Access Controller on the NetEco

This section describes how to format access control cards, historical records,
timezones, and holidays.

Prerequisites
You have the operation rights for Access Control Management.

Context
The door access controller synchronized by the ECC800-Pro to the NetEco does not
support formatting.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the NetEco client.

Step 2 Choose Maintenance Management > Security Protection > Access Control
Management from the main menu.

Step 3 In the Device Management tab page, click in the Operation column. The
confirm dialog box is displayed.

Step 4 Click Yes. The access controller is successfully formatted.

NOTE

● After formatting the access controller, click to initialize parameters. In this manner,
the timezones are enabled. The access controller is not disabled even if the parameters
are not initialized or the timezones are not enabled.
● Synchronize the timezones and then the user groups or holidays after an access
controller is formatted and parameters are initialized.

----End

6.5.3.4 Setting Monitoring Parameters for the NEWABEL CHD200G

Fingerprint Controller

Context
This section applies to the settings of the card reader with a keypad, fingerprint
and card reader, and fingerprint and card reader with a keypad.

Procedure
Step 1 Set the baud rate of the NEWABEL CHD200G fingerprint controller to 9600 on the
ECC800-Pro collector. The preset address is 1. The address does not need to be set.
When creating the device on the NetEco, set Device Address to 1.

----End

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 261

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 6 Adding Devices

6.5.3.5 Creating a NEWABEL CHD200G Fingerprint Controller on the NetEco

This section applies to the settings of the card reader with a keypad, fingerprint
and card reader, and fingerprint and card reader with a keypad.

Prerequisites
● You have the operation rights for Planning Configuration.
● You have created a management domain for the device to be added on the
Planning Configuration page.
● The access controller has been connected to the NetEco.
● The Newabel CHD200G fingerprint controller and the access controller are
connected to the same ECC800-Pro collector.
● The ECC800-Pro connected to the device has been connected to the NetEco.
● Transparent transmission has been enabled for the COM port on the ECC800-
Pro or UIM20A expansion module to which the device is connected.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the NetEco client.

Step 2 On the main menu, choose Device Management > Configuration > Planning
Configuration.

Step 3 Choose the management domain where you want to create a device from the
navigation tree on the left.

Step 4 In the lower-left corner of the page, click the Device tab.

Step 5 In the Device area, select Fingerprint Controller from the drop-down list box.

Step 6 Select the device to be added and drag its icon to the management domain.
NOTE

To delete a device, click the device and choose Delete under .

Step 7 Specify parameters in the right pane based on the following table.

Table 6-42 Device parameter description

Parameter Description

Managed Object Device name

Name

IP Set this parameter to the IP address of the collector to

which the device is connected.

Port Set this parameter to the port through which the device
connects to the collector.
For details about the ports on the ECC800-Pro collector, see
6.5.1.4 Setting RS485 Parameters for the ECC800-Pro
Collector.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 262

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 6 Adding Devices

Parameter Description

Device Address Address set on the device. The default value is 0.

Timeout Period Timeout duration for a connection test. The default value is
3s.

Step 8 Click on the toolbar to save the device information.

Step 9 Click Connection test to start the connection test.

Step 10 Click Bind AccessController and select an access controller to bind the fingerprint
controller and select a door passage for the access controller from respective drop-
down menus.

----End

6.5.4 Adding a Smart Cooling Product

6.5.4.1 Setting Monitoring Parameters for Smart Cooling Products (over

Modbus-RTU)
The method of setting monitoring parameters for NetCol5000-C(065, 080),
NetCol5000-C025/C030/A020/A035/A050, NetCol8000-A050/A060/A100/A120/
C070/C150, and FusionCol8000-E220/E400/C080/C210 are the same. This section
describes the configuration method for the NetCol5000.

Prerequisites
● The device address planned for the NetCol5000 is obtained.
● The NetCol5000 is powered on.
● The IP address, user name, and password for logging in to the collector are
obtained.
● A PC with an IP address in the same network segment as the collector is
prepared, and the PC connects to the collector over a switch.
NOTE

The Modbus TCP protocol is recommended for connecting FusionCol8000-E/FusionCol8000-

C series smart cooling products to the NetEco.

Context
Before connecting the NetCol5000 to the NetEco, set monitoring parameters, such
as the device address and baud rate, on the NetCol5000, and then modify the port
parameters for the collector connecting to the NetCol5000 to ensure that the
values of BaudRate, DataBit, StopBit, and Parity on the NetCol5000 are
consistent with those for the collector port.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 263

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 6 Adding Devices

Procedure
Step 1 On the display panel of the NetCol5000, press Settings.
Step 2 Enter the user name and password of an administrator.
NOTE

The preset user name and password for the NetCol5000 are respectively Admin and
000001. To ensure access security, change the password upon the first login.

Step 3 Choose Comm Settings > Modbus Settings.

Step 4 Set Baud Rate and Com address.

Table 6-43 Parameter description

Parameter Description

Communication address 1–255

Indicates the actual address for the
NetCol5000. The devices with the
same address cannot connect to the
same port. When creating a
NetCol5000 on the NetEco, set Device
Address to the same value.

Baud Rate 9600, 19200

Indicates the baud rate. The default
baud rate is 9600. Set BaudRate for
the collector port to the same value.

The DataBit, StopBit, and Parity of the NetCol5000 cannot be set on the WebUI.
Their default values are 8, 1, and None respectively.
Step 5 Set RS485 port parameters for the collector based on the value of BaudRate,
DataBit, StopBit, and Parity of the device. For ECC800-Pro collector settings, see
6.5.1.4 Setting RS485 Parameters for the ECC800-Pro Collector.

----End

6.5.4.2 Creating a Smart Cooling Product on the NetEco

This section describes how to create a smart cooling product on the NetEco.

Prerequisites
● You have the operation rights for Planning Configuration.
● You have created a management domain for the device to be added on the
Planning Configuration page.
● The ECC800-Pro connected to the device has been connected to the NetEco.
● Transparent transmission has been enabled for the COM port on the ECC800-
Pro or UIM20A expansion module to which the device is connected.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 264

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 6 Adding Devices

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the NetEco client.

Step 2 On the main menu, choose Device Management > Configuration > Planning
Configuration.

Step 3 Choose the management domain where you want to create a device from the
navigation tree on the left.

Step 4 In the lower-left corner of the page, click the Device tab.

Step 5 In the Device area, select Air Conditioner from the drop-down list box.

Step 6 Select the device to be added and drag its icon to the management domain.
NOTE

To delete a device, click the device and choose Delete under .

Step 7 Click the device. In the device parameter area on the right, set device parameters
according to the following table.

Table 6-44 Modbus-RTU device parameter description

Parameter Description

Managed Object Device name

Name

IP Set this parameter to the IP address of the collector to

which the device is connected.

Port Set this parameter to the port through which the device
connects to the collector.
For details about the ports on the ECC800-Pro collector, see
6.5.1.4 Setting RS485 Parameters for the ECC800-Pro
Collector.

Device Address Set this parameter to the address set on the device.

Step 8 Click on the toolbar to save the device information.

Step 9 Click Connection test to start the connection test.

----End

6.5.5 Adding a Chiller

6.5.5.1 Creating a Chiller on the NetEco

This section describes how to create a chiller on the NetEco.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 265

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 6 Adding Devices

Prerequisites
● You have the operation rights for Planning Configuration.
● You have created a management domain for the device to be added on the
Planning Configuration page.
● The ECC800-Pro connected to the device has been connected to the NetEco.
● Transparent transmission has been enabled for the COM port on the ECC800-
Pro or UIM20A expansion module to which the device is connected.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the NetEco client.
Step 2 On the main menu, choose Device Management > Configuration > Planning
Configuration.
Step 3 Choose the management domain where you want to create a device from the
navigation tree on the left.
Step 4 In the lower-left corner of the page, click the Device tab.
Step 5 In the Device area, select Chiller from the drop-down list box.
Step 6 Select the device to be added and drag its icon to the management domain.
NOTE

To delete a device, click the device and choose Delete under .

Step 7 Click the device. In the device parameter area on the right, set device parameters
according to the following table.

Table 6-45 Modbus-RTU device parameter description

Parameter Description

Managed Object Device name

Name

IP Set this parameter to the IP address of the collector to

which the device is connected.

Port Set this parameter to the port through which the device
connects to the collector.
For details about the ports on the ECC800-Pro collector, see
6.5.1.4 Setting RS485 Parameters for the ECC800-Pro
Collector.

Device Address Set this parameter to the address set on the device.

Step 8 Click on the toolbar to save the device information.

Step 9 Click Connection test to start the connection test.

----End

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 266

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 6 Adding Devices

6.5.6 Adding a UPS

6.5.6.1 Setting Monitoring Parameters for a UPS2000

Prerequisites
● You have obtained the IP address and user name and password for logging in
to the collector.
● A PC with an IP address in the same network segment as the collector has
been prepared and connected to the collector over a switch.

Context
Before connecting the UPS2000 to the NetEco, set monitoring parameters on the
UPS2000. Then, modify the port parameters for the collector connecting to the
UPS2000 to ensure that the values of BaudRate, DataBit, StopBit, and Parity on
the UPS2000 are consistent with those for the collector port.

Procedure
Step 1 Set the UPS2000 device address using the DIP switch S2 on the optional Modbus
card.
Toggle switches 1 to 8 of DIP switch S2 specify the device address in binary mode.
ON indicates 0 and OFF indicates 1. Table 6-46 shows an example of the address
settings.

Table 6-46 Mapping between device addresses and Modbus card DIP switch
settings
Device Toggl Toggl Toggl Toggl Toggl Toggl Toggl Toggl
Addre e e e e e e e e
ss Switc Switc Switc Switc Switc Switc Switc Switc
h1 h2 h3 h4 h5 h6 h7 h8

1 OFF ON ON ON ON ON ON ON

2 ON OFF ON ON ON ON ON ON

3 OFF OFF ON ON ON ON ON ON

4 ON ON OFF ON ON ON ON ON

Step 2 Set RS485 port parameters for the collector based on the value of BaudRate,
DataBit, StopBit, and Parity of the device. For ECC800-Pro collector settings, see
6.5.1.4 Setting RS485 Parameters for the ECC800-Pro Collector.
NOTE

For the UPS2000, the default values of BaudRate, DataBit, StopBit, and Parity are 9600, 8,
1, and None, respectively. If the parameters are changed, the actual parameter values
prevail.

----End

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 267

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 6 Adding Devices

6.5.6.2 Creating a UPS on the NetEco

This section describes how to create a UPS on the NetEco.

Prerequisites
● You have the operation rights for Data Center Planning.
● You have created a management domain for the device to be added on the
Data Center Planning page.
● The ECC800-Pro connected to the device has been connected to the NetEco.
● Transparent transmission has been enabled for the COM port on the ECC800-
Pro or UIM20A expansion module to which the device is connected.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the NetEco client.
Step 2 On the main menu, choose Device Management > Configuration > Planning
Configuration.
Step 3 Choose the management domain where you want to create a device from the
navigation tree on the left.
Step 4 In the lower-left corner of the page, click the Device tab.
Step 5 In the Device area, select UPS from the drop-down list box.
Step 6 Select the device to be added and drag its icon to the management domain.
NOTE

To delete a device, click the device and choose Delete under .

Step 7 Click the device. In the device parameter area on the right, set device parameters
according to the following table.

Table 6-47 Modbus-RTU device parameter description

Parameter Description

Managed Object Device name

Name

IP Set the IP address of the data collector to which the device

connects.

Port Set this parameter to the port through which the device
connects to the collector.
For details about the ports on the ECC800-Pro collector, see
6.5.1.4 Setting RS485 Parameters for the ECC800-Pro
Collector.

Device Address Set this parameter to the address set on the device.

Timeout Period Timeout duration for a connection test. The default value is
3s.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 268

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 6 Adding Devices

Step 8 Click on the toolbar to save the device information.

Step 9 Click Connection test to start the connection test.

----End

6.5.7 Adding a PDU

6.5.7.1 Setting Monitoring Parameters for a PDU8000

Prerequisites
● The IP address planned for the PDU8000 is obtained.
● The PDU8000 is powered on.
NOTE

The Modbus TCP protocol is recommended for connecting the PDU8000 to the NetEco.

Context
Before connecting the PDU8000 to the NetEco over Modbus-RTU, set monitoring
parameters, such as Serial port baud rate and Serial port address.

Procedure
Step 1 Tap Settings on the PDU8000 home screen.

Step 2 Enter the PDU8000 user name and password and tap .
NOTE

The preset user name and password for the PDU8000 are admin and 000001 respectively.
To ensure access security, change the password upon the first login.

Step 3 Click Communication.

Set Serial port baud rate and Serial port address.

Table 6-48 Parameter description

Parameter Description

Serial port baud rate Indicates the baud rate. The default
baud rate is 9600. Set BaudRate for
the collector port to the same value.
DataBit, StopBit, and Parity for the
PDU8000 cannot be set on the WebUI.
Their values are 8, 1, and None
respectively.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 269

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 6 Adding Devices

Parameter Description

Serial port address Indicates the device address planned

for the PDU8000. The devices with the
same address cannot connect to the
same port. When creating a PDU8000
on the NetEco, set Device Address to
the same value.

Step 4 Set RS485 port parameters for the collector based on the value of BaudRate,
DataBit, StopBit, and Parity of the device. For ECC800-Pro collector settings, see
6.5.1.4 Setting RS485 Parameters for the ECC800-Pro Collector.

----End

6.5.7.2 Creating a PDU on the NetEco

This section describes how to create a PDU on the NetEco.

Prerequisites
● You have created a management domain for the device to be added on the
Planning Configuration page.
● The ECC800-Pro connected to the device has been connected to the NetEco.
● Transparent transmission has been enabled for the COM port on the ECC800-
Pro or UIM20A expansion module to which the device is connected.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the NetEco client.

Step 2 On the main menu, choose Device Management > Configuration > Planning
Configuration.

Step 3 Choose the management domain where you want to create a device from the
navigation tree on the left.

Step 4 In the lower-left corner of the page, click the Device tab.

Step 5 In the Device area, select PDU from the drop-down list box.

Step 6 Select the device to be added and drag its icon to the management domain.
NOTE

To delete a device, click the device and choose Delete under .

Step 7 Click the device. In the device parameter area on the right, set device parameters
according to the following table.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 270

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 6 Adding Devices

Table 6-49 Modbus-RTU device parameter description

Parameter Description

Managed Object Device name

Name

IP Set the IP address of the data collector to which the device

connects.

Port Set this parameter to the port through which the device
connects to the collector.
For details about the ports on the ECC800-Pro collector, see
6.5.1.4 Setting RS485 Parameters for the ECC800-Pro
Collector.

Device Address Set this parameter to the address set on the device.

Step 8 Click on the toolbar to save the device information.

Step 9 Click Connection test to start the connection test.

----End

6.5.8 Adding a Fresh Air Unit

6.5.8.1 Creating a Fresh Air Unit on the NetEco

This section describes how to create a fresh air unit on the NetEco.

Prerequisites
● You have the operation rights for Planning Configuration.
● You have created a management domain for the device to be added on the
Planning Configuration page.
● The ECC800-Pro connected to the device has been connected to the NetEco.
● Transparent transmission has been enabled for the COM port on the ECC800-
Pro or UIM20A expansion module to which the device is connected.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the NetEco client.

Step 2 On the main menu, choose Device Management > Configuration > Planning
Configuration.

Step 3 Choose the management domain where you want to create a device from the
navigation tree on the left.

Step 4 In the lower-left corner of the page, click the Device tab.

Step 5 In the Device area, select Air Conditioner from the drop-down list box.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 271

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 6 Adding Devices

Step 6 Select the device to be added and drag its icon to the management domain.
NOTE

To delete a device, click the device and choose Delete under .

Step 7 Click the device. In the device parameter area on the right, set device parameters
according to the following table.

Table 6-50 Modbus-RTU device parameter description

Parameter Description

Managed Object Device name

Name

IP IP address of the collector to which the device is connected

Port Port through which the device connects to the collector

For details about the ports on the ECC800-Pro collector, see
6.5.1.4 Setting RS485 Parameters for the ECC800-Pro
Collector.

Device Address Address set on the device

Step 8 Click on the toolbar to save the device information.

Step 9 Click Connection test to start the connection test.

----End

6.5.9 Adding an rPDU

6.5.9.1 Setting Monitoring Parameters for HPXPDU2000-16-3PH-24-6-M1

Prerequisites
● You have obtained the device address planned for the PDU2000.
● The PDU2000 is connected to the collector, and digits are displayed on the
LCD.
● You have obtained the collector IP address and login user name and
password.
● A PC with an IP address in the same network segment as the collector has
been prepared and connected to the collector over a switch.

Context
Before connecting the PDU2000 to the NetEco, set its device address and then
modify the port parameters for the collector connecting to the PDU2000 to ensure
that the values of BaudRate, DataBit, StopBit, and Parity on it are consistent
with those for the collector port.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 272

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 6 Adding Devices

Procedure
Step 1 Press MENU on the PDU2000 display panel.

Step 2 Press UP until is displayed and ADD blinks.

Step 3 Press MENU, is displayed, and 01 blinks. The current device address is 01.

Step 4 Press UP or DOWN to select the device address value.

Step 5 Press MENU to confirm the setting.

● If is displayed, the setting succeeds.

● If is displayed, the setting fails. Reset the parameter.

NOTE

The PDU2000 BaudRate, DataBit, StopBit, and Parity cannot be set on the WebUI. Their
values are 9600, 8, 1, and None respectively.

Step 6 Press Button. is displayed. Then press MENU to exit.

Step 7 Set RS485 port parameters for the collector based on the value of BaudRate,
DataBit, StopBit, and Parity of the device. For ECC800-Pro collector settings, see
6.5.1.4 Setting RS485 Parameters for the ECC800-Pro Collector.

----End

6.5.9.2 Creating an rPDU on the NetEco

This section describes how to create an rPDU on the NetEco.

Prerequisites
● You have the operation rights for Planning Configuration.
● You have created a management domain for the device to be added on the
Planning Configuration page.
● The ECC800-Pro connected to the device has been connected to the NetEco.
● Transparent transmission has been enabled for the COM port on the ECC800-
Pro or UIM20A expansion module to which the device is connected.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the NetEco client.

Step 2 On the main menu, choose Device Management > Configuration > Planning
Configuration.

Step 3 Choose the management domain where you want to create a device from the
navigation tree on the left.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 273

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 6 Adding Devices

Step 4 In the lower-left corner of the page, click the Device tab.
Step 5 In the Device area, select RPDU from the drop-down list box.
Step 6 Select the device to be added and drag its icon to the management domain.
NOTE

● If the management domain is a rack or DDF, click the management domain and choose
Design under . The page for adding a device is displayed.

● To delete a device, click the device and choose Delete under .

Step 7 Click the device. In the device parameter area on the right, set device parameters
according to the following table.

Table 6-51 Modbus-RTU device parameter description

Parameter Description

Managed Object Device name

Name

IP Set this parameter to the IP address of the collector to

which the device is connected.

Port Set this parameter to the port through which the device
connects to the collector.
For details about the ports on the ECC800-Pro collector, see
6.5.1.4 Setting RS485 Parameters for the ECC800-Pro
Collector.

Device Address Set this parameter to the address set on the device.

Timeout Period Timeout duration for a connection test. The default value is
3s.

Step 8 Click on the toolbar to save the device information.

Step 9 Click Connection test to start the connection test.

----End

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 274

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 7 Device Maintenance

7 Device Maintenance

7.1 Routine Maintenance

7.1.1 Monthly maintenance

7.1.1.1 Routine Maintenance for the Collector

Table 7-1 Routine maintenance for the PSU in the ECC800-Pro

Check Item Expected Result Troubleshooting

AC input Input voltage: 200–240 V If the input voltage is abnormal,

AC check the power grid and input
Frequency: 45-66 Hz cable connection.

Output Output voltage: 53.5 V DC If the output voltage is abnormal,

voltage (tolerance ±5%) check the load power and cable
connection.

Indicator The green indicator is Check the output voltage and

steady on, and the red determine whether the PSU is
indicator is faulty. faulty. If the PSU is faulty, replace it.

Fan No abnormal noise is If abnormal noise is generated,

generated. clean the fan.

Cable The cable connection is Secure loose cables.

connection secure.

Cables are not damaged. Replace damaged cables.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 275

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 7 Device Maintenance

Table 7-2 Routine maintenance for the main control module in the ECC800-Pro
Check Item Expected Result Troubleshooting

Indicator The green indicator is If the indicator is off or any

steady on or blinking. abnormal condition occurs, see
common faults and troubleshooting
to rectify the fault.

Network The green indicator is If the indicator status is abnormal,

port steady on, and the yellow check the network cable connection.
indicator indicator is blinking.

Cable The cable connection is Secure loose cables.

connection secure.

Cables are not damaged. Replace damaged cables.

7.1.1.2 Routine Maintenance for the UIM20A Expansion Module

Table 7-3 Routine Maintenance for the UIM20A Expansion Module

Item Maintenance Method Expected Exception
Interval Result Handling

UIM20A Monthly Observe and The ALM If the

expansion check indicator indicator
module whether the steady on. steady on, the
ALM ALM UIM20A
indicator indicator on expansion
the UIM20A module is
expansion faulty or the
module is cables are not
normal. properly
connected.
Check the
cables or
replace the
UIM20A
expansion
module.

7.1.1.3 Routine Maintenance for VCN

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 276

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 7 Device Maintenance

Table 7-4 Routine Maintenance for VCN

Item Maintena Method Expected Exception
nce Result Handling
Interval

Check the Monthly Observe the The VCN See the

VCN indicator. VCN indicator. indicator is delivered
steady green. documents.

7.1.1.4 Routine Maintenance for the Smoke Detector

Table 7-5 Routine Maintenance for the Smoke Detector

Item Maintena Method Expected Exception Handling
nce Result
Interval

Smoke Monthly Observe and The indicator If the indicator

detector check whether blinks once blinks twice every 6
indicator the indicator every 6 seconds or does not
on the smoke seconds. (The blink, the smoke
detector is interval varies detector is faulty or
normal. with sensors. the cables are not
See the properly connected.
product Check the cables or
instructions.) replace the smoke
detector.

Smoke Monthly Use a ● If the ● If the smoke

detector dedicated test smoke density is below
availabilit instrument or density is the alarm
y a smoke below the threshold but the
generator to alarm alarm indicator
test the threshold, blinks twice every
smoke the alarm 6 seconds, the
detector. Blow indicator smoke detector is
smoke to the blinks once faulty. Replace
smoke every 6 the smoke
detector probe seconds. detector.
and observe ● If the ● If the smoke
the indicator smoke density exceeds
status. density the alarm
exceeds the threshold but the
alarm alarm indicator is
threshold, not steady on,
the alarm replace the
indicator is smoke detector.
steady on.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 277

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 7 Device Maintenance

NOTE

You are advised to clean the smoke detectors every two years.

7.1.1.5 Routine Maintenance for the Hydrogen Detection System

Table 7-6 Routine Maintenance for the Hydrogen Detection System

Item Mainten Expected Result Exception Handling
ance
Interval

Check Monthly The hydrogen Troubleshoot by following

whether the collector is working instructions in documents
hydrogen properly, and no delivered with the hydrogen
collector has alarm is generated. collector.
generated
alarms.

Check the Monthly The LCD displays 1. Check that the AC input
LCD of the the hydrogen power cable is normal.
hydrogen density. 2. Check whether the circuit
collector. breaker of the hydrogen
collector can be switched
on and off normally.

Check the Monthly The RUN indicator 1. If the indicator does not
indicator of is blinking. light up, check the AC
the hydrogen input or replace the
collector. power module by
following instructions in
the delivered documents.
2. If the fault persists,
contact Huawei technical
support.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 278

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 7 Device Maintenance

7.1.1.6 Routine maintenance for the region-type water sensor and water
detection cable

Table 7-7 Routine maintenance for the region-type water sensor and water
detection cable
Item Maintenance Method Expected Exception
Interval Result Handling

Functions of Monthly Place the A water If no water

the water water leakage alarm leakage alarm
sensor and detection is generated. is generated,
water cable into replace the
detection water and water
cable check detection
whether a cable.
water leakage
alarm is
generated by
the water
sensor.

7.1.1.7 Routine maintenance for the location-type water sensor and water
detection cable

Table 7-8 Routine maintenance for the location-type water sensor and water
detection cable
Item Maintenance Method Expected Exception
Interval Result Handling

Functions of Monthly Place the A water When there is

the water water leakage alarm no water
sensor and detection is generated. leakage alarm
water cable into generated,
detection water and replace the
cable check water sensor
whether a if the sensor
water leakage sends an
alarm is alarm, and
generated by replace the
the water water
sensor. detection
cable if the
detection
cable sends
an alarm.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 279

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 7 Device Maintenance

7.1.2 Semi-Annual Maintenance

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 280

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 7 Device Maintenance

7.1.2.1 Routine maintenance for the switch

Table 7-9 Routine maintenance for the switch

Item Maintenance Method Expected Exception Handling
Interval Result

LAN switch Semi- Check the The PWR Take corrective measures based
availability annually power indicator is on the PWR indicator status:
indicator steady green. ● Off: The power supply unit
(marked The SYS (PSU) is not detected, or the
PWR) of the indicator is board power supply is
switch. blinking abnormal when the switch is
Check the green. configured with one PSU.
running ● Steady red, The possible
indicator causes are as follows:
(marked SYS) Two PSUs configured on the
of the switch. switch are detected, but the
circuit breaker is off.
The power supply is
disconnected.
Both the board and power
over Ethernet (PoE) power
supplies are faulty.
● Steady orange: When the
switch is configured with one
PSU, the PoE power supply is
abnormal. When the switch is
configured with two PSUs, the
board or PoE power supply is
abnormal.
Take corrective measures based
on the SYS indicator status:
● Off: The switch is not running.
● Steady green: The switch is
not running properly or is
starting.
● Steady orange: The indicator
takes a self-test during
startup.
● Steady red: The switch does
not run properly after being
registered, or alarms
indicating that the power
supply, fan, or temperature is
abnormal are generated.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 281

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 7 Device Maintenance

7.1.2.2 Routine Maintenance for the Smart U space manager

Table 7-10 Routine Maintenance for the Smart U space manager

Item Mainten Method Expected Exception
ance Result Handling
Interval

Check Semi- If there is a U Asset The If the indicator is

the annually Label on the asset indicator on off, check
availabili detection strip, check the asset whether the
ty of the the corresponding detection cable of the
smart U indicator on the asset strip that asset detection
space detection strip. has U Asset strip is loose.
manager. Label is on. Otherwise,
replace the asset
detection strip.

7.1.2.3 Routine Maintenance for Temperature Sensors

Table 7-11 Routine Maintenance for Temperature Sensors

Item Maintena Method Expected Exception
nce Result Handling
Interval

Check the Semi- Hold the Hold the If the

availability of annually temperature temperature temperature
the sensor probe in sensor probe in does not go
temperature your palm, and your palm, and up, check
sensor. check the check the whether the
temperature temperature temperature
displayed for displayed for sensor cable is
the the loose or
corresponding corresponding disconnected.
rack rack If so, reconnect
environment environment the cable. If
unit on the unit on the not, replace
WebUI. WebUI. the
temperature
sensor.

7.1.2.4 Routine maintenance for the temperature and humidity sensor

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 282

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 7 Device Maintenance

Table 7-12 Routine maintenance for the temperature and humidity sensor
Item Maintena Method Expected Exception
nce Result Handling
Interval

Check the Semi- Check the The reading is If the reading

availability of annually reading on the normal and is inaccurate,
the temperature accurate. check and
temperature and humidity calibrate the
and humidity sensor. temperature
sensor. and humidity
sensor using a
temperature
and humidity
measuring
instrument
with higher
precision.

7.1.2.5 Routine maintenance for the camera

Table 7-13 Routine maintenance for the camera

Item Maintena Method Expected Exception
nce Result Handling
Interval

Camer Semi- On the NetEco, click A If the monitoring

a annually Configuration > monitorin page is not
availa Camera g page is displayed, check
bility Management > displayed. whether the IP
Video Camera address is correctly
Management, to set and the PoE
enter the camera function is enabled
management page. on the LAN switch.
Type the camera Then check the
name or IP address to cables or replace
find the camera, and the camera. For
click the camera details about how
name or icon on to replace a
the left to view the camera.
real-time monitoring
page.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 283

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 7 Device Maintenance

7.1.2.6 Routine maintenance for the access control system

Table 7-14 Routine maintenance for the access control system

Item Maintena Method Expected Exception
nce Result Handling
Interval

Card reader Semi- Use a spare The card If the access

annually card reader to reader controller fails
check whether functions to operate
the access properly. properly,
control system replace the
works properly. card reader.

Door status Semi- Power on the The door If the door

sensor annually door status status sensor status sensor
sensor and functions fails to attract
check whether properly. properly,
the door has replace the
strong sensor.
attracting
capability.

7.1.2.7 Routine Maintenance for the Access Controller

Table 7-15 Routine maintenance for the access controller

Item Maintenance Method Expected Exception
Interval Result Handling

Access controller Semi-annually Check The If the access

function whether access controller fails to
the controller operate properly,
access works replace the
controller properly. controller.
works
properly
by
referring
to the
installatio
n guide.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 284

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 7 Device Maintenance

7.1.2.8 Routine maintenance for the single-door/double-door magnetic lock

Table 7-16 Routine maintenance for the single-door/double-door magnetic lock

Item Maintenanc Method Expected Exception
e Interval Result Handling

Functions of Semi- Check The magnetic If the

the single- annually whether the lock attracts magnetic
door/double- magnetic lock and separates lock fails to
door magnetic attracts and properly. attract or
lock separates separate
properly when properly,
being replace the
powered on lock.
and off
respectively.

7.1.2.9 Routine maintenance for the emergency door release button

Table 7-17 Routine maintenance for the emergency door release button
Item Maintenan Method Expected Troubleshooti
ce Interval Result ng

Emergency Semi- Check whether The glass If the

door release annually the glass plate plate for the emergency
button for the emergency door release
function emergency door door release button is
release button is button is broken, replace
intact. intact. the button.

7.2 Parts Replacement

7.2.1 Parts Replacement for the ECC800-Pro

7.2.1.1 Replacing an ECC800-Pro Main Control Module

Prerequisites

NOTICE

● The ECC800-Pro main control module is hot-swappable.

● Before disconnecting cables from the ECC800-Pro main control module, label
the cables based on the corresponding ports.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 285

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 7 Device Maintenance

● Tools: ESD wrist strap, ESD gloves, Phillips screwdriver, labels, marker
● Materials: a new undamaged and undeformed ECC800-Pro main control
module of the appropriate model

Procedure
Step 1 Use the Back Up Current Settings function to record the ECC800-Pro
configuration information or manually record the information.
Path: Maintenance > Configuration File > Back Up Current Settings

NOTE

If the main control module is damaged, you may fail to log in to the ECC800-Pro. In this case,
you cannot back up the settings.
The following information cannot be backed up: monitoring module IP address parameters,
smart module certificate, NetEco certificate, NetEco second-challenge password, time
configuration parameters, access user management, access permission management, device
access certificate, log, and user configuration information.

Step 2 Label each cable and antenna based on the corresponding ports on the ECC800-
Pro main control module.
Step 3 Remove cables, USB flash drive, USB-to-WiFi module, and antennas from the
ECC800-Pro main control module.
Step 4 Loosen the screws on both sides of the ECC800-Pro main control module and pull
the handles on both sides of the ECC800-Pro main control module to remove the
main control module.

Figure 7-1 Removing the ECC800-Pro main control module

Step 5 (Optional) Remove the SIM card from the corresponding slots of the ECC800-Pro
main control module.
Step 6 (Optional) Install the removed SIM card in the corresponding slot of the new
ECC800-Pro main control module.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 286

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 7 Device Maintenance

Figure 7-2 Installing a SIM card

Step 7 Install the spare ECC800-Pro main control module in the ECC800-Pro subrack and
tighten the screws on both sides of the ECC800-Pro main control module.

Step 8 Connect the communications cables and antennas to the ECC800-Pro main control
module.

Step 9 Choose Maintenance > Configuration File and import the backup configuration
file, or set parameters for the devices that connect to the ECC800-Pro to ensure
normal communication.

----End

7.2.1.2 Replacing an ECC800-Pro PSU

Prerequisites

DANGER

Do not touch the terminals in the rear of a removed PSU to avoid electric shocks.

● Tool: insulation gloves

● Materials: a reserved undamaged and undeformed PSU of the appropriate
model.

Context
The PSU is hot-swappable.

Procedure
Step 1 Push the locking latch in the upper right corner of the PSU panel leftwards.

Step 2 Pull out the handle of the PSU to remove the PSU from the subrack.

Step 3 Gently push the reserved PSU into the subrack along guide rails, and push the
locking latch rightwards to secure the handle.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 287

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 7 Device Maintenance

Figure 7-3 Replacing a PSU

----End

7.2.1.3 Replacing ECC800-Pro Antennas

Prerequisites
● Tools: ESD wrist strap, ESD gloves
● Materials: Spare ECC800-Pro antennas of the same model are available and
functional.

Procedure
Step 1 Remove the 4G antenna cables and RF_Z antenna cables connected to the ports
on the ECC800-Pro, as shown in Figure 7-4.

Figure 7-4 Removing antennas

Step 2 Install the spare 4G antenna cables and RF_Z antenna cables in the original
positions and connect them to the ECC800-Pro.

----End

7.2.1.4 Replacing a SIM Card and Micro SD Card

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 288

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 7 Device Maintenance

Prerequisites
● Tools: ESD wrist strap, ESD gloves
● Materials: A spare SIM card and a micro SD card of the same model are
available and functional.

Procedure
Step 1 Record the position of the signal cable connected to the ECC800-Pro main control
module panel, and then disconnect the signal cable.
Step 2 Loosen the screws on both sides of the ECC800-Pro main control module.
Step 3 Pull the handles on both sides of the ECC800-Pro main control module, and to
remove the main control module.

Figure 7-5 Removing the ECC800-Pro main control module

Step 4 Remove the SIM card and micro SD card from the card slot.

Figure 7-6 Removing a SIM card and a micro SD card

Step 5 Install the spare SIM card and micro SD card into the card slot.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 289

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 7 Device Maintenance

Figure 7-7 Installing a SIM card and a micro SD card

Step 6 Install the ECC800-Pro main control module in the card slot.

Step 7 Tighten the screws on both sides of the ECC800-Pro main control module.

Step 8 Reconnect signal cables to the ECC800-Pro main control module panel based on
the recorded information.

----End

7.2.2 Replacing a UIM20A expansion module

Prerequisites
● Tools: Phillips screwdriver, label, marker
● Material: UIM20A expansion module

Procedure
Step 1 Label each cable based on the corresponding ports on the UIM20A expansion
module.

Step 2 Disconnect cables from the UIM20A expansion module.

Step 3 Unscrew the mounting ears from the two sides of the UIM20A expansion module,
and remove the UIM20A expansion module.

Figure 7-8 Removing a UIM20A

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 290

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 7 Device Maintenance

Step 4 Secure a mounting ear to each of the two sides of the spare UIM20A expansion
module using four M4 screws, and then secure the spare UIM20A expansion
module to the original installation position.

Step 5 Connect cables to the UIM20A expansion module based on the cable labels.

Step 6 Synchronize parameters of the UIM20A expansion module on the ECC800-Pro

WebUI.

Step 7 On the ECC800-Pro WebUI, choose Monitoring > System > ECC800 > Controls >
Delete device with communication failure, and click Submit.

Step 8 Log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI, and check the parameters and communication
status of the UIM20A expansion module to ensure that the communication is
normal.

----End

7.2.3 Replacing a Smart U Space Manager

Impact on the System

The U space status of the equipment cannot be displayed during replacement.

Preparations
● Tools: ESD gloves, label, marker
● Material: smart U space manager

Figure 7-9 Smart U space manager installation diagram (main control box
attached to the top of the cabinet interior)

(1) Fastener (2) UIM20A Expansion Module (3) Main control box

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 291

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 7 Device Maintenance

(4) Asset detection strip (42 U - -

detection point)

Figure 7-10 Installing a smart U space manager (main control box attached to the
top of the cabinet exterior)

(1) Fastener (2) UIM20A Expansion Module (3) Main control box

(4) Asset detection strip (42 U - -

detection point)

Procedure
Step 1 (Optional) If U Asset Label is faulty, perform the following steps to replace them.
1. Remove faulty U Asset Label from the customer equipment and the asset
detection strip.
2. Record the asset according to the commissioning guide.

Step 2 (Optional) If the asset detection strip is faulty, perform the following steps to
replace it.
1. Label the position of each U Asset Label on the asset detection strip.
2. Remove all U Asset Label from the asset detection strip.
3. Remove the faulty asset detection strip.
4. Install a new asset detection strip in the original position.
5. Install the U Asset Label in the original positions based on the position labels.

Step 3 (Optional) If the main control box is faulty, perform the following steps to replace
it.
1. Label each cable based on the corresponding ports on the main control box.
2. Remove the faulty main control box.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 292

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 7 Device Maintenance

3. Install a new main control box in the original position.

4. Connect the cables to the new main control box based on the cable labels.

----End

7.2.4 Replacing Sensors

7.2.4.1 Replacing a Temperature Sensor

Prerequisites
● Recommended tools and materials: diagonal pliers, insulation tape, cable tie,
step ladder (2 m).
● A temperature sensor needs to be replaced.
● Spare temperature sensors of the same model are available and functional.

Procedure
Step 1 Cut the cable ties on the temperature sensor using diagonal pliers, and remove
the network cable from the temperature sensor.

Step 2 Install the spare temperature sensor, bind it to the original position using cable
ties, and connect cables to it.

NOTICE

● When installing temperature sensors, bind the cables behind the sensors to the
cable bridge, keeping them 20 mm away from the sensor probes.
● Temperature sensors must not be in touch with metal parts or cabinets.
● Keep the temperature sensors facing the inside of the cabinets to ensure
accurate measurement of cabinet interior temperatures.

----End

7.2.4.2 Replacing the Hydrogen Detection System

Prerequisites
● The hydrogen detection system needs to be replaced.
● A spare hydrogen detection system of the same model is available and
functional.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 293

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 7 Device Maintenance

Preparations

DANGER

Do not operate with power on. Take appropriate insulation measures.

Tools: Phillips screwdriver, adjustable wrench, protective gloves

Materials: spare hydrogen detection system

Procedure
Step 1 Switch off the upstream circuit breaker of the hydrogen detection system to power
off the hydrogen detection system.

Step 2 Remove cables from the hydrogen detection system.

Step 3 Use a Phillips screwdriver to loose nuts on the mounting ears and remove the
faulty hydrogen detection system.

Step 4 Align the four mounting ears of the new hydrogen detection system with the
expansion bolts, and tighten the M6 nuts.

Figure 7-11 Installing a hydrogen detection system

Step 5 According to the silk screen and Figure 7-12, connect the ground cable to (1),
input power cable to (2), fan cables to (3), and hydrogen sensor cables to (4).

Step 6 Prepare one end of a network cable according to Table 7-18, and connect the
cable to (7).

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 294

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 7 Device Maintenance

DANGER

Pay attention to the negative and positive polarities of the power supply. If the
polarities are connected incorrectly, the device may be burned.

Figure 7-12 Connecting cables

(1) PE (2) AC IN (3) Output ports for fan

1 to fan 4

(4) Output ports for (5) Hydrogen (6) RS485+, RS485-,

hydrogen sensor 1 to concentration alarm GND, and idle ports
hydrogen sensor 4 port, fan alarm port, and (reserved ports)
hardware fault port
(reserved ports)

(7) RS485

Table 7-18 Pin mapping for the RS485 port

Pin Signal Function

Pin 1 (orange-white) D+ RS485+

Pin 2 (orange) D- RS485-

Pin 3 (green-white) 12V+ 12+ input

Pin 4 (blue) NC -

Pin 5 (blue-white) NC -

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 295

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 7 Device Maintenance

Pin Signal Function

Pin 6 (green) NC -

Pin 7 (brown-white) NC -

Pin 8 (brown) 12V- 12- input

Step 7 Switch on the circuit breaker of the hydrogen detection system, and check
whether it is working properly.
NOTE

If the hydrogen density displayed on the hydrogen detection system, the hydrogen detection
system is working properly.

----End

Follow-up Procedure
Dispose of the removed hydrogen detection system that is confirmed faulty.

7.2.4.3 Replacing a Smoke Detector

Prerequisites
● Recommended tools and materials: Phillips screwdriver, insulation tape, step
ladder (2 m).
● A smoke detector needs to be replaced.
● A spare smoke detector of the same model is available and functional.

Procedure
Step 1 Rotate the smoke detector to remove it from the base.

Figure 7-13 Removing a smoke detector

Step 2 Remove the cables from the smoke detector and apply insulation measures such
as wrapping the cables with insulation tape to avoid hazards.
Step 3 Install a new smoke detector and reconnect the cables.
Step 4 Install the new smoke detector to the base by rotating it in a direction opposite to
Step 1.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 296

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 7 Device Maintenance

Step 5 Blow smoke towards the smoke detector using a smoke pistol until the smoke
detector indicator changes from blinking once every 6s to steady on. If a smoke
detector fire alarm is triggered, the smoke detector is functional.

----End

7.2.4.4 Replacing a T/H Sensor

Prerequisites
● Recommended tools: Phillips screwdriver, flat-head screwdriver
● A T/H sensor needs to be replaced.
● A spare T/H sensor of the same model is available and functional.

Procedure
Step 1 Remove cables from the T/H sensor.

Step 2 Remove the T/H sensor from its base.

NOTICE
After removing cables, wrap exposed terminals with insulation tape and do not
block cable labels. If cable labels are blocked, cables may be connected incorrectly.

Step 3 Install a new T/H sensor onto the base.

NOTICE
Before removing a T/H sensor, remember the DIP switch setting on it. When you
install a new T/H sensor, you need to set the same DIP switch setting for the new
one.

Step 4 Reconnect cables to the new T/H sensor.

----End

7.2.4.5 Replacing a Region-type Water Sensor and Water Detection Cable

Prerequisites
● The water sensor needs to be replaced.
● A spare water sensor of the same model is available and functional.

Context
Prepare a water sensor or water detection cable of the same model.

A water sensor consists of a water detection cable, water detector, and conversion
cable. The water detection cable is laid out on the floor, connecting to the water

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 297

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 7 Device Maintenance

detector placed near the collector by the conversion cable. Figure 7-14 shows the
components.

Figure 7-14 Water sensor components

(1) Water sensor (2) Conversion cable end A, (3) Conversion cable
connecting to the water detector

(4) Conversion cable end B, (5) Water detection cable end A, (6) Water detection cable
connecting to the water connecting to the conversion cable
detection cable

Recommended tool and material: crimping tool

Procedure
Step 1 Replace the water sensor.
1. Remove the conversion cable at the conversion port for the water sensor and
conversion cable.
2. Connect a new water sensor to the conversion cable, as shown in Figure 7-15.
3. Secure the new water sensor.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 298

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 7 Device Maintenance

Figure 7-15 Connecting a conversion cable to a water sensor

Step 2 Replace a water detection cable.

1. Remove the faulty water detection cable from the port.
2. Install a new water detection cable, as shown in Figure 7-16.

Figure 7-16 Connecting a new water detection cable

(1) Conversion cable end B, connecting to the (2) Water detection cable end A, connecting to
water detection cable the conversion cable

NOTE

The water detection cable and conversion cable are interconnected through the male and
female connectors.

----End

Follow-up Procedure
Check whether the new water sensor works properly. Connect the network cable
between the water detector and the ECC800-Pro, immerse the water detection
cable in water, and check whether an alarm is generated. If an alarm is generated,
the replacement is complete.

7.2.4.6 Replacing a Location-type Water Sensor and Water Detection Cable

Prerequisites
● The water sensor needs to be replaced.
● A spare water sensor of the same model is available and functional.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 299

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 7 Device Maintenance

Context
● Prepare a location-type water sensor or water detection cable of the same
model.
● The location-type water sensor consists of a water leakage locator, tieline,
and water leakage location cable. The water detection cable is laid out on the
floor. The liquid level sensor is deployed around the collector. The water
detection cable and the liquid level sensor are connected using the lead wire.
● Recommended tool and material: crimping tool

Procedure
Step 1 Replace the water sensor.
1. Pull out the water detection cable from the lead wire port on the water
leakage locator.
2. Remove the water leakage locator from the DIN guide rail.
3. Install the new water leakage locator on the DIN guide rail with the latch
facing upwards.
NOTE

– Touch grounded devices or pipes to eliminate ESD before taking the water sensor
module.
– Place it gently. Prevent it against mechanical impact and collision. Keep it dry.
– Prevent it against metal filings, grease, pipe paint, and other contaminants.
4. Connect one end of the black quick-connect terminal of the lead wire from
the liquid level sensor to the location-type water detection cable, and connect
the other end of the quick-connect terminal to the sensor.

Step 2 Replace a water detection cable.

1. Remove the faulty water detection cable from the port.
2. Install a new water detection cable.

----End

Follow-up Procedure
Check whether the new location-type water sensor works properly. Connect the
network cable between the water sensor and the ECC800-Pro, immerse the water
detection cable in water, and check whether an alarm is raised. If an alarm is
raised, the replacement is complete.

7.2.5 Replacing the Management System

7.2.5.1 Replacing an M2121 Camera

Prerequisites
● A camera needs to be replaced.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 300

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 7 Device Maintenance

● A spare camera of the same model is available and functional.

NOTE

The methods for replacing the M2121 and IPC6225 cameras are similar. This section uses
the M2121 camera as an example.

Procedure
Step 1 Loosen the four ST39 tapping screws on the camera.

Figure 7-17 Removing the M2121 camera

Step 2 Disconnect the monitoring network cable and remove the camera from the wall.

Step 3 Install a new camera, reconnect the network cable, and secure the camera to the
base using screws.

Step 4 Adjust the camera coverage based on video images.

----End

Follow-up Procedure
Check whether the new camera works properly. If video images are properly
displayed on the video screen of the management system client, the new camera
works properly.

7.2.5.2 Replacing an IVS1800

Prerequisites
● Recommended tool: Phillips screwdriver
● An IVS1800 needs to be replaced.
● A spare IVS1800 of the same model is available and functional.

Context

NOTICE

Videos cannot be recorded during the replacement of the IVS1800.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 301

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 7 Device Maintenance

DANGER

Do not operate with power on. Take appropriate insulation measures.

Procedure
Step 1 Turn off the power switch of the IVS1800, disconnect the power supply of the
IVS1800, remove the cables from the IVS1800, label the cables, and record the
original connection positions of the cables.

NOTICE

After removing cables, wrap exposed terminals with insulation tape and do not
block cable labels. If cable labels are blocked, cables may be connected incorrectly.

Step 2 Remove the faulty IVS1800 from the cabinet.

Step 3 Carry the device to the cabinet. Ensure that the mounting ears at both sides of the
device are tightly attached to the mounting bars in front of the cabinet. Use one
hand to hold the device. Use the other hand to thread M6 screws through the
slotted holes on the mounting ears. Use a Phillips screwdriver to tighten the M6
screws on the mounting ears. Each mounting ear uses two M6 screws.

Figure 7-18 Installing a device

Step 4 Reconnect the cables to the new IVS1800.

Step 5 Turn on the power switch of the IVS1800.

Step 6 Commissioning the IVS1800. If the video recording function works properly after
commissioning, the IVS1800 is functional.

----End

7.2.5.3 Replacing a Hard Disk for the IVS1800

Prerequisites
● A hard disk needs to be replaced.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 302

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 7 Device Maintenance

● Data in the hard disk has been backed up.

● A spare hard disk of the same model is available and functional.
● Before replacing a faulty disk, ensure that the power switch on the rear panel
is off and disconnect the power cable to power off the device.

Context
Recommended tools and materials: Phillips screwdriver, ESD wrist strap (or ESD
gloves).

Procedure
Step 1 Put on an ESD wrist strap (or ESD gloves) and insert the ground terminal into the
ESD jack in the cabinet.
Step 2 Remove the faulty hard disk.
1. Use a PH2 screwdriver to remove the two black screws on the rear of the
chassis cover, and take off the chassis cover.

Figure 7-19 Removing the chassis cover

2. Remove two black screws on each side of the chassis and the silvery white
one on top of the hard disk tray, raise the hard disk tray by 45 degrees, and
take out the upper and then lower layers of hard disk tray.

Figure 7-20 Removing the hard disk tray

Step 3 Install a new hard disk.

1. Place the hard disk with ports facing upwards and align the screw holes on
the hard disk tray with the hard disk and fasten the screws. Before the
installation, ensure that the fastener of the hard disk tray is on a different
side from the hard disk port, as shown in the lower left figure.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 303

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 7 Device Maintenance

Figure 7-21 Installing hard disks

2. Insert the hard disk tray back at 45 degrees with the opening of its locking
buckle facing downwards, hold the screw in the red-framed part to lower the
hard disk tray until it is level, and fasten the black screws on the left and right
sides and the white screw on the top.

Figure 7-22 Fastening the screw on the panel and the screws on the hard disk
tray

3. Connect data and power cables to hard disks. Connect hard disk cable ports
P0–P3 to hard disks on the lower-layer hard disk tray and ports P4–P7 to hard
disks on the upper-layer.

Figure 7-23 Connecting data and power cables to hard disks

4. Close the chassis cover, and use a PH2 screwdriver to fasten the rear screws.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 304

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 7 Device Maintenance

Figure 7-24 Closing the chassis cover

Step 4 Observe the hard disk indicator to check whether the hard disk works properly.

----End

Follow-up Procedure
If the hard disk works abnormally, contact Huawei technical support.

7.2.6 Replacing the Access Management System

7.2.6.1 Replacing an Access Controller

Prerequisites
● An access controller needs to be replaced.
● A spare access controller of the same model is available and functional.

Context

DANGER

Do not operate with power on. Take appropriate insulation measures.

Recommended tools and materials: diagonal pliers, crimping tool, insulation tape,
Phillips screwdriver, cord end terminal

Procedure
Step 1 Disconnect power supply from the access controller. Then, remove cables that
connect to the access controller, label the cables, and record where the labeled
cables were connected.
Step 2 Remove the access controller from the wall, as shown in Figure 7-25.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 305

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 7 Device Maintenance

Figure 7-25 Removing an access controller

Step 3 Unpack and take out the new access controller.

Step 4 Unlock the access controller with the delivered key.

Figure 7-26 Unlocking an access controller

Step 5 Install the new access controller by performing the operations prior to Step 3 in
reverse order.

Step 6 Reinstall the removed cables for the access controller according to the labels and
start the access controller.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 306

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 7 Device Maintenance

Step 7 Set the address of the access controller using the DIP switch, as shown in Table
7-19.

Table 7-19 Setting the address of the access controller

Address Value Toggle Switch 1 Toggle Switch 2

0 OFF OFF

1 ON OFF

2 OFF ON

3 ON ON

Step 8 Set the baud rate of the access controller to 19200. The preset data bit, stop bit,
and check bit are 8, 1, and none respectively.

----End

7.2.6.2 Replacing a Double-Door Magnetic Lock

Prerequisites
● A double-door magnetic lock needs to be replaced.
● Spare magnetic locks of the same model are available and functional.

Context
Prepare magnetic locks of the same model.
Recommended tools and materials: crimping tool, Phillips screwdriver, hex key
(delivered with the product package), step ladder (2 m).

Procedure
Step 1 Remove the cover of the magnetic lock, as shown in Figure 7-27.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 307

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 7 Device Maintenance

Figure 7-27 Removing a cover

Step 2 Remove magnetic lock cables from the terminals and route the cables out of the
cable holes, as shown in Figure 7-28.

Figure 7-28 Removing cables

Step 3 Remove the base and the magnetic lock, as shown in Figure 7-29.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 308

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 7 Device Maintenance

Figure 7-29 Removing the base

Step 4 Separate the base from the magnetic lock using a hex key, as shown in Figure
7-30. Unpack and take out a new magnetic lock.

Figure 7-30 Separating a magnetic lock

Step 5 Install the new magnetic lock.

1. Remove the fixing plate from the magnetic lock using the delivered hex key
as shown in Figure 7-31.
NOTE

The four hex socket screws should be removed in this step.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 309

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 7 Device Maintenance

Figure 7-31 Remove the fixing plate of the magnetic lock

2. After the base and the fixing plate are secured, route the magnetic lock cables
into the base and secure all the components.
3. Install a double-door magnetic lock by performing the operations prior to
Step 3 in a reverse order.

----End

Follow-up Procedure
If the electromagnet does not work properly after power-on, check the following
items:
1. Check whether the electromagnets provide magnetic force by attaching
magnetizable iron parts to them.
2. Check whether the magnetic iron plates align with the electromagnets.
3. Check whether gaps exist between the magnetic iron plates and the
electromagnets.
If any of the preceding conditions occur, troubleshoot the magnetic lock as
follows:
1. Check the circuit and rectify any circuit fault.
2. Adjust the magnetic iron plate base and door panels to ensure that the
magnetic iron plates align with the electromagnets. Ensure that the position
deviation is no too large.
3. If gaps exist between the electromagnets and the magnetic iron plates, rectify
the fault by referring to Figure 7-32.
4. If the magnetic iron plates are not level with each other, adjust them by using
the spacer shown in Figure 7-33.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 310

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 7 Device Maintenance

Figure 7-32 Adjusting the gap

Figure 7-33 Spacer

7.2.6.3 Replacing a Single-Door Magnetic Lock

The method of replacing a single-door magnetic lock is similar to that of replacing
a double-door magnetic lock. For details, see the section about replacing a
double-door magnetic lock.

7.2.6.4 Replacing a Card Reader

Prerequisites
● A card reader needs to be replaced.
● Spare card readers of the same model are available and functional.

Context
Prepare a spare access card reader of the same model.
Recommended tools and materials: crimping tool and Phillips screwdriver

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 311

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 7 Device Maintenance

Procedure
Step 1 Remove the post side panel.
Step 2 Remove the mounting plate of the card reader, as shown in Figure 7-34.

Figure 7-34 Removing the mounting plate

Step 3 Remove the screws on the card reader cover and remove the cover, as shown in
Figure 7-35.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 312

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 7 Device Maintenance

Figure 7-35 Removing the cover

Step 4 Remove the card reader, as shown in Figure 7-36.

Figure 7-36 Removing the card reader

Step 5 Take out a new card reader.

Step 6 Remove the screws that secure the card reader and take out the card reader cover,
as shown in Figure 7-37.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 313

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 7 Device Maintenance

Figure 7-37 Removing the card reader cover

Step 7 Install the new card reader by performing the operations prior to Step 5 in reverse
order.
Step 8 Reinstall the post side panel.

----End

Follow-up Procedure
Power on the access controller and check whether the card reader works properly.

7.2.6.5 Replacing a Fingerprint and Card Reader

Prerequisites
● Recommended tool: Phillips screwdriver
● A fingerprint and card reader needs to be replaced.
● A spare fingerprint and card reader of the same model is available and
functional.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 314

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 7 Device Maintenance

Context

Figure 7-38 Fingerprint and card reader

Procedure
Step 1 Remove the screw that secures the fingerprint and card reader, and remove the
cable, as shown by (1), (2), and (3) in Figure 7-39.

Figure 7-39 Removing a bottom plate

Step 2 Remove the original bottom plate, as shown by (4) in Figure 7-39.

Step 3 Take out the bottom plate of the new fingerprint and card reader and secure it.

Step 4 Connect the cable.

Step 5 Secure the fingerprint and card reader to the bottom plate.

Step 6 Choose System > Service Settings > Data Center Planning from the main menu.
The Data Center Planning page is displayed.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 315

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 7 Device Maintenance

Step 7 Select the new fingerprint and card reader, and click Connection test. When
Connection success is displayed, the replacement is complete.
----End

7.2.6.6 Replacing a Card Reader with a Keypad

Prerequisites
● Recommended tool: Phillips screwdriver
● A card reader with a keypad needs to be replaced.
● A spare card reader with a keypad of the same model is available and
functional.

Context

Figure 7-40 Card reader with a keypad

Procedure
Step 1 Remove the screw that secures the card reader with a keypad, and remove the
cable, as shown by (1), (2), and (3) in Figure 7-41.

Figure 7-41 Removing a bottom plate

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 316

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 7 Device Maintenance

Step 2 Remove the original bottom plate, as shown by (4) in Figure 7-41.

Step 3 Take out the bottom plate of the new card reader with a keypad and secure it.

Step 4 Connect the cable.

Step 5 Secure the card reader with a keypad to the bottom plate.

Step 6 Choose System > Service Settings > Data Center Planning from the main menu.
The Data Center Planning page is displayed.

Step 7 Select the new card reader with a keypad, and click Connection test. When
Connection success is displayed, the replacement is complete.

----End

7.2.6.7 Replacing a Fingerprint and Card Reader with a Keypad

Prerequisites
● Recommended tool: Phillips screwdriver
● A fingerprint and card reader with a keypad needs to be replaced.
● A spare fingerprint and card reader with a keypad of the same model is
available and functional.

Context

Figure 7-42 Fingerprint and card reader with a keypad

Procedure
Step 1 Remove the screw that secures the fingerprint and card reader with a keypad, and
remove the cable, as shown by (1), (2), and (3) in Figure 7-43.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 317

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 7 Device Maintenance

Figure 7-43 Replacing a fingerprint and card reader with a keypad

Step 2 Remove the original bottom plate, as shown by (4) in Figure 7-43.
Step 3 Take out the bottom plate of the new fingerprint and card reader with a keypad
and secure it.
Step 4 Connect the cable.
Step 5 Secure the fingerprint and card reader with a keypad to the bottom plate.
Step 6 Choose System > Service Settings > Data Center Planning from the main menu.
The Data Center Planning page is displayed.
Step 7 Select the new fingerprint and card reader with a keypad, and click Connection
test. When Connection success is displayed, the replacement is complete.
----End

7.2.6.8 Replacing an Emergency Door Release Button

Prerequisites
● Recommended tool: Phillips screwdriver
● An emergency door release button needs to be replaced.
● A spare emergency door release button of the same model is available and
functional.

Context

Figure 7-44 Emergency door release button

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 318

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 7 Device Maintenance

Procedure
Step 1 Remove the emergency door release button.
1. Remove the screw that secures the emergency door release button, as shown
by (1) in Figure 7-45.
2. Remove the glass panel of the emergency door release button, as shown by
(2) and (3) in Figure 7-45.
3. Remove the screws that secure the base, as shown by (4) in Figure 7-45.
4. Disconnect cables and remove the emergency door release button.

Figure 7-45 Removing an emergency door release button

Step 2 Install a new emergency door release button.

1. Connect cables.
2. Tighten screws on the base, as shown by (1) in Figure 7-46.
3. Install the glass panel, as shown by (2) and (3) in Figure 7-46.
4. Tighten the screw, as shown by (4) in Figure 7-46.

Figure 7-46 Installing an emergency door release button

Step 3 Close the room door, and open the protection box of the emergency door release
button.

Step 4 Remove the cover of the emergency door release button using a Phillips
screwdriver and remove the glass. If the room door can be opened normally, the
emergency door release button is functional.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 319

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 7 Device Maintenance

Step 5 Install the emergency door release button.

----End

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 320

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 8 FAQ

8 FAQ

8.1 How Do I Handle Abnormal Door Control Status?

Context
If the door control status collected by the NetEco is always open, resolve the issue
by following the procedure in this section.

Procedure
Step 1 Check whether the door in the door control system is open.
● If the door is open, close the door.
● If the door is closed, go to Step 2.

Step 2 Check whether cables are connected to the door access controller and door lock
properly.
● If cables are not connected properly, reconnect cables.
● If cables are connected properly, go to Step 3.

Step 3 Check whether the angle and tightness of the door magnet are appropriate.
● If the angle and tightness are inappropriate, adjust them.
● If the angle and tightness are appropriate, contact Huawei technical support.

----End

8.2 How Do I Change the NetEco IP Address?

Prerequisites
You have the operation rights of the ECC800-Pro WebUI and UPS2000–G.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 321

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 8 FAQ

Procedure
Step 1 Change the NetEco IP address.
1. In the browser address bar, enter https://client IP address of PowerEcho:31945,
enter the User Name and Password, and press Enter to access the
PowerEcho client.
NOTE

The default user name for PowerEcho is admin and the preset password is
Changeme_123.
2. On PowerEcho, choose Maintenance > Network Configuration > Configure
IP Address from the main menu.
3. Choose Modify IP Address, select the NetEco to be configured, and click Edit,
set IP Address,Subnet Mask/Prefix Length and NIC Usage, and click Apply.
NOTE

After you change IP address of a database node, the product services and the databases
will be automatically restarted.

Step 2 Update the NetEco IP address on the ECC800-Pro WebUI.

1. Log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI.
2. Set NetEco communications parameters.

Table 8-1 NetEco communications parameters

Path Parameter Default Setting

Value

System Server IP 192.168.8 IP address of the primary NetEco

Settings > .11 server
NMS NOTE
Application The NetEco IP address and the
> NetEco > ECC800-Pro IP address must be
Communica configured in the same network to
ensure normal connection between
tion
the NetEco and the ECC800-Pro.
Parameters
Port number 31220 31220

Network WAN_1 WAN_1 or WAN_2

port for link
setup

3. Click Submit.

Step 3 Modify the UPS2000-G/UPS2000-H SNMP trap parameters (WebUI 1)

1. Log in to the UPS2000-G WebUI.
2. Choose System Settings > SNMP Settings.
3. In the SNMP Trap area, if Trap Target Address is the same as the NetEco IP
address before the modification, select this row and click Delete.
4. In the SNMP Trap area, click Add.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 322

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 8 FAQ

5. In the displayed SNMP Trap dialog box, set SNMP trap parameters, and click
Confirm.
– Enter the IP address of the NetEco server in the Trap Target Address text
box.
– Set Trap Port to 162.

Figure 8-1 Setting SNMP trap parameters

6. Click Confirm.
Step 4 Modify the UPS2000-G/UPS2000-H SNMP trap parameters (WebUI 2)
1. Log in to the UPS2000-G/UPS2000-H WebUI.
2. Choose Configure > SNMP.
3. In the NMS Address and Permissions Settings area, select the line where the
value of NMS addr. is the same as the NetEco IP address before change in the
No. column, and click Delete.
4. Click Add, enter the IP address of the NetEco server in the NMS addr. text
box, and click Add.
5. In the SNMP TRAP area, select the line where the value of Trap addr. is the
same as the NetEco IP address before change in the No. column, and click
Delete.
6. Click Add, enter the IP address of the NetEco server in the Trap addr. text
box, enter 162 in the Trap port text box, and click Add.

----End

8.3 Logging In to the NetEco App

Logging In to the App
Step 1 Press and hold down the UPS power button for 0.5s to enable the WiFi of the UPS.
(The WiFi indicator will turn on.)

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 323

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 8 FAQ

Figure 8-2 Power button

Step 2 Open the NetEco app on the mobile device. The Select Application screen is
displayed.

Figure 8-3 Select Application

Step 3 Tap UPS. The Connect WLAN screen is displayed. Use either of the following
methods to connect to the WLAN network.

Figure 8-4 Connect WLAN

● Manually connect to WLAN

a. Enable WLAN on the mobile device. (Skip this step if WLAN has been
enabled.)

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 324

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 8 FAQ

b. Tap Manually connect to WLAN. The Select WLAN network screen is

displayed.
c. Select the UPS WiFi.
NOTE

How do I know the WiFi name of the UPS to be connected? Check the ESN under
the QR code on the UPS monitoring device. The last four digits of the ESN are
the same as the last four digits of the UPS WiFi name.
d. Enter the WiFi password. (The initial WiFi password is Changeme.)
NOTE

If this is not the first login, you do not need to enter the WiFi password.
● Scan to connect to WLAN
a. Enable WLAN on the mobile device. (Skip this step if WLAN has been
enabled.)
b. Tap Scan to connect to WLAN.
c. Scan the QR code on the UPS panel.

Step 4 After the WiFi connection is set up, the UPS login screen is displayed.

Step 5 Enter the user name and password and tap Log In. (The default user name is
emscomm, and the initial password is Modifyme_123.)

Figure 8-5 Login

CAUTION

● After the initial login, change the password in time to improve account security
and prevent data tampering.
● To change the password, choose Me > Change Password.

Step 6 After successful login, the Quick Settings screen is displayed. Verify parameters
such as the voltage level, frequency, and battery settings based on the actual
situation. You can manually set parameters as required.

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 325

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 8 FAQ

Figure 8-6 Quick Settings

NOTE

If it is not the first login, skip the quick settings operation.

Step 7 Tap OK. The home screen is displayed.

----End

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 326

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 9 Acronyms and Abbreviations

9 Acronyms and Abbreviations

A
AC alternating current
AES Advanced encryption standard
AI analog input

C
COM component object model

D
DC direct current
DES Data Encryption Standard
DI digital input
DO digital output

E
ECC energy control center
ETH Ethernet

F
FE fast Ethernet

I
iBAT iBattery
IC integrated circuit
iCooling iCooling
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 327

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 9 Acronyms and Abbreviations

IP Internet Protocol
IT Internet technology

L
LAN Local Area Network
LED light emitting diode

M
MD5 message digest algorithm

N
NAT network address translation
NetEco iMaster NetEco data center infrastructure
management system
NTC negative temperature coefficient

P
PDU power distribution unit
PoE power over Ethernet

R
RF radio frequency
RSA Revist-Shamir-Adleman Algorithm

S
SD secure digital
SFTP Secure File Transfer Protocol
SHA SecureHashAlgorithm
SIM subscriber identity module
SMS short message service
SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol
SSL Secure Sockets Layer

T
TLS Transport Layer Security

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 328

iMaster NetEco
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (Data
Center) 9 Acronyms and Abbreviations

UPS uninterruptible power system

USB universal serial bus

V
VCN video cloud node

W
WiFi wireless fidelity

Issue 02 (2021-05-12) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 329